Get documents about "PFED_v4-0_User_Manual-booklet
Document Sample
Pocket-sized Forward Entry Device
PFED Version 4.0
AN/PSG-10 (V)1 R-PDA
AN/PSG-10 (V)2 R-PDA w/PPS
AN/PSG-10 (V)3 R-PDA w/SAASM
User Manual
March 16, 2009
DRAFT
Distribution authorized to U.S. Government agencies and their contractors for official use or for
administrative or operational purposes only. This determination was made on 27 January 2004.
Other requests for the document will be referred to Commander U.S. Army Communications-
Electronics Command and Fort Monmouth, ATTN: AMSEL-LC-LEO-E-ED, Fort Monmouth, New
Jersey 07703-5006.
DESTRUCTION NOTICE - Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or
reconstruction of the document.
HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
Table Of Contents PFED User Manual
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION AND SYSTEM OVERVIEW.................... 1
1.1 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................... 1
1.2 CONCEPT OF OPERATIONS.......................................................................... 1
1.3 SYSTEM OVERVIEW ................................................................................... 1
CHAPTER 2 PFED SYSTEM ASSEMBLY ................................................... 3
2.1 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................... 3
2.2 BASIC PFED COMPONENTS ....................................................................... 3
2.2.1 Uniform Integration ....................................................................... 7
2.2.2 Additional Devices ......................................................................... 8
CHAPTER 3 HANDHELD SETUP ................................................................. 9
3.1 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................... 9
3.1.1 Handheld/Desktop Device Application Differences ....................... 9
3.1.2 Keypad Operation ........................................................................ 10
3.1.3 Field Types ................................................................................... 10
3.2 INITIAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION (3900 MODEL)....................................... 11
3.2.1 Hard Reset Using External Buttons on the 3900.......................... 12
3.2.2 Hard Reset Using Reset Application on the 3900......................... 14
3.2.3 Reset Process on the 3900............................................................ 15
3.2.4 Application Installation on the 3900 ............................................ 16
3.2.5 PointSec Installation or System Recovery on the 3900 ................ 18
3.3 RESETTING THE DEVICE (3900 MODEL) .................................................. 21
3.3.1 Soft Reset on the 3900 .................................................................. 22
3.4 HANDHELD DEVICE SETTINGS (3900 MODEL) ......................................... 22
3.4.1 Access System Setting Options on the 3900.................................. 22
3.4.2 Power Configuration on the 3900 ................................................ 23
3.4.3 System Clock on the 3900............................................................. 25
3.4.4 Power Low Warning on the 3900 ................................................. 28
3.5 BLUETOOTH MODE (3900 MODEL) .......................................................... 29
3.6 EXTERNAL BUTTONS (3900 MODEL) ....................................................... 30
3.7 INITIAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION (5700 MODEL)....................................... 31
3.7.1 Hard Reset Using External Buttons.............................................. 31
3.7.2 Hard Reset Using Reset Application on the 5700......................... 33
3.7.3 Reset Process on the 5700............................................................ 33
3.7.4 Application Installation on the 5700 ............................................ 34
3.7.5 PointSec Installation or System Recovery on the 5700 ................ 36
3.8 RESETTING THE DEVICE (5700 MODEL) .................................................. 39
3.8.1 Soft Reset on the 5700 .................................................................. 40
3.9 HANDHELD DEVICE SETTINGS (5700 MODEL) ......................................... 40
DRAFT i March 16, 2009
Table Of Contents PFED User Manual
3.9.1 Access System Setting Options on the 5700.................................. 40
3.9.2 Power Configuration on the 5700 ................................................ 40
3.9.3 System Clock on the 5700............................................................. 43
3.9.4 Power Low Warning on the 5700 ................................................. 46
3.10 LOCK/UNLOCK DEVICE (5700 MODEL)......................................... 47
3.11 STEALTH MODE (5700 MODEL) .................................................... 48
3.12 BLUETOOTH MODE (5700 MODEL) ............................................... 49
3.13 EXTERNAL BUTTONS (5700 MODEL) ............................................ 50
CHAPTER 4 MAIN SCREEN........................................................................ 51
4.1 ACTIVATING THE PFED APPLICATION ..................................................... 51
4.2 PFED NAVIGATION ................................................................................. 53
4.2.1 Title Bar Ok Button ...................................................................... 53
4.2.2 Minimizing PFED......................................................................... 53
4.3 TOOLBAR ................................................................................................. 54
4.3.1 GPS/Manual Time Sync................................................................ 55
4.3.2 Communications Status ................................................................ 55
4.3.3 Transmit Queue ............................................................................ 55
4.3.4 Fire Mission Monitor ................................................................... 55
4.3.5 Check Firing................................................................................. 56
4.3.6 System Alert.................................................................................. 56
4.3.7 Handheld Keypad ......................................................................... 56
4.4 SETTING UP YOUR PFED HANDHELD...................................................... 56
4.4.1 GPS/Manual Time Sync................................................................ 56
4.4.2 Operator (Positional) Location .................................................... 57
4.4.2.1 Non-existent GPS Device or Embedded GPS ...................................... 58
4.4.2.2 Disconnected GPS Device ................................................................... 59
4.4.2.3 GPS Device Not Providing Data.......................................................... 60
4.4.2.4 Position Data Not Updated within Set Time Period............................. 60
4.4.2.5 Setting Operator (Positional) Location ................................................ 61
4.4.3 Waypoint/Route Configuration and Navigation ........................... 63
4.4.3.1 Use Current Location as Waypoint ...................................................... 63
4.4.3.2 Create/Edit Waypoints ......................................................................... 64
4.4.3.3 Create/Edit Routes ............................................................................... 65
4.4.3.4 Record A Route ................................................................................... 67
4.4.3.5 Navigate To Waypoints/Routes ........................................................... 68
4.4.3.6 Define Thresholds................................................................................ 72
4.4.4 Edit Menu Overview ..................................................................... 72
4.4.5 Address/Unit List Setup ................................................................ 73
4.4.6 Own Unit Information (Own Unit Info) Setup .............................. 73
4.4.7 Map Datum Information (Map Datum Info) Setup....................... 79
4.4.7.1 Datum/Area/Ellipsoid .......................................................................... 80
4.4.7.2 Grid Declination and Magnetic Variance............................................. 85
4.4.8 Devices Setup ............................................................................... 85
DRAFT ii March 16, 2009
Table Of Contents PFED User Manual Appendix G – Document Change History PFED User Manual
4.4.9 Fire Support Setup - Target Numbering....................................... 85 Section 3.2.3 marked for modification for new
4.4.10 Fire Support Setup - Planned Target List..................................... 86 PointSec instructions.
4.4.10.1 Creating New Targets .......................................................................... 87 Figure 3-23 changed.
4.4.10.2 Modify Existing Targets ...................................................................... 88 Sections 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, 3.10 and 3.11 new
4.4.10.3 Removing Existing Targets.................................................................. 88 sections for model 5700 device.
4.4.10.4 Exit Screen........................................................................................... 88 V79 8/14/08 Sections 3.5 & 3.12 new for the Bluetooth mode.
4.4.11 Fire Support Setup – CFF Templates........................................... 88 V82 8/29/08 Section B.8 New Troubleshooting for Bluetooth
4.4.12 Fire Support Setup – Known Points ............................................. 90 Mode.
4.4.12.1 Creating New Known Points................................................................ 90 Section 3.7.3 updated step 8 and figure 3-54
4.4.12.2 Modify Existing Known Points............................................................ 92 updated.
4.4.12.3 Removing Existing Known Points ....................................................... 92 Section 3.7.5 updated.
4.4.12.4 Exit Screen........................................................................................... 92 V84 11/18/08 Section 4.4.3.4 Step 3 changed, step 4 removed and
4.4.13 Fire Support Setup – FSCMs/Geometries .................................... 92 note removed.
4.4.14 Preferences (Prefs) Setup - Measurement Units........................... 94 Figure 8-4 replaced
4.4.15 Preferences (Prefs) Setup – Automatic Position Reporting.......... 95 Section 8.2.2 new sub-section titled
Volleys/Comments with a new step 23 & 24 and
4.4.16 Preferences (Prefs) Setup – Hotkeys ............................................ 97 Figure 8-20.
4.4.17 Preferences (Prefs) Setup – SALUTE/ATI.................................... 98 V1 (previous 3/17/07 Version established for V4.0 software.
4.4.18 Database Maintenance................................................................. 98 version
4.4.19 Exiting PFED ............................................................................... 99 deployed)
V3 3/17/09 All references to Package-11 have been removed,
CHAPTER 5 COMMUNICATIONS ........................................................... 100 and the System Types drop down selections for Own
Unit Info has been updated.
5.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................... 100
All references to Vector device has been removed
5.1.1 Device Setup ............................................................................... 100
Section 4.4.3.1 new steps added, 2 through 5.
5.1.1.1 Configuring Devices .......................................................................... 100
Section 4.4.3.2 new steps added, 8 through 10.
5.1.2 Address/Unit List Setup .............................................................. 110
5.1.2.1 Units Configuration ........................................................................... 111 Section 4.4.3.3 new steps and notes changed.
5.1.2.2 Network Information ......................................................................... 112 Section 4.4.3.4 step 3 changed.
5.1.2.3 Message Configuration ...................................................................... 114 Section 4.4.3.5 removed 2 steps.
5.2 COMMUNICATIONS STATUS ................................................................... 116 Section 4.4.3.6 new section.
5.2.1 Device Status Information .......................................................... 117 Section 5.1.1.1 Major changes to this section,
removed any Vector device replaced with Leica,
5.2.2 Resetting a Device ...................................................................... 118 changed instructions for the Leica device.
5.3 TRANSMISSION STATUS ......................................................................... 118 Section 5.1.2.1 new note.
5.3.1 Accessing Transmission Queue .................................................. 119 Section 5.2.2 entire section changed for new
5.3.1.1 Aborting a Transmission.................................................................... 120 instructions.
5.3.1.2 Retrying a Transmission .................................................................... 121 Section 8.3.5 new section.
5.3.1.3 Deferring a Transmission................................................................... 121 New version created for 4.0 release.
5.3.1.4 Sending to a New Unit ....................................................................... 121
Section 7.2.4.2 for the Class IX Supplies section, a
5.3.1.5 Exit..................................................................................................... 121 new note has been added.
5.4 ALERTS .................................................................................................. 122 Section 7.2.9.2.1 steps 4 & 5 modified for new
5.4.1 Accessing Alerts ......................................................................... 122 screen shot.
Figures 4-40, 4-42, 7-38, 7-39 and 8-27 replaced.
CHAPTER 6 MESSAGING.......................................................................... 123
6.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................... 123
6.2 ACCESSING THE MESSAGE SCREEN........................................................ 123
6.3 SENDING A MESSAGE (NEW PTM)......................................................... 123
DRAFT iii March 16, 2009 DRAFT 282 March 16, 2009
Appendix G – Document Change History PFED User Manual Table Of Contents PFED User Manual
device. 6.3.1 Composing a Message................................................................ 124
New section B.5 for Vector configuration 6.3.2 Selecting Recipients.................................................................... 124
troubleshooting. 6.3.3 Selecting Priority........................................................................ 125
All Note boxess, Caution boxes, Warning boxes and 6.3.4 Saving Messages......................................................................... 125
Tip boxes have been reformatted to identify their
importance and distinguish between their differences. 6.3.5 Opening a Saved Message.......................................................... 125
V47 1/10/08 Section B.5 Vector troubleshooting mdofied based 6.3.6 Deleting a Saved Message.......................................................... 126
on client comment. 6.3.7 Transmitting a Message ............................................................. 126
6.4 RECEIVING MESSAGES (INBOX) ............................................................. 126
V49 1/16/08 Section C.6 new section covering LLDR setup.
6.4.1 Sorting ........................................................................................ 128
V50 1/18/08 Changed references to models of PFED to be
AN/PSG-!0 (V)1 for the c, AN/PSG-10 (V)2 for the g, 6.4.2 Viewing....................................................................................... 129
and AN/PSG-10 (V)3 for the S 6.4.3 Routing ....................................................................................... 129
V54 1/21/08 Chapter 2 & 3 figures 2-2 updated with Vector, 2-3 6.4.4 Updating..................................................................................... 130
updated with handheld with V2 dome, 2-13 updated 6.4.5 Denying ...................................................................................... 130
with current dome, 3-25 updated with current dome. 6.4.6 Forwarding/Replying ................................................................. 130
V59 2/7/08 Page 8 last butllet text modified. 6.4.7 Locking/Unlocking Messages ..................................................... 131
Page 9 last note text modified. 6.4.8 Editing ........................................................................................ 131
Section 3.2.3 step 2 moved. 6.4.9 Deleting ...................................................................................... 132
Section 3.2.4 steps 5 through 7 modified. 6.4.10 Auto Routing............................................................................... 132
Section 3.4.3 step 16 modified for Casablanca entry. 6.5 SENT MESSAGES (OUTBOX)................................................................... 132
Section 4.1 Durress mode note box moved.
6.5.1 Viewing....................................................................................... 133
Section 4.2.2 steps 1 and 2 modified.
6.5.2 Deleting ...................................................................................... 133
Section 4.4.2.2 new note box entered.
Section 4.4.6 second note box under figure 4-34 CHAPTER 7 REPORTS ............................................................................... 134
moved below step 6 and next note box moved under
step 7. 7.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................... 134
Section 5.1 second paragraph removed and note 7.2 ACCESSING REPORTS/REQUESTS OPTION .............................................. 134
boxes under steps 2f and 5a removed, note box 7.2.1 Position Report/Observer Coordinates (OBCO)........................ 135
under step 7f moved up. 7.2.2 SALUTE/ATI Report................................................................... 135
Section 5.1.2.1 step 11 changed. 7.2.3 MEDEVAC Request.................................................................... 138
Section 6.4.3 new caution box added.
7.2.4 Rapid Resupply Request ............................................................. 147
Section 6.4.6 step 2 modified. 7.2.4.1 Rapid Resupply Request (Screen 1)................................................... 148
Section 7.2.5 modified to compress. 7.2.4.2 Rapid Resupply Request (Screen 2)................................................... 152
Section 7.2.9.1.2.1 new step 31. 7.2.5 NBC 1 Report ............................................................................. 155
Section 7.2.9.2.3.1 new step 32. 7.2.6 Unit Status Report ...................................................................... 159
Section 8.2 paragraph removed. 7.2.7 Shelling Report ........................................................................... 163
Section 8.2.2 final note box for new button moved to 7.2.8 URN Query ................................................................................. 167
under step 2 at beginning of section.
7.2.9 CAS Request/AirCrew Briefing .................................................. 169
Section 8.3.1.10 new note box under step 6.
7.2.9.1 CAS Request...................................................................................... 169
V65 3/14/08 Figure 2-5 updated with full photo of SAA SM unit. 7.2.9.2 CAS (AirCrew) Briefing.................................................................... 173
V67 4/24/08 Figures 4-15, 4-23, 4-25, 4-26, 4-28 & 4-29 updated
waypoint screens. CHAPTER 8 CALL FOR FIRE ................................................................... 181
V71 5/3/08 Section 5.3.1.3 new note stating that deferred
message may still be transmitted. 8.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................... 181
V77 7/16/08 Sections 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5 contains new paragraph
8.1.1 Fire Support Message Processing.............................................. 181
indicating instructions for separate models. 8.1.2 Initial Fire Mission Processing .................................................. 181
DRAFT 281 March 16, 2009 DRAFT iv March 16, 2009
Table Of Contents PFED User Manual Appendix G – Document Change History PFED User Manual
8.2 CALL FOR FIRE REQUEST....................................................................... 182 message changed.
8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1)........................................................................... 183 Section 9.3 last sentence modified.
8.2.1.1 Location Entry ................................................................................... 185 Section 9.3.1 step 2 spelling change.
8.2.2 CFF - Extended (Screen 2)......................................................... 196 Section 9.3.2 step 3 figure 9-3 caption changed.
8.2.3 Sending CFF Template Fire Mission ......................................... 203 Section A.1 Lane changed to Line, FSCL
8.3 FIRE MISSION MONITOR ........................................................................ 204 Coordination changed to Coordinated, FiST changed
to reflect Element.
8.3.1 Monitoring Active Targets.......................................................... 204
Section B.4 step 4 function access changed, last
8.3.1.1 Message to Observer (MTO) ............................................................. 205 paragraph last 2 lines removed.
8.3.1.2 Confirming Denied Missions ............................................................. 207
Section B.4.2 paragraph added to mention when sing
8.3.1.3 Report Upon Firing ............................................................................ 208 Model 5700 device.
8.3.1.4 Making Subsequent Corrections ........................................................ 209
Section B.5 step 3 selections changed, section for “I
8.3.1.5 Sending the Fire Command................................................................ 211 started another application…” removed, figure B-3
8.3.1.6 Canceling an At My Command (AMC) ............................................. 211 changed.
8.3.1.7 Repeat Fire For Effect and Cease Loading Command ....................... 211 Appendix C removed and all follwing appendix
8.3.1.8 Sending EOM .................................................................................... 212 moved up.
8.3.1.9 Set Mission to Inactive....................................................................... 213 Section D.3 notation added referencing specific
8.3.1.10 Check Firing ...................................................................................... 214 model of device.
8.3.1.11 New Call For Fire .............................................................................. 216 Section D.4.1 step 9 changed, step 11 text changed,
8.3.1.12 Log..................................................................................................... 216 step 16 removed, step 17 CO XX changed to 00,
8.3.2 Planned Fire Missions................................................................ 217 steps 18 through 21 removed.
8.3.2.1 Firing a Pre-Planned Mission............................................................. 217 Section D.4.2 steps 6.a table updated to reflect
8.3.2.2 Deleting a Pre-Planned Mission......................................................... 218 correct “U” positions and tilting process.
8.3.3 Inactive Fire Missions ................................................................ 218 Section E.1 error message have been updated.
8.3.3.1 Re-Initiating An Inactive Target ........................................................ 219 Section F.1 step 8 twice was removed, steps 4 and 5
8.3.3.2 Deleting an Inactive Mission ............................................................. 220 changed for backlight option.
8.3.3.3 Log..................................................................................................... 220 Adjusted formatting font size for steps, substeps and
8.3.4 On Call Fire Missions ................................................................ 220 sub substeps to minimize document size.
8.3.4.1 Re-Initiating A On Call Target .......................................................... 221 Section 8.2.1.1.1 new note indicating the FOS
8.3.4.2 MTO Processing ................................................................................ 222 display of attitude in 100 mils.
8.3.4.3 Deleting an On Call Mission.............................................................. 222 Section 8.2.2 new note and warning message
indicating that only HC smoke used when sending
8.3.5 CAS Missions.............................................................................. 222 though FOS as well as when routing edited QS
8.3.5.1 Processing BDA................................................................................. 223 message from a FiST.
CHAPTER 9 SECURITY ............................................................................. 224 V29 11/8/07 Section 8.2.2 under step 18 new note identifying the
AF Shell/Fuze selection and transmitting to an AVMF
9.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................... 224 unit.
9.2 FIST MODE PASSWORD ......................................................................... 224 V35 12/4/07 Reviewed entire document and adjusted minor
9.2.1 Changing the FiST Mode Password ........................................... 224 formatting and grammatical errors.
9.3 DURESS MODE ....................................................................................... 225 V42 1/8/08 Section 4.4.3 completely re-written to include all
changes to waypoint/route manipulation.
9.3.1 Activating Duress Mode ............................................................. 225
Section 7.2.9.2.2 Location field information updated.
9.3.2 Deactivating Duress Mode ......................................................... 226
All references to Leica has been changed to Vector.
APPENDIX A ACRONYMS......................................................................... 227 Sections 8.2.1.1.5 & 8.2.1.1.6 have been updated
with new imagery screens and steps.
A.1 ACRONYM LIST ...................................................................................... 227 Topic Index updated with new sections.
APPENDIX B TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................... 229 Section 5.1.1.1 step 8 has been rewritten to separate
a bluetooth and serial configuration for a Vector
DRAFT v March 16, 2009 DRAFT 280 March 16, 2009
Appendix G – Document Change History PFED User Manual Table Of Contents PFED User Manual
Section 4.4.6 step 5 updated for Fire Support B.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................... 229
Element, note updated as well, step 6 SWB3 B.2 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING TECHNIQUES .......................................... 229
removed.
B.3 DATA COMMUNICATIONS ...................................................................... 229
Section 4.4.13 line 9 FLOT added.
B.4 GPS ....................................................................................................... 230
Section 4.4.14 line 6 “direction” added, figures 4-41
and 4-42 changed. B.4.1 Configuring GPS Devices on PFED .......................................... 230
Section 5.1.1 Imagery Interface bullet added. B.4.2 PLGR Verification ...................................................................... 231
Section 5.1.1.1 step 2.e.vii 9600N added, step 2.e.x B.5 LEICA BLUETOOTH CONNECTION FAILURE ............................................ 232
FEC+TDC and FEC+TDC+Scrambling added, step B.6 PFED COMPUTER .................................................................................. 233
2.e.x Srambling changed to Scrambling Only, step 3 B.7 CALIBRATING THE PFED ....................................................................... 235
note changed for accuracy, step 5.a step changed B.8 PFED BLUETOOTH CONNECTION .......................................................... 236
for new functionality.
Section 5.1.2.1 step 11 changed for new laser info APPENDIX C PERIPHERAL HARDWARE SETUP & OPERATION.. 237
screen, step 12 Target changed to Platform.
Section 5.1.2.2 line 16 changed manual to review, C.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................... 237
step 2 updated for fire support element, step 7 C.2 SINCGARS ASIP ................................................................................. 237
grammatical change. C.3 PLGR .................................................................................................... 237
Section 5.1.2.2 step 13 changed reference.. C.3.1 Turning on the PLGR ................................................................. 238
Section 5.1.2.3 line 3 updated for fire support C.3.2 Mode Selection ........................................................................... 238
element.
C.3.3 How to Obtain Position, Time and Tracking Information.......... 238
Section 5.3.1 figure 5-24 moved callout, line 4
changed cross reference, table 3 changed blank to C.3.4 To Obtain Dynamic Information ................................................ 238
icon, table 3 removed waiting for buffer row. C.3.5 Track / Search Information ........................................................ 239
Section 6.4.7 step 3 grammatical change. C.3.6 How To Navigate........................................................................ 239
Section 7.2.1 step 2 corrected reference. C.4 MARK VII .............................................................................................. 240
Section 7.2.7 step 1corrected reference. C.4.1 Setting the data output to PLGR CON on the MarkVII LRF ...... 240
Section 7.2.9.1.1 step 14 removed, step 15 changed C.4.2 Calibrating the Mark VII............................................................ 241
for new laser code button, step 23 removed default. C.5 LEICA SETUP .......................................................................................... 245
Section 7.2.9.2.2 step 17 removed, step 18 updated C.5.1 Distance Measurements.............................................................. 245
for new laser code button, step 26 removed default.
C.5.2 Azimuth & Inclination Measurements ........................................ 246
Section 8.1.1 line 3 removed FO.
C.5.3 Settings ....................................................................................... 247
Section 8.1.2 line 4 removed three in addition to, line
6 change manual to review, figure 8-5 changed. C.5.4 4-Point Compass Calibration (Handheld).................................. 249
Section 8.2.2 step 23.c grammatical change, step 25 C.6 LLDR SETUP ......................................................................................... 250
note box first note changed to default to High.
APPENDIX D PFED ERROR/ALERT MESSAGES................................. 252
Section 8.2.3 figure 8-22 changed
Section 8.3.1 table 4 changed blank to icon. D.1 ERROR/ALERT MESSAGES ..................................................................... 252
th
Section 8.3.1.1 4 paragraph changed manual to
th
review, 5 paragraph changed manual to review, APPENDIX E PFED WITH NIGHT VISION GOGGLES ....................... 259
fiure 8-23 and 8-24 changed.
E.1 HOW TO OPERATE PFED IN NIGHT MODE ............................................ 259
Section 8.3.1.3 changed figures for the same target
number. APPENDIX F TOPIC INDEX ...................................................................... 262
Section 8.3.1.8 step 6b corrected selections tence.
Section 8.3.1.10 note box changed manual to review. F.1 TOPIC INDEX .......................................................................................... 262
Section 8.3.3.2 note box changed wording for APPENDIX G DOCUMENT CHANGE HISTORY .................................. 266
Inactive tab.
rd
Section 9.1 3 sentence modified. G.1 CHANGE HISTORY TABLE ...................................................................... 266
Section 9.2.1 step 4.b field labels changed, step 4.c
DRAFT 279 March 16, 2009 DRAFT vi March 16, 2009
Table Of Contents PFED User Manual Appendix G – Document Change History PFED User Manual
button changed.
Section 7.2.5 paragraph information changed and
first note box modified.
Section 7.2.5.2 Location paragraph changed.
Section 7.2.7 paragraph information changed, step 6
paragraph modified.
Section 7.2.8 paragraph information changed.
Section 7.2.9.1.2 Location heading changed.
Section 7.2.9.2 note box removed.
Section 8.1.1 FO mention removed.
Section 8.2.1 Danger Close first paragraph
information changed.
Section 8.2.1.1.4 Laser Range button changed.
Section 8.2.1.1.6 steps b and c changed.
Section 8.3 paragraph information added to.
Section 8.3.1.1 first warning note removed.
Section 8.3.1.9 third paragraph information changed
and step 4a corrected.
Section 9.2 first bullet corrected.
Appendix E modified with new error/alert messages.
Appendix D updated with new Leica Vector section.
Appendix C updated.
Section D.5.1 Multiple Object subsection steps
changed, subsection heading corrected.
Section D.5.3 subsection Measurement Units steps
changed, subsection Distance Gate step 6 added.
Section D.5.4 title updated.
Section D.3.2 step 5 and 7 updated.
Sections D.3.6 through D.3.10 removed.
Section D.3.11 moved to D.3.6 and text paragraph
removed.
Section D.4.2 note text modified, step 6 table for
calibration tags updated, steps 6b and 6c added.
V27 11/1/07 Cover page added Version 3.0 in title.
Figure B-1, correction made to table of figures for
item.
Section 3.2.2 new step 8, step 5 changed.
Section 3.2.3 entire section changed for updates..
Section 3.3.1 step 3 modified for different ok button
graphic.
Section 3.4.2 step 14 the word twice rmoved, step 6
note removed, steps 4 through 7 changed.
Section 3.4.3 steps 1 through 7 removed.
Section 3.4.4 step 4 word three changed to five.
Section 4.2.1 Figure 4-4 title bar changed.
Section 4.3.5 reference sections corrected.
DRAFT vii March 16, 2009 DRAFT 278 March 16, 2009
Appendix G – Document Change History PFED User Manual Table Of Figures PFED User Manual
Section 4.4.11 paragraph information modified.
Table of Figures
New figure 5-6 has been added.
The following changes have been made for the new FIGURE 2-1 BASIC PFED SYSTEM USING EMBEDDED GPS HANDHELD AN/PSG-
Location button entries: Sections 4.4.2 step 3, 10 (V)2 W/PPS.............................................................................................. 3
4.4.10.1 step 5, 4.4.12.1 step 5, 5.1.2.1 step 4, 7.2
step 4, 7.2.2 step 6, 7.2.3 step 4, 7.2.4.1 step 2 and FIGURE 2-2 BASIC PFED SYSTEM USING HANDHELD WITHOUT EMBEDDED GPS
paragraph text, 7.2.5.1 step 3 and paragraph text, AN/PSG-10 (V)1.......................................................................................... 3
7.2.5.2 step 2 and paragraph text, 7.2.7 step 8 and FIGURE 2-3 PFED HANDHELD WITH DOME AND EMBEDDED GPS AN/PSG-10
paragragh text, 7.2.9.1 steps 9-26-29-33, 7.2.9.2 (V)2 W/PPS .................................................................................................. 4
steps 7-9-12-paragraph text-30-34 and 45’s note
box, 8.2.1 danger close is no longer a header level, FIGURE 2-4 PFED HANDHELD WITH DOME AN/PSG-10 (V)1............................. 4
new section header 8.2.1.1 location entry, 8.2.1.2 FIGURE 2-5 PFED HANDHELD WITH DOME AN/PSG-10 (V)3 W/SAASM .......... 4
through 8.2.1.7 changed to next header level, FIGURE 2-6 PFED HANDHELD - 5700 MODEL ...................................................... 4
8.2.1.1.4 step f, 8.2.1.1.5 and 8.2.1.1.6 updated, FIGURE 2-7 MARK VII CABLE .............................................................................. 5
8.3.1.4 step 3, 8.3.2.1 step 3, 8.3.3.1 step 3, 8.3.4.1
step 3, figures 4-19, 4-28, 4-30, 7-3, 7-5, 7-13, 7-24, FIGURE 2-8 SINCGARS ASIP RADIO CABLE ...................................................... 5
7-27, 7-28, 7-32, 7-36, 7-37, 7-39, 7-41, 7-42, 8-11 FIGURE 2-9 AA BATTERY COMPARTMENT .......................................................... 5
and 8-26. FIGURE 2-10 R-PDA BATTERY ADAPTER ............................................................ 5
1.5.12 8/10/07 Section 5.4.1 new note identifying different alert FIGURE 2-11 MARK VII ........................................................................................ 5
levels. FIGURE 2-12 SINCGARS ASIP RADIO ................................................................ 5
Section 4.4.3.1 steps 2 through 5 modified for FIGURE 2-13 EMBEDDED PFED HANDHELD (AN/PSG-10 (V)2 W/PPS) AND
clarification.
MARK VII ASSEMBLY .................................................................................. 6
V2 (previous 8/23/07 Converted document to booklet format for V3.0
CML document.
FIGURE 2-14 PFED HANDHELD (AN/PSG-10 (V)1) FRONT-END SUBSYSTEM
versions ASSEMBLY .................................................................................................... 7
archived) FIGURE 2-15 PFED AND PLGR ASSEMBLY .......................................................... 7
V13 10/4/07 Section 5.1.1.1 steps 6 through 9 modified for FIGURE 2-16 PFED SOFTPACK – CASE FIELD OLIVE DRAB .................................. 7
changed sensor setup. FIGURE 2-17 PLGR .............................................................................................. 8
Section D.3 and D.4 modified for updated FIGURE 2-18 LEICA ............................................................................................... 8
instructions.
FIGURE 2-19 LEICA/PLGR CABLE ........................................................................ 8
Section 6.3.7 new notation added for work around of
the non-visible alert messages when working in the FIGURE 3-1 HANDHELD POPUP KEYPAD ............................................................. 10
New PTM window. FIGURE 3-2 DROP-DOWN SELECTION LIST EXAMPLE ......................................... 11
Section 4.4.13 new notation of the ZOR being FIGURE 3-3 BUTTON FIELD EXAMPLES ............................................................... 11
outside of the mission area. FIGURE 3-4 RADIO BUTTON FIELD EXAMPLE ..................................................... 11
Reformatted topic index. FIGURE 3-5 CHECK BOX FIELD EXAMPLE ........................................................... 11
V21 10/17/07 Section 1.3 new bullet stating FST, CAS request and FIGURE 3-6 UP/DOWN-ARROW FIELD EXAMPLE ................................................ 11
URN query, also bullets indicating PFI and two-wire. FIGURE 3-7 DEVICE POWER BUTTON .................................................................. 13
Section 2.2 changed to 10 batteries. FIGURE 3-8 EXPANSION PACK SCREW LOCATIONS ............................................. 13
The following figures have been replaced/changed, FIGURE 3-9 EXTERNAL POWER CABLE LOCATION .............................................. 13
3-11, 4-27, 4-29, 4-31, 4-41, 4-42, 6-1, 6-3, 8-1, 8-2,
8-14, 8-15, 8-22, 8-26. FIGURE 3-10 STYLUS PEN ................................................................................... 14
Section 3.4.4 word may changed to will. FIGURE 3-11 RESET BUTTON .............................................................................. 14
Section 5.1.1 devices changed to sensors. FIGURE 3-12 PERFORMING “HARD REST”........................................................... 14
Following figures have been removed, 5-6, 8-12. FIGURE 3-13 HANDHELD WELCOME SCREEN ..................................................... 14
Section 5.1.1.1, step 2-e-xiii note box removed and FIGURE 3-14 RESET APPLICATION ...................................................................... 16
step 3 note box removed. FIGURE 3-15 STYLUS ALIGNMENT SCREEN ........................................................ 16
Section 6.4.3 step 3 changed. FIGURE 3-16 TODAY SCREEN ............................................................................. 16
Section 7.2.3 second note box modified, step 34 FIGURE 3-17 DOD INSTALL WARNING SCREEN .................................................. 17
DRAFT 277 March 16, 2009 DRAFT viii March 16, 2009
Table Of Figures PFED User Manual Appendix G – Document Change History PFED User Manual
FIGURE 3-18 HARD RESET PROMPT .................................................................... 17 Section 8.2.2 new note specifying Copperhead
FIGURE 3-19 DATE/TIME ENTRY SCREEN ........................................................... 18 mission as FFE. Also new note indicating that FFE2
field not available with Copperhead missions. New
FIGURE 3-20 POINTSEC SECURITY ID SETUP SCREEN ........................................ 19 note specifying projectile/fuze selection required for
FIGURE 3-21 POINTSEC LINE DRAW ................................................................... 19 FPF missions.
FIGURE 3-22 POINTSEC SECURITY PIN SETUP SCREEN ...................................... 19 Section 8.3.1.4 new paragraph discussing Sub
FIGURE 3-23 POINTSEC SPLASH SCREEN ............................................................ 20 Adjust as At My Command.
FIGURE 3-24 POINTSEC PASSWORD SCREEN ...................................................... 20 Section 8.3.1.1 new paragraph stating that target
FIGURE 3-25 POINTSEC CARD ENCRYPTION PROMPT ......................................... 20 position will be updated when receiving a new
recalculated position from AFATDS.
FIGURE 3-26 TODAY SCREEN VERSION 1.1......................................................... 21
1.5.10 3/16/07 Section 4.4.2.6 step 3 changed and note box
FIGURE 3-27 TODAY SCREEN VERSION 2.0......................................................... 21 updated.
FIGURE 3-28 TODAY SCREEN VERSION 3.0......................................................... 21 Section 4.4.2.7 note box modified.
FIGURE 3-29 TODAY SCREEN SETTINGS MENU OPTION ..................................... 23 Figures 4-11 through 4-14 updated.
FIGURE 3-30 SETTINGS SCREEN.......................................................................... 23 Figure 4-33 updated.
FIGURE 3-31 SETTINGS - POWER CONFIGURATION SCREEN ................................ 24 Section 4.4.12 new step 8.
FIGURE 3-32 SETTINGS - BACKLIGHT CONFIGURATION SCREEN – INTERNAL 1.5.10 3/20/07 Updated Error/Alert table
POWER ........................................................................................................ 24 1.5.10 3/21/07 Section 8.1.1 new paragraph noting the
FIGURE 3-33 SETTINGS - BRIGHTNESS LEVEL CONFIGURATION SCREEN ............ 25 transmissions as carbon copies.
FIGURE 3-34 SETTINGS - REGIONAL SETTINGS CONFIGURATION SCREEN .......... 26 Section 8.3.1.8 modified for the transmission to
FIGURE 3-35 SETTINGS - REGIONAL SETTINGS TIME CONFIGURATION SCREEN . 26 multiple units.
FIGURE 3-36 SETTINGS - REGIONAL SETTINGS DATE CONFIGURATION SCREEN 27 All cross refernces have been verified.
FIGURE 3-37 SETTINGS - CLOCK CONFIGURATION SCREEN ................................ 27 All generated tables have been updated.
FIGURE 3-38 CALENDAR CONFIGURATION SETTING ........................................... 28 1.5.11 4/23/07 Section 8.2.2 note for Copperhead mission, default
FIGURE 3-39 BATTERY LOW WARNING MESSAGE .............................................. 29 changed to Low.
FIGURE 3-40 TODAY SCREEN ............................................................................. 30 Section 3.4.4 note about clock setting changed.
FIGURE 3-41 BLUETOOTH MANAGER SCREEN .................................................... 30 Section 7.2.2 new note on sending ATI messages.
FIGURE 3-42 SEARCHING FOR DEVICES .............................................................. 30 1.5.11 5/17/07 Appendix B, new section B.4.1 & B.4.2.
FIGURE 3-43 DEVICES FOUND ............................................................................ 30 Updated Topic Index.
FIGURE 3-44 PFED HANDHELD COMPUTER EXTERNAL BUTTONS ..................... 31 1.5.11 7/13/07 Section 3.2.4 Warning note removed.
FIGURE 3-45 DEVICE POWER BUTTON ................................................................ 32 Figure 5-26, 8-2, 8-3, 9-1 changed.
FIGURE 3-46 STYLUS PEN ................................................................................... 32 Section 8.2.1 Location paragraph and note changed.
Section 8.2.1.1 steps 4 and 5 modified.
FIGURE 3-47 HARD REST BUTTONS .................................................................... 32
Section 8.2.1.4 and 8.2.1.5 titles changed.
FIGURE 3-48 HANDHELD WELCOME SCREEN ..................................................... 32
Section 8.2.1.5 steps and note changed.
FIGURE 3-49 OPERATION BUTTON TEST ............................................................. 34
New sections 8.2.1.6 and 8.2.1.7 covering new CFF
FIGURE 3-50 STYLUS ALIGNMENT SCREEN ........................................................ 34 location processing.
FIGURE 3-51 TODAY SCREEN ............................................................................. 34 Sections 8.2.1.2 through 8.2.1.5 numbering changed.
FIGURE 3-52 DOD INSTALL WARNING SCREEN .................................................. 35 Topic Index updated.
FIGURE 3-53 HARD RESET PROMPT .................................................................... 35 Section 4.4.2.6 changed to parent heading level
FIGURE 3-54 DATE/TIME ENTRY SCREEN ........................................................... 36 4.4.3. This has changed the rest of the sections
FIGURE 3-55 POINTSEC INSTALLATION PROCESS ............................................... 37 heading sequence down by one header level.
FIGURE 3-56 POINTSEC USER ID ........................................................................ 37 Figure 4-41 & 8-21 changed.
FIGURE 3-57 POINTSEC SECURITY PIN SETUP.................................................... 37 Section 6.4.7 step 2 edited.
FIGURE 3-58 POINTSEC PASSWORD RULES......................................................... 38 Section 5.1.1.1 step 2exiii and step 3 note boxes
modified to discuss new summery screen. Steps 6 &
FIGURE 3-59 POINTSEC RESTART MESSAGE ....................................................... 38 7 updated.
DRAFT ix March 16, 2009 DRAFT 276 March 16, 2009
Appendix G – Document Change History PFED User Manual Table Of Figures PFED User Manual
processing. FIGURE 3-60 POINTSEC PASSWORD PROMPT ...................................................... 38
1.5.10 3/1/07 Section 4.4.5 new note indicating messages FIGURE 3-61 TODAY SCREEN VERSION 1.1......................................................... 39
transmitted with visibility or cloud height information. FIGURE 3-62 TODAY SCREEN VERSION 2.0......................................................... 39
Section 8.3.1.10 new note referring to FiST mode FIGURE 3-63 TODAY SCREEN VERSION 3.0......................................................... 39
check firing processing.
FIGURE 3-64 TODAY SCREEN SETTINGS MENU OPTION ..................................... 40
Section 7.2.1.2 new note specifying discrete
information transmission. FIGURE 3-65 SETTINGS SCREEN.......................................................................... 40
Section 8.2.2 new note specifying default for FIGURE 3-66 SETTINGS - POWER CONFIGURATION SCREEN ................................ 42
Copperhead message. FIGURE 3-67 SETTINGS - BACKLIGHT CONFIGURATION SCREEN – INTERNAL
Section 8.3.1.8 new paragraph indicating the BDA POWER ........................................................................................................ 42
information difference. FIGURE 3-68 SETTINGS - BRIGHTNESS LEVEL CONFIGURATION SCREEN ............ 42
Figure 6-14 updated. FIGURE 3-69 SETTINGS - REGIONAL SETTINGS CONFIGURATION SCREEN .......... 44
1.5.10 3/5/07 Figure 6-5 changed. FIGURE 3-70 SETTINGS - REGIONAL SETTINGS TIME CONFIGURATION SCREEN . 44
Section 6.4.5 new section for denying messages in FIGURE 3-71 SETTINGS - REGIONAL SETTINGS DATE CONFIGURATION SCREEN 45
the Inbox.
FIGURE 3-72 SETTINGS - CLOCK CONFIGURATION SCREEN ................................ 45
Section 6.4.8 new section for editing messages.
FIGURE 3-73 CALENDAR CONFIGURATION SETTING ........................................... 45
Section 6.4.6, change to step 1.
FIGURE 3-74 BATTERY LOW WARNING MESSAGE .............................................. 46
Topic Index updated.
FIGURE 3-75 LOCK/UNLOCK INDICATOR ............................................................ 48
1.5.10 3/8/07 Figure 8-3 changed for new button.
FIGURE 3-76 UNLOCK SCREEN ........................................................................... 48
Section 8.2.2. step 27 changed.
FIGURE 3-77 STEALTH SETTING SCREEN ............................................................ 49
Alphabetized topic index correctly
FIGURE 3-78 WIRELESS MANAGER SCREEN ....................................................... 50
1.5.10 3/9/07 Figure 6-12 removed, figure 6-11 covers both
options.
FIGURE 3-79 SETTINGS BLUETOOTH MODE SCREEN .......................................... 50
Topic Index Updated.
FIGURE 3-80 PFED HANDHELD COMPUTER EXTERNAL BUTTONS ..................... 50
Alert/Error messages table updated. FIGURE 4-1 HANDHELD START MENU SCREEN ................................................... 51
1.5.10 3/12/07 Section 7.2.4 Resupply report, figure 7-14 changed
FIGURE 4-2 PFED ABOUT SCREEN ..................................................................... 51
and step 25 updated to screen change. FIGURE 4-3 MAIN PFED SCREEN ....................................................................... 52
Figure 8-18 changed for Check Firing icon. FIGURE 4-4 APPLICATION TITLE BAR ................................................................. 53
Section 8.2.2 step 27 b changed to accomidate FIGURE 4-5 START MENU ................................................................................... 54
subordinate CFF processing. FIGURE 4-6 PFED TOOLBAR .............................................................................. 55
Section 8.3 note changed for alert pop-up FIGURE 4-7 SET TIME FROM GPS SCREEN .......................................................... 57
Section 8.3.1.10 note on Check Firing process FIGURE 4-8 SET TIME MANUALLY SCREEN ........................................................ 57
changed with ne icon. FIGURE 4-9 DATE/TIME ENTRY SCREEN ............................................................. 57
1.5.10 3/13/07 Section 8.3 first note box modified. FIGURE 4-10 MAIN PFED (OTF/EPE FLASH INDICATION) SCREEN ................... 58
1.5.10 3/15/07 Figure 7-3 replaced, figure 7-4 removed. FIGURE 4-11 MGRS - GRID LOCATION SCREEN ................................................. 61
Section 7.2.2 step 17 modified to reflect the FIGURE 4-12 DECIMAL DEGREES - GRID LOCATION SCREEN.............................. 61
SALUTE/ATI selection.
FIGURE 4-13 DEG:MIN:SEC - GRID LOCATION SCREEN ...................................... 62
Figure 7-34 updated
FIGURE 4-14 UTM - GRID LOCATION SCREEN ................................................... 62
Figure 7-36, 7-37, 7-38, 7-39 and 7-40 updated.
FIGURE 4-15 NAVIGATION SCREEN .................................................................... 63
Figure 8-4 updated
Section 8.2.2 note changed for FFE1 field selection
FIGURE 4-16 MARK LOCATION SCREEN ............................................................. 64
change, FFE2 selection list changed and final note FIGURE 4-17 WAYPOINTS SCREEN ...................................................................... 65
box changed removing New button. FIGURE 4-18 NEW WAYPOINT SCREEN ............................................................... 65
New section 8.3.3.3 for log view. FIGURE 4-19 ROUTE LIST SCREEN ...................................................................... 67
New section 8.3.4.2 for MTO processing. Section FIGURE 4-20 EDIT ROUTE SCREEN ..................................................................... 67
8.4.3.2 for delete is now 8.3.4.3. FIGURE 4-21 SELECT WAYPOINT SCREEN .......................................................... 67
DRAFT 275 March 16, 2009 DRAFT x March 16, 2009
Table Of Figures PFED User Manual Appendix G – Document Change History PFED User Manual
FIGURE 4-22 DEFINE ROUTE SCREEN ................................................................. 68 has been changed and a new note added. Method
FIGURE 4-23 STOP/PAUSE PROMPT ..................................................................... 68 of Fire Control topic text has changed reflecting
FFE1 field modification. Step 25 table has changed.
FIGURE 4-24 CLICK TO NAVIGATE SCREEN ........................................................ 69
Section 4.4.15 Hotkeys section modified or the new
FIGURE 4-25 NAV TO WAYPOINT # SCREEN ....................................................... 69 screen.
FIGURE 4-26 STOP/PAUSE PROMPT ..................................................................... 69 Section 8.3.1.4 notes removed.
FIGURE 4-27 CLICK TO NAVIGATE SCREEN ........................................................ 70 Section 5.1.1.1 section has new step 8 indicating
FIGURE 4-28 NAV TO WAYPOINT # SCREEN ....................................................... 70 new operator prompt.
FIGURE 4-29 STOP/PAUSE PROMPT ..................................................................... 71 Section 5.1.2.3 paragraph text changed slightly.
FIGURE 4-30 ACTIVE NAVIGATION ..................................................................... 71 Note box has been removed.
FIGURE 4-31 INACTIVE NAVIGATION .................................................................. 71 Section 3.9 Duress Mode has been added.
FIGURE 4-32 MARK LOCATION SCREEN ............................................................. 72 Section 8.3.1.3 new note box.
FIGURE 4-33 PFED EDIT MENU SCREEN ............................................................ 74 Section 6.4 new note box specifying the contained
maximum and new paragraph explaining the
FIGURE 4-34 UNIT SCREEN ................................................................................. 74 maximum function.
FIGURE 4-35 LASER INFORMATION SCREEN ....................................................... 75 Section 6.4 contains new section 6.4.5 for marking
FIGURE 4-36 MAP DATUM SETUP SCREEN.......................................................... 80 messages and 6.4.6 for unlocking messages.
FIGURE 4-37 FIELD MAP LEGEND ....................................................................... 81 Section 6.4.7 is now for deleting messages.
FIGURE 4-38 AUTO TARGET NUMBERING SCREEN ............................................. 86 1.5.10 2/28/07 Section 6.5 new note box specifying the contained
FIGURE 4-39 TARGET LIST SCREEN .................................................................... 87 maximum.
FIGURE 4-40 CFF - [TARGET #] SCREEN ............................................................. 87 Section 6.5.2 moved to section 6.4.4. Following
sections in heading 6.4 have been moved down to
FIGURE 4-41 CFF TEMPLATES SETUP SCREEN 1................................................. 89 accommodate new section.
FIGURE 4-42 CFF TEMPLATES SETUP SCREEN 2................................................. 89 Section 4.4.17 removed (C2CE reference).
FIGURE 4-43 KNOWN POINTS SCREEN ................................................................ 91 Section 6.4.1 is new for sorting messages and all
FIGURE 4-44 GRID LOCATION SCREEN ............................................................... 91 following section in 6.4. have been increased by one.
FIGURE 4-45 POLAR LOCATION SCREEN ............................................................. 91 Section 6.4.7 new note and steps changed to match
FIGURE 4-46 BATTLEFIELD GEOMETRIES SCREEN .............................................. 93 new locking feature.
FIGURE 4-47 VIEW BATTLEFIELD GEOMETRY SCREEN (EXAMPLE...................... 93 Section 8.3.1.10 step 1 changed.
FIGURE 4-48 RESPONSBILE UNIT FIELD .............................................................. 94 Section 5.1.2.2 new paragraph information covering
FO and FiST modes.
FIGURE 4-49 SELECTED RESPONSIBLE UNIT ....................................................... 94
Section 6.4.8 new section covering auto routing.
FIGURE 4-50 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT PREFERENCES SCREEN .......................... 95
Section 8.1.1 new section covering the Fire Support
FIGURE 4-51 POSITION REPORTING SETUP SCREEN ............................................ 96 message processing for FO and FiST modes.
FIGURE 4-52 PFED HANDHELD HOTKEY BUTTONS ........................................... 97 Section 8.3 contains a new note showing an alert
FIGURE 4-53 HOTKEYS SETUP SCREEN ............................................................... 97 when fire missions are processed.
FIGURE 4-54 MESSAGING PREFERENCES SCREEN ............................................... 98 Section 8.3.4 changed to accomidate the change
FIGURE 4-55 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SCREEN ............................................... 99 from Priority to On Call. Figures 8-15, 8-16, 8-17, 8-
FIGURE 5-1 DEVICE SETUP SCREEN .................................................................. 101 22, 8-24, 8-25 and 8-26 as well os the tab markers in
the appropriate steps have been modified.
FIGURE 5-2 188-200A/188-220C SETUP SCREEN ............................................. 101
Section 5.1.2.2 contains new steps for the
FIGURE 5-3 188-220A/188-220C SETTINGS ADVANCED SCREEN..................... 102 Direct/Indirect configuration.
FIGURE 5-4 TACLINK TACFIRE SETUP SCREEN ........................................... 104 Figures 8-15, 8-16, 8-17, 8-18, 8-19, 8-22, 8-24, 8-25
FIGURE 5-5 TACFIRE SETTINGS ADVANCED SCREEN ..................................... 104 and 8-26updated.
FIGURE 5-6 DEVICE SELECT SCREEN ................................................................ 108 Sections 8.1.1, 8.1.2, 8.1.3, 8.1.4 & 8.1.5 paragraphs
FIGURE 5-7 CONFIGURE DEVICE SCREEN - SERIAL ........................................... 108 have been moved to section 6 for messaging to the
appropriate sections of discussion.
FIGURE 5-8 CONFIGURE CONNECTION SCREEN - BLUETOOTH .......................... 108
Section 8.2 new step 1 for subordinate selection.
FIGURE 5-9 EDIT BLUETOOTH ADDRESS SCREEN ............................................. 109
Section 8.2.2 new step 27 showing new subordinate
DRAFT xi March 16, 2009 DRAFT 274 March 16, 2009
Appendix G – Document Change History PFED User Manual Table Of Figures PFED User Manual
and step 29 modified. Note box was modified. FIGURE 5-10 LAZED DATA RECEIVED .............................................................. 109
Section 6.3.2 first note removed. FIGURE 5-11 WARNING DECLINATION PROMPT................................................ 110
New section 8.3.1.12 FIGURE 5-12 UNIT LIST SCREEN ....................................................................... 111
Figures 4-17, 4-35, 4-6, 4-34, 4-36, 4-49, 5-14, 5-19, FIGURE 5-13 UNIT – NEW UNIT SCREEN (WITHOUT MESSAGES TAB) ............... 111
6-6, 8-2, 8-18 have been replaced.
FIGURE 5-14 UNIT - NETS SCREEN ................................................................... 113
Section 6.5.2 step 2 has been modified.
FIGURE 5-15 188-220A/188-220C NET SETUP SCREEN.................................... 113
Section 4.4.3 bullet list for menu options changed.
FIGURE 5-16 TACFIRE NET SETUP SCREEN .................................................... 114
Section 4.4.5 step 10 changed for Target Type to
read Platform Type. Steps 11-18 removed. Step 3
FIGURE 5-17 TRANSMIT INDIRECT .................................................................... 114
changed. FIGURE 5-18 UNIT – NEW UNIT SCREEN (WITH MESSAGES TAB)...................... 115
Section 5.1.2 changed Primary screen and step 14 FIGURE 5-19 UNIT - MESSAGES SCREEN ........................................................... 115
modified. FIGURE 5-20 CUSTOM SETUP SCREEN .............................................................. 116
Replaced figures 4-22, 4-23, 4-29, 4-31, 4-35, 4-36, FIGURE 5-21 COMMUNICATIONS STATUS BUTTON ........................................... 117
5-8, 5-13, 6-3, 8-1, 8-2, 8-18. Added new figures 8- FIGURE 5-22 COMMUNICATIONS STATUS SCREEN ............................................ 117
22, 8-23.
FIGURE 5-23 COMMUNICATIONS STATUS WITH DATA ...................................... 117
Section 4.4.12 removed step 3
FIGURE 5-24 PLGR LEGEND/STATUS INFORMATION........................................ 118
Section 4.4.16 step 1 changed.
Section 5.1.2.3 note modified and step 14 changed.
FIGURE 5-25 COMMUNICATIONS STATUS DEVICE SELECTION .......................... 118
Section 6.3.5 step 1 changed
FIGURE 5-26 TRANSMISSION QUEUE BUTTON .................................................. 119
1.5.9 2/18/07 Section 8.3.1.12 changed for new information.
FIGURE 5-27 TRANSMISSION QUEUE SCREEN ................................................... 119
All cross references to sections and figures have
FIGURE 5-28 ALERTS BUTTON .......................................................................... 122
been updated. FIGURE 5-29 ALERTS SCREEN .......................................................................... 122
Figures 4-2, 5-14, 5-19, B-2 and B-3 have been FIGURE 6-1 MESSAGE – NEW PTM SCREEN ..................................................... 123
updated. FIGURE 6-2 UNIT LIST SCREEN ......................................................................... 124
Sections 4.3.6 System Alerts and 5.4 Alerts have FIGURE 6-3 OPEN REPORT/REQUEST SCREEN ................................................... 125
been added. FIGURE 6-4 MESSAGE RECEIVED POPUP ........................................................... 127
Section 4.4.6.1 note has been modified. FIGURE 6-5 VIEW MESSAGE SCREEN ................................................................ 127
Section 8.3.1.10 contains a new operator note FIGURE 6-6 MESSAGE – INBOX SCREEN ............................................................ 127
covering the Cancel Check Fire All process.
FIGURE 6-7 MESSAGE – CANNOT PROCESS ALERT ........................................... 128
Section 4.4.5 contains new paragraph information
covering the FiST mode process and a note for the FIGURE 6-8 MESSAGE – CANNOT PROCESS MESSAGE IN TRANSMIT QUEUE..... 128
Laser Code field requirements. FIGURE 6-9 MESSAGE AWAITING ROUTING ...................................................... 129
Section 7.2.2 All notations of SALT/SALUTE has FIGURE 6-10 MESSAGE AWAITING ROUTING AND UPDATING........................... 129
been changed to reflect SALUTE/ATI process. FIGURE 6-11 FORWARDING/REPLYING MESSAGES ........................................... 131
Section 7.2.7 New paragraph text covering Shelling FIGURE 6-12 AUTO MESSAGE ROUTING ........................................................... 132
report under FiST mode.
FIGURE 6-13 MESSAGE – OUTBOX SCREEN ...................................................... 133
1.5.9 2/22/07 Section 5.1.1.1 contains a new step 2e xi. FIGURE 7-1 REPORTS/REQUESTS SCREEN ......................................................... 134
Section 5.1.2.3 new paragraph text covering the FiST
FIGURE 7-2 POSITION ATTENTION MESSAGE .................................................... 134
mode.
Section 8.2.2 step 20 operator note modified.
FIGURE 7-3 SALT/SALUTE-ATI REPORT SCREEN ......................................... 136
Section 8.2.1.5 paragraph text changed.
FIGURE 7-4 MEDEVAC REQUEST SCREEN ...................................................... 140
Section 8.3.3.2 contains a new operator note.
FIGURE 7-5 LOCATION SCREEN ......................................................................... 140
Figures 7-3 and 7-4 changed. FIGURE 7-6 DIRECTION TO ENEMY SCREEN ...................................................... 140
List of errors/alerts has been updated to current FIGURE 7-7 # OF LITTER PATIENTS SCREEN ...................................................... 143
messages. FIGURE 7-8 # OF AMBULATORY PATIENTS SCREEN .......................................... 143
Section 8.2.2 step 19 changed, the table following FIGURE 7-9 NUMBER OF INJURIES SCREEN ....................................................... 143
the step has been changed, the note within this step FIGURE 7-10 INJURY TYPE SCREEN .................................................................. 146
DRAFT 273 March 16, 2009 DRAFT xii March 16, 2009
Table Of Figures PFED User Manual Appendix G – Document Change History PFED User Manual
FIGURE 7-11 INJURY DESCRIPTION SCREEN ..................................................... 146 replaced.
FIGURE 7-12 BATTLE ROSTER NUMBER SCREEN .............................................. 146 Chapter 8 all Ctrl buttons replaced with Control.
FIGURE 7-13 RAPID RESUPPLY REQUEST (SCREEN 1)....................................... 147 Section 8.2 step 1 more button replaced.
FIGURE 7-14 RAPID RESUPPLY REQUEST (SCREEN 2)....................................... 147 Section 8.2.1.5 bullet more button replaced.
FIGURE 7-15 MRE'S ENTRY SCREEN ................................................................ 149 Section 8.2.2 step 15 more button replaced.
FIGURE 7-16 WATER ENTRY SCREEN ............................................................... 149 Section 8.2.2 steps 20 & 21 modified.
FIGURE 7-17 AMMO NOMENCLATURE LIST SCREEN ......................................... 150 Section 8.2.2 last bullet more button replaced and
new button added.
FIGURE 7-18 FUEL NOMENCLATURE LIST SCREEN ........................................... 151
Chapter 9 figures 9-1, 9-2 replaced.
FIGURE 7-19 BATTERIES NOMENCLATURE LIST SCREEN .................................. 151
Overall; all drop down list options have been placed
FIGURE 7-20 MEDICAL NOMENCLATURE LIST SCREEN .................................... 153 in tables to help compress document size.
FIGURE 7-21 MAINTENANCE CONTACT SCREEN ............................................... 153 Section 4.4.2.6 inserted for waypoint configuration.
FIGURE 7-22 CLASS IX SUPPLIES SCREEN ........................................................ 154 Section 4.4.4 modified for new screens.
FIGURE 7-23 NBC1 REPORT SCREEN ............................................................... 156 Section 5.1.2 modified for new screen operation.
FIGURE 7-24 NBC1 - NUCLEAR SCREEN .......................................................... 156 Section 5.1.1.1 warning and note messages
FIGURE 7-25 NBC1 – BIOLOGICAL SCREEN ..................................................... 156 removed.
FIGURE 7-26 NBC1 – CHEMICAL SCREEN ........................................................ 156 Section 6.4.2 and 6.4.3 Forwarding and Replying to
FIGURE 7-27 CLOUD DATA SCREEN ................................................................. 157 have been removed.
FIGURE 7-28 FLASH TO BANG TIME SCREEN .................................................... 159 Figures 7-1 and 7-2 have been updated.
FIGURE 7-29 UNIT STATUS REPORT SCREEN .................................................... 160 New section 7.2.8 inserted for URN Query menu
option.
FIGURE 7-30 PERSONNEL STATUS TABLE SCREEN............................................ 160
Section 7.2.9 modified for new reports selection.
FIGURE 7-31 PLATFORMS STATUS SCREEN ....................................................... 161
Figures 8-10 and 8-11 have been replaced.
FIGURE 7-32 SHELLING REPORT SCREEN .......................................................... 163
New section 4.4.2.7 for creating routes has been
FIGURE 7-33 WEAPON DIRECTION SCREEN ...................................................... 163 added.
FIGURE 7-34 URN QUERY SCREEN .................................................................. 168 Messaging chapter has been modified to show new
FIGURE 7-35 CAS SELECT SCREEN .................................................................. 169 screens, buttons and functions.
FIGURE 7-36 CAS REQUEST - SCREEN 1........................................................... 169 Unit List Setup section has changed with new screen
FIGURE 7-37 CAS REQUEST - SCREEN 2........................................................... 170 capabilities.
FIGURE 7-38 CAS (LINE 1-2) SCREEN .............................................................. 174 Initial password entry and Duress mode sections
have been removed.
FIGURE 7-39 CAS (LINE 3-7) SCREEN .............................................................. 174
Sections that discuss Unit Info – Nets, Unit List –
FIGURE 7-40 CAS (LINE 8-9) SCREEN .............................................................. 174 Messages and Messages Inbox indicating the
FIGURE 7-41 MARK LOCATION SCREEN ........................................................... 178 differences when in FiST mode.
FIGURE 7-42 MARK FRIENDLY LOCATION LIST SCREEN .................................. 178 Error/Alert Table re-created for all new messages.
FIGURE 7-43 EGRESS SCREEN ........................................................................... 179 1.5.8 2/15/07 Section 4.1 step 2 has been modified.
FIGURE 8-1 LOCAL/NON-LOCAL SELECTION .................................................... 182 Section 4.4.3 bulleted list information has been
FIGURE 8-2 SUBORDINATE SELECTION EXAMPLE ............................................. 182 modified.
FIGURE 8-3 CALL FOR FIRE (SCREEN 1) ........................................................... 183 Section 4.4.5 new Service/Role/Echelon table and
FIGURE 8-4 CALL FOR FIRE - EXTENDED (SCREEN 2) ....................................... 183 step 18 has been modified.
FIGURE 8-5 DANGER CLOSE WARNING SCREEN ............................................... 184 New Section 4.4.11 describing FSCMs/Geometry
screens and all following sections have been moved
FIGURE 8-6 LOCATION METHOD SELECTION SCREEN ...................................... 185 down by one.
FIGURE 8-7 GRID LOCATION SCREEN ............................................................... 186 Section 5 figures 5-6, 5-8, 5-13, 5-14 where
FIGURE 8-8 POLAR LOCATION SCREEN ............................................................. 186 changed. Figure 5-12 was removed and all following
FIGURE 8-9 SHIFT FROM KNOWN POINT SCREEN ............................................. 186 figure numbers were updated.
FIGURE 8-10 LRF DATA SCREEN...................................................................... 187 Section 5.1.2.2 steps 14 modified, step 15 removed
DRAFT xiii March 16, 2009 DRAFT 272 March 16, 2009
Appendix G – Document Change History PFED User Manual Table Of Figures PFED User Manual
FIGURE 8-11 IMAGERY DATA SCREEN .............................................................. 187
Replaced all Del All buttons with button and
the CAS Brief report button with the CAS button.
FIGURE 8-12 INTERFACE VIEWER FOR REFINING POSITION .............................. 187
All references to Address book and addresses have
FIGURE 8-13 LRF DATA POP-UP SCREEN ......................................................... 191
been changed to Unit List and units. FIGURE 8-14 IMAGERY INTERFACE ERROR PROMPT ......................................... 193
All PM IE references have been changed to PM BC. FIGURE 8-15 IMAGERY INTERFACE CONFIRMATION PROMPT ........................... 193
Section 1.3 fielded equipment list, bullet inserted for FIGURE 8-16 TARGET SIZE/SHAPE SCREEN....................................................... 194
LLDR and note box added stating when PFED FIGURE 8-17 TARGET TYPES SCREEN ............................................................... 195
system is used with an LLDR. FIGURE 8-18 TARGET TYPES LIST SCREEN ....................................................... 195
Section 4.4.2.6 3rd, 4th and 6th bullets have been FIGURE 8-19 SMOKE MISSION SCREEN ............................................................. 199
added/modified.
FIGURE 8-20 COMMENTS SCREEN..................................................................... 201
Section 5.1.1.1 Configuring Devices, step 1, 2e, 2e-I,
2e-ii, 2f-I have been changed. FIGURE 8-21 METHOD OF FIRE AND CONTROL ................................................. 201
Section 5.1.2.1, 5.1.2.2 and 5.1.2.3 have been FIGURE 8-22 UNITS SELECTION ........................................................................ 203
modified for the new Unit List functions. FIGURE 8-23 PFED HANDHELD HOTKEY BUTTONS ......................................... 203
Section 6.3.5 step 2 has a new note box. FIGURE 8-24 FIRE MISSION MONITOR - ACTIVE TAB SCREEN .......................... 204
Section 7.2.1 step 3 has a new note box. FIGURE 8-25 MTO DISPLAY SCREEN ............................................................... 207
As a result of the above changes, all cross FIGURE 8-26 MTO MISSION DENIED SCREEN................................................... 208
references have been updated as well as the figure FIGURE 8-27 CFF - [TARGET #] SCREEN ........................................................... 210
numbering and step numbers.
FIGURE 8-28 TARGET DESCRIPTION SCREEN .................................................... 210
Figures have been moved to tighten up formatting:
2-1, 2-2, 3-7, 3-8, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-13, 3-14, 3-15,
FIGURE 8-29 BATTLE DAMAGE ASSESSMENT SCREEN ..................................... 213
3-16, 3-17, 3-19, 3-20, 3-22, 3-23, 3-27, 3-28, 3-32, FIGURE 8-30 CHECK FIRING BUTTON OPTIONS ................................................ 215
3-33, 3-34, 3-35, 3-37, 3-38, 3-40, 3-41, 3-42, 3-42, FIGURE 8-31 CHECK FIRE ICON ........................................................................ 216
4-3,4-4, 5-2, 5-3, 5-4, 5-5, 5-9, 5-10, 6-5, 6-6, 6-7, 6- FIGURE 8-32 LOG INFORMATION SCREEN ......................................................... 216
8, 7-1, 7-2, 7-31, 7-32, B-2, B-3, F-1, F-2 and F-3.
FIGURE 8-33 LOG COMMAND INFORMATION SCREEN ...................................... 216
1.5.7 9/27/06 Section 3.2 Initial Instalation has been modified for
all changes to the installation process.
FIGURE 8-34 FIRE MISSION MONITOR - PLANNED TAB SCREEN ....................... 217
Chapter 4 figures 4-1, 4-4, 4-6, 4-11, 4-17, 4-18, 4-
FIGURE 8-35 FIRE MISSION MONITOR - INACTIVE TAB SCREEN ....................... 219
19, 4-38 replaced. FIGURE 8-36 FIRE MISSION MONITOR – ON CALL TAB SCREEN ....................... 221
Section 4.4.5 steps modified for new screen. FIGURE 8-37 FIRE MISSION MONITOR – CAS TAB SCREEN .............................. 222
Section 4.4.16 modified for new screen options. FIGURE 9-1 FIST MODE PASSWORD SCREEN .................................................... 224
Section 4.4.17 Address notations changed to Unit FIGURE 9-2 DURESS MODE ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION ................................ 225
List. FIGURE 9-3 DURESS MODE DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION ............................ 226
Section 5.1.2.1 step 11 modified, step 12 removed.
Section 5.2.2 new step 1. FIGURE B-1 KEYBOARD.................................................................................... 234
Section 5.3.1.4 new step 2. FIGURE B-2 DATA ENTRY OPTION MENU BUTTON .......................................... 235
Chapter 6 figure 6-1 replaced. FIGURE B-3 DATA ENTRY OPTIONS MENU ....................................................... 235
Section 6.3.2 new notation box for searching call FIGURE B-4 ALIGN SCREEN .............................................................................. 236
signs, new steps 4, 5 and 6.
FIGURE E-1 BRIGHTNESS SETTING ................................................................... 260
Section 6.4.1 through 6.5.2 steps 1 changed.
FIGURE E-2 ALIGN SCREEN .............................................................................. 260
Chapter 7 figures 7-6, 7-14, 7-15, 7-26, 7-35, 7-36, 7-
37 replaced. FIGURE E-3 PFED NIGHT VISION FILTER ......................................................... 260
Section 7.2.9.2.1 steps 5 & 7 modified.
Section 7.2.9.2.2 new step 15b, step 10 more button
changed.
Section 7.2.9.2.3 step 27 more button changed.
Chapter 8 figures 8-1, 8-2, 8-3, 8-15, 8-22, 8-23, 8-24
DRAFT 271 March 16, 2009 DRAFT xiv March 16, 2009
Chapter 1- Introduction and System Overview PFED User Manual Appendix G – Document Change History PFED User Manual
option.
CHAPTER 1 Section 8.2.2 CFF screen 2 step 26 note box
removed.
INTRODUCTION AND SYSTEM OVERVIEW Screens that contain Grid, Polar LRF and Shift radio
buttons changed (Figure 4-30, 4-32, 7-3, 7-5, 7-13,
7-24, 7-27, 7-28, 7-38, 7-39, 7-41, 7-42, 8-3, 8-21).
1.1 INTRODUCTION Section 7.2.3 step 4 updated with new buttons.
Section 8.2.1.1 step 3 updated with new buttons.
The Pocket-Sized Forward Entry Device (PFED) software was modified for the 1.5.2 8/30/05 Replaced screens in section 3.2.3 PointSec
U.S. Army by Project Manager for Battle and Command (PM BC). The initial installation.
core PFED hardware and software design leverages software and hardware 1.5.3 9/28/05 Changed text in step 1 of section 4.4.6 removing grid
components previously developed for the Defense Information Systems Agency convergence.
(DISA), the Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA), and the Removed original section 4.4.6 Application of Grid
Convergence.
Army Space & Missile Defense Battle Lab (SMDBL).
Increased the version number from 1.5.2 to 1.5.3.
1.5.3 10/10/05 Inserted note box in section 5.1.1 noting that SLP
1.2 CONCEPT OF OPERATIONS devices are assumed to support location information.
Last bullet in section 5.1.1 was added to, to state
The concept of operations for the PFED system has been developed around the designed for IP networks.
need to provide Forward Observers (FO) with a capability to shorten the Inserted note box in section 5.1.1.1 step 7 warning
that when using a MELIOS device, the declination
timeline for the Call For Fire (CFF) generation process to the Advanced Field must be set to 0.
Artillery Tactical Data System (AFATDS) and on to the firing units, while Inserted note box in section 5.1.1.1 step 6 noting
providing improved target location accuracies consistent with the Army’s configuration of SLP device, northing must be set to
requirements for the Objective Force and emerging precision guided artillery magnetic.
and munitions. The PFED system has been designed for ease of use and 1.5.3 11/1/05 Moved the change history to appendix H and
maintenance. Its system architecture exploits the data capability of Single updated all changes back to 1.5.1 version dated
5/24/05 for more accurate change history.
Channel Ground Airborne Radio System (SINCGARS) Advanced Systems
1.5.4 12/02/2005 Removed references to MELIOS
Improvement Program (ASIP) radios as well as a new class of RISC-based
Added verbiage for alerts when Mark VII and Leica
tactical processors made possible by the handheld Microsoft Windows CE ™ not set in PLGR CON
operating system. Added verbiage for when an LRF’s northing
reference is not set into magnetic
Handheld computer platforms offer smaller size, weight and reduced battery Added verbiage for datum checking
consumption while still providing sufficient computing power and active Added section on magnet variance and grid
day/night readable displays to meet mission requirements. declination display
Cross Referenced the index to update the page
numbers
1.3 SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1.5.5 12/28/2005 Added verbiage for LLDR operation. Use of PFED
data when there is a discrepancy
The PFED software features the following functions: 1.5.6 6/29/06 Updated the following figures: Figure 4-3, 4-5, 4-6,
4-22, 4-25, 4-29, 4-31, 4-33, 4-42, 5-9, 5-18, 5-19, 5-
Two-way messaging with Forward Observer System (FOS) and 20, 5-23, 6-1, 6-3, 6-2, 7-38, 8-4, 8-8, 8-21.
AFATDS Removed section 4.2.6 Preferences Setup
Global Positioning System (GPS) fixing Password.
Automatic position reporting Inserted sections 4.4.16, 9.2.1 Changing FiST
password.
FiST capability
Remove table 5-2.
DRAFT 1 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 270 March 16, 2009
Appendix G – Document Change History PFED User Manual Chapter 1- Introduction and System Overview PFED User Manual
PSG changed to PYG throughout document for Automatic target location calculation based on GPS and laser range
Model S. finder feeds
1.5.2 7/21/05 Appendix section B.7 Calibrating the PFED has been CFF generation and monitoring
added.
Templates for standard reports/requests, including:
Topic Index section moved to Appendix G.
Position Report
Section 4.4.2 Operator Position Location section
updated with new description and main screen.
Size Activity Location unit Time Equipment (SALUTE)/Artillery
Figure 4-11, 4-12, 4-13, 4-14 updated.
Target Information (ATI) Report
Section 4.4.2 step 4 and note box removed. Nuclear Chemical Biological (NBC) 1 Report
Section 7.2.7 Shelling Report step 13 Excalibur Medical Evacuation (MEDEVAC) Request
selection option added. Rapid Resupply Request
Section 8.2.1.1 Danger Close Figure 8-5 alert screen Unit Status Report
added. Step 3 note box information modified. Shelling Report
Section 8.2.1.5 step 2, new figure added for flashing Close Air Support (CAS) Request
MagVar information. New note box added in step Aircrew Brief
and step 3 was modified for new process.
Increased document version to 1.5.2.
Free Text Messaging
Application lock and zeroizing function
1.5.2 8/5/05 Sections 3.4.1 and 3.4.2 Lock and Unlock device
removed. URN Querying
Section Edit Menu Overview second bullet has been The PFED system has interfaces to the following communications and
updated.
peripheral devices, including currently fielded equipment:
Section 4.4.6 Map Datum Info section step 1 updated
with new Map Datum info screen (new capture) for SINCGARS ASIP radio via a TacLink 3000 Tactical Modem
the removal of Grid Magnetic field. Step 4 changed,
steps 6 through 8 removed. Section 4.4.6 paragraph
Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver (PLGR) or internal GPS receiver
changed for this update. Leica and 2100 laser range and direction finding binoculars
Section 7.2.7 step 13 Excalibur selection option LLDR –Laser Range Finding binoculars
removed. Mark VII – Laser Range Finding binoculars
Section 8.2.2 step 19 Excalibur selection option PRC148 – High Frequency (HF) Radio
removed. PSC5 - Satellite Communication (SATCOM)
Section 8.2.2 step 20 note box added stating that a Two-wire configuration
Point Detonating message is sent when Excalibur is
chosen. Precision Fires Image (PFI)
Appendix F Night Vision section added. The PFED user interface has been designed to provide a touch screen method of
1.5.2 8/11/05 Section 3.2.2 App Installation step 10 has been controlling the application. For example, if the FO needs to issue a CFF
updated.
message, it can be generated and transmitted by tapping on the appropriate icons
Section 3.2.3 PointSec Installation steps 2 through 4
have been updated for new procedure.
and menu items on the touch screen display.
Appendix F – Night Vision steps have been added.
Addition of a new Grid Convergence Alert screen
stating that the convergence is not setup in the : When using the PFED system with the LLDR, there may at times be discrepancies
system. between the calculated target location displayed in PFED and the one displayed in the
CFF Screen 2 and CFF Template screen 2 replaced eyepiece of the LLDR. In these circumstances, the user should use the data displayed
in sections 4 and 8. within the PFED application for mission threads.
Section 8.2.2 step 16 has been updated for new CFF
screen.
Section 5.1.1.1 steps 2, 7, 8, 10 updated for change
in COMMS setup to remove 188-220C and R5
DRAFT 269 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 2 March 16, 2009
Chapter 2- PFED System Assembly PFED User Manual Appendix G – Document Change History PFED User Manual
CHAPTER 2 APPENDIX G
PFED SYSTEM ASSEMBLY DOCUMENT CHANGE HISTORY
2.1 INTRODUCTION G.1 CHANGE HISTORY TABLE
File Version Date Description
The PFED system is comprised of the PFED handheld computer, battery 1.5.1 5/24/05 Sections 4.4.2.1 through 4.4.2.5 added talking about
compartment and adapter as well as the needed cables for communication to the the new GPS, Non existent GPS, disconnected GPS
peripheral components. These components can be comprised of a SINCGARS etc information.
ASIP radio and the Mark VII, SLP LRF (LLDR) or Leica gear. Section 4.4.6 Map Datum Info, first three paragraphs
added.
Sections 4.4.6 first 2 paragraphs added. Subsection
The operator’s primary interface with the system is through the small handheld covering Magnetic Variance added.
unit. Figures 5-12, 5-13 updated.
Last 2 icons added.
Section 7.2.7 step 2, new step added for new
Weapon button.
Section 8.2.1.1 Danger Close paragraph information
added.
Table 8-1 last 2 icons added.
1.5.1 5/26/05 Section 2.2 first bullet modified to include Model C, G
and S information. Step 4 and 5 also modified to
include other models.
Section 4.4.2.1 paragraph modified to include Model
C, G and S information.
Cover page changed to include Model C, G and S
Figure 2-1 Basic PFED System using Figure 2-2 Basic PFED System using information.
Embedded GPS Handheld Handheld without Embedded GPS New Figures 2-3, 2-4 have been added top show
AN/PSG-10 (V)2 w/PPS AN/PSG-10 (V)1 models C, G and S.
New Figure 2-7 added to show coil cable for the
SINCGARS.
2.2 BASIC PFED COMPONENTS Figures 2-12 and 2-13 captions changed to include
new models.
The basic PFED system is comprised of the following components. Ensure that Figure 2-15 changed and caption modified to show
the following components are present before assembly: new soft pack.
1.5.1 6/7/05 Topic Index added in front of document.
The PFED handheld with assembly Dome and embedded GPS - Section 5.1.1.1 step 5d modified to note Table 5-1.
AN/PSG-10 (V)2 w/PPS (Figure 2-3)/AN/PSG-10 (V)3 w/SAASM Table 5-1 added for embedded GPS information.
(Figure 2-5), or with Dome without embedded GPS - AN/PSG-10 (V)1 Section 8.2.1.1 step 3 note box added stating
(Figure 2-4), and the PFED 5700 handheld (Figure 2-6) warning added to hit toe correct ok button.
Cable for connection to the Mark VII (Figure 2-7) – used for serial Section 4.4.12 step 5 note box added stating what
happens when the option mils magnetic is selected.
communication
Section 7.2.8 note box added stating CAS briefs ca
Single Cable for connection to the SINCGARS ASIP Radio (Figure not be sent to FOS 7.01.
2-8) Section 8.2.2 step 26 note box added stating when
sending to a VMF R5 system.
DRAFT 3 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 268 March 16, 2009
Appendix F – Topic Index PFED User Manual Chapter 2- PFED System Assembly PFED User Manual
Position Report/Observer Coordinates (OBCO) .......................................... 135 Dual Cable for connection to the Mark VII/Leica and PGLR when
using a handheld without the embedded GPS (Figure 2-7 and Figure
Rapid Resupply Request .............................................................................. 147
2-8).
SALUTE/ATI Report ................................................................................... 135 AA Battery Compartment that holds eight (8) or ten (10) AA batteries
(Figure 2-9)
Shelling Report............................................................................................. 163 Rugged-Personal Digital Assistant (R-PDA) Battery Adapter (Figure
Unit Status Report ........................................................................................ 159 2-10)
Eight (8) or Ten (10) AA type alkaline batteries
URN Query .................................................................................................. 167 Mark VII (Figure 2-11)
Security ........................................................................................................... 224 SINCGARS ASIP radio (Figure 2-12)
FiST Passwords ............................................................................................ 224
: When assembling the PFED system, any plugs not in use should be covered with
Duress Mode ................................................................................................ 225 the appropriate cap to prevent dirt and water from leaking into the assembly.
System Assembly................................................................................................ 3
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 229
Calibrating PFED ......................................................................................... 235
Data Communications .................................................................................. 229
General Troubleshooting Techniques........................................................... 229
GPS .............................................................................................................. 230
PFED Computer ........................................................................................... 232
Figure 2-3 PFED Handheld with Dome
Figure 2-4 PFED Handheld with Dome
and Embedded GPS
AN/PSG-10 (V)1
AN/PSG-10 (V)2 w/PPS
Figure 2-5 PFED Handheld with Dome Figure 2-6 PFED Handheld - 5700 Model
AN/PSG-10 (V)3 w/SAASM
DRAFT 267 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 4 March 16, 2009
Chapter 2- PFED System Assembly PFED User Manual Appendix F – Topic Index PFED User Manual
Leica............................................................................................................. 245
PFED Handheld Setup .................................................................................... 56
Address/Unit List Setup ................................................................................. 73
Comms Devices Setup............................................................................ 85, 100
or
Figure 2-7 Mark VII Cable
Database Maintenance.................................................................................... 98
Figure 2-8 SINCGARS ASIP Radio Cable
Field Types..................................................................................................... 10
Fire Support Setup.......................................................................................... 85
CFF Templates............................................................................................ 88
FSCMs/Geometries..................................................................................... 92
Known Points ............................................................................................. 90
Planned Target List..................................................................................... 86
Figure 2-11 Mark Figure 2-12 Target Numbering....................................................................................... 85
VII SINCGARS ASIP
Radio GPS/Manual Time Sync ................................................................................ 56
Figure 2-10 Initial Setup .................................................................................................... 11
Figure 2-9 R-PDA Handheld Device Settings........................................................................... 22
AA Battery Battery
Compartment Adapter
Handheld External Buttons......................................................................... 29
Initial System Installation ........................................................................... 11
1. Locate the AA battery compartment. Insert AA batteries into the battery Resetting the Device ................................................................................... 21
compartment.
Keypad Operation .......................................................................................... 10
2. Locate the PFED battery adapter. Insert the AA battery compartment into
the handheld battery adapter. Map Info......................................................................................................... 79
3. Locate the PFED handheld device. Slide the battery adapter onto the left Operator (Positional) Location ....................................................................... 57
side of the handheld. Tighten the screw located on the bottom of the
adapter. Own Unit Information/Setup.......................................................................... 73
4. When using a handheld with Embedded GPS (AN/PSG-10 (V)2 w/PPS,
Preferences Setup ........................................................................................... 94
AN/PSG-10 (V)3 w/SAASM):
Automatic Position Reporting .................................................................... 95
a. Attach the Mark VII cable to the plug located on bottom of the handheld
device. Hotkeys....................................................................................................... 97
Measurement Units..................................................................................... 94
b. Attach the other end of this same cable to the plug located on the back SALUTE/ATI ............................................................................................. 98
underside of the Mark VII device.
Waypoint/Route Configuration and Navigation............................................. 63
c. Assembly of the handheld and Mark VII should look similar to the image
in Figure 2-13. Reports............................................................................................................ 134
CAS Request ................................................................................................ 169
CAS Aircrew Briefing.................................................................................. 173
MEDEVAC Request .................................................................................... 138
NBC 1 Report............................................................................................... 155
DRAFT 5 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 266 March 16, 2009
Appendix F – Topic Index PFED User Manual Chapter 2- PFED System Assembly PFED User Manual
Activating the Application ............................................................................. 51
PFED Navigation ........................................................................................... 53
Toolbar Options.............................................................................................. 54
Messaging ....................................................................................................... 123
Address/Unit List ......................................................................................... 110
Accessing the Message Screen..................................................................... 123
Figure 2-13 Embedded PFED Handheld
Receiving a Message (Inbox) ....................................................................... 126 (AN/PSG-10 (V)2 w/PPS)
Auto Routing ............................................................................................ 132 and Mark VII Assembly
Deleting .................................................................................................... 132 d. Attach the ASIP SINCGARS cable to the plug located at the top of the
Denying .................................................................................................... 130 handheld device dome.
Editing ...................................................................................................... 131
Forwarding/Replying................................................................................ 130 e. Attach the other end of this cable to the SINCGARS radio plug located
on the front of the device.
Locking/Unlocking ................................................................................... 131
Routing ..................................................................................................... 129
Sorting ...................................................................................................... 128 : When setting the Data Rates/Modes for the SINCGARS Radio, keep in mind that
Updating ................................................................................................... 130 all settings must be the same on one network.
Viewing .................................................................................................... 128
Sending a Message (New PTM)................................................................... 123
Composing a Message .............................................................................. 124 : For the Tactical Fire (TACFIRE), it is recommended that the SINCGARS ASIP
Deleting a Saved Message ........................................................................ 126 Radio Data Rate be set to TF.
Opening a Saved Message ........................................................................ 125
5. When using a handheld without Embedded GPS (AN/PSG-10 (V)1):
Saving Messages....................................................................................... 124
Selecting Priority ...................................................................................... 125 a. Attach the dual Mark VII/PLGR or Leica/PLGR cable, based on which
Laser Range Finder (LRF) unit you will be using, to the plug located on
Selecting Recipients.................................................................................. 124 top left-hand side of the handheld device.
Transmitting a Message ............................................................................ 126
b. Attach the single radio cable to the plug located on the top right-hand
Sent Messages (Outbox)............................................................................... 132 side of the handheld device.
Deleting .................................................................................................... 133
c. Assembly of the handheld should look similar to the image in Figure
Viewing .................................................................................................... 133 2-14.
Night Vision .................................................................................................... 259 d. Locate the PLGR device. Locate the rectangular pin connector on the
dual Mark VII/PLGR or the Leica/PLGR cable. Plug this into the
Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation ................................................ 237 connector located on the bake-side of the PLGR (Figure 2-15).
LLDR Setup ................................................................................................. 250 e. The PLGR is powered by one BA5800 or compatible battery. See the
PLGR User’s Guide for more information on assembly and operation of
Mark VII....................................................................................................... 240 the PLGR.
PLGR............................................................................................................ 237 f. Locate either the Leica or Mark VII device. Locate the round connector
on the dual Mark VII/PLGR or the Leica/PLGR cable. Plug this into the
SINCGARS ASIP ........................................................................................ 237 connector located on the bottom right side of the Leica or the top right
side of the Mark VII.
DRAFT 265 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 6 March 16, 2009
Chapter 2- PFED System Assembly PFED User Manual Appendix F – Topic Index PFED User Manual
g. Locate the SINCGARS ASIP Radio device. Locate the round
connector on the SINCGARS ASIP Radio cable. Plug this into the APPENDIX F
connector located on the front-side of the SINCGARS ASIP Radio.
TOPIC INDEX
h. The SINCGARS ASIP is powered by type BB590. See the SINCGARS
ASIP Operator’s Manual for more information on configuring and
operating the SINCGARS ASIP Radio. F.1 TOPIC INDEX
Acronym List.................................................................................................. 227
: When setting the Data Rates/Modes for the SINCGARS Radio, keep in mind that
all settings must be the same on one network. Call For Fire ................................................................................................... 181
Call For Fire Request ................................................................................... 182
CFF (Screen 1).......................................................................................... 183
: For the TACFIRE, it is recommended that the SINCGARS ASIP Radio Data Rate
be set to TF. CFF - Extended (Screen 2) ....................................................................... 196
Sending CFF Template Fire Mission........................................................ 203
6. Complete the assembly by packing the PFED into the softpack (Figure
2-16).
Fire Mission Monitor ................................................................................... 204
Monitoring Active Targets........................................................................ 204
Canceling an At My Command (AMC) ................................................ 211
Check Firing.......................................................................................... 214
Confirming Denied Missions ................................................................ 207
Log Information .................................................................................... 216
Making Subsequent Corrections ........................................................... 209
Message to Observer (MTO)................................................................. 205
Figure 2-16 PFED
New Call For Fire.................................................................................. 216
Figure 2-14 PFED Figure 2-15 PFED and
Handheld (AN/PSG-10 PLGR Assembly Softpack – Case Field Repeat Fire For Effect and Cease Loading Command .......................... 211
(V)1) Front-end Olive Drab Report Upon Firing ............................................................................... 208
Subsystem Assembly Sending the Fire Command................................................................... 211
Sending End of Mission (EOM)............................................................ 212
2.2.1 Uniform Integration Set Mission to Inactive.......................................................................... 213
Inactive Fire Missions............................................................................... 218
The following recommendations outline the ideal configuration and rationale for Planned Fire Missions......................................................................... 86, 217
integrating the PFED system with your uniform. The handheld unit can be On Call Fire Missions............................................................................... 220
stored in any available space that provides easy access to the system, although
certain positions have been found to be better than others. Change History .............................................................................................. 266
The PFED computer should be carried at or above the waist; placing Communications Status................................................................................. 116
the device in a pants pocket drastically increases the likelihood of
Status Information ........................................................................................ 117
damaging the system in the course of routine infantry combat tasks.
The best places to carry the PFED device are in an upper pocket on the Testing & Resetting a Device....................................................................... 118
Battle Dress Uniform (BDU) blouse or in an ammunition pouch on the
load bearing gear. Transmission Queue..................................................................................... 118
Error/Alert Messages........................................................................56, 122, 252
Main Screen...................................................................................................... 51
DRAFT 7 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 264 March 16, 2009
Appendix E – PFED With Night Vision Goggles PFED User Manual Chapter 2- PFED System Assembly PFED User Manual
g. To remove the filter, pull back the material at the center of either the left 2.2.2 Additional Devices
or right side of the screen and peel it away gently.
The above assembly pertains to the basic PFED system. The following are other
11. On the Align screen tap to start the process. peripheral devices that can be used with this system.
12. Perform a screen alignment process by tapping the stylus in the center of
the five (5) crosshairs that appear on the screen. If the alignment does not
work the first time, the Align screen will reappear asking you to repeat the
process. Make sure you tap in the very center of the crosshairs.
13. The system will return you to the initial Align screen when the process is
complete. To exit this screen, tap in the top right corner.
14. Then tap in the top right corner to return to the Today screen. Figure 2-18 Leica
Figure 2-17 PLGR Figure 2-19 Leica/PLGR
Cable
DRAFT 263 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 8 March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual Appendix E – PFED With Night Vision Goggles PFED User Manual
CHAPTER 3
HANDHELD SETUP
3.1 INTRODUCTION
3.1.1 Handheld/Desktop Device Application Differences
Each handheld device is a mobile computer much like any desktop computer but
more compact in design. It operates software applications with the same look Figure E-1 Brightness Setting
and feel as any other Microsoft Windows ™ desktop computer, such as clicking
on a Save button with a mouse is the same as tapping on a Save button with a
handheld stylus pen. However, there are a few differences between these
devices that you will need to be aware.
When accessing a screen, application, selecting an option, or hitting an Figure E-2 Align Screen
action button (i.e., , ), you only need to tap the screen
once with the stylus pen. You do not need to tap twice as you would
do when double-clicking a mouse button.
In a Microsoft Windows CE ™ operating system, there is no taskbar at
the bottom of the handheld screen. To change from one application to
another, the Title Bar across the top of the screen found in all
applications will allow the operator to temporarily minimize an
application and access another.
: Be aware, the following two (2) bullets are referring to the handheld system
applications only. Figure E-3 PFED Night Vision Filter
a. Remove any protective skins that might still be affixed to either side of
On most of the system application windows you will see an in the the filter.
top right-hand corner. This button functions like an Ok or Save
operation. It will save and exit the current window. b. Slightly “bow” the filter lengthwise and insert the two lower corners first.
The found on most of the system application windows functions like c. Repeat this process with the upper two corners.
a Cancel operation. Tapping this button will close the current window
d. Carefully tuck the perimeter of the filter into the edge of the screen all
and not save any entered information. along the perimeter starting with the two long sides.
e. After installation, there might be a small gap of light bleed. To remove
: Be aware, the following two (2) bullets are referring to the PFED application only. this bleed, start at the center of the filter and glide your thumb along it
to move the material towards the crack (or light bleed area). This idea
In most PFED windwos you will see or in the top right-hand is much like removing the bumps or bulges you might have when
corner. These buttons function like a Cancel operation. Tapping or installing carpet. This process may also take a few times with a newer
will exit the current window and drop any changes made on that filter that is stiff or tight.
screen unless you had previously saved your entries where it applies. f. When the surface of a filter builds up too much surface debris, it may
not cling properly. This can be cleaned with water and air dried.
DRAFT 9 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 262 March 16, 2009
Appendix E – PFED With Night Vision Goggles PFED User Manual Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual
The found on the Main PFED screen functions like a Minimize
APPENDIX E operation. It will minimize the application, much like the on a
PFED WITH NIGHT VISION GOGGLES desktop computer (refer to section 4.2.2 Minimizing PFED for
complete instructions on minimizing the PFED application).
E.1 HOW TO OPERATE PFED IN NIGHT MODE 3.1.2 Keypad Operation
1. On the devices main Today screen, tap found at the top of the screen
: There are times when the keypad will be obstructing access to either needed
in the Title bar.
fields or operational buttons. To avoid this problem, the operator should keep the keypad
2. Tap the Settings menu option.
minimized by tapping at the bottom of the screen as frequently as possible.
3. From the main Settings screen, tap the tab at the bottom to access
the handheld system setting options.
: You may also tap at the bottom of the screen to access the keypad at any
time (refer to section B.6 PFED Computer for troubleshooting information on keypad
4. In the list of available icons, there is an option for backlight ( ). If you problems).
do not see it right away, you may need to scroll through the list using the
stylus and the scroll bar to the right of the screen.
5. When you have found this picture icon, tap it once. This will access the
Settings – Backlight configuration screen.
6. Tap the tab at the bottom to access settings for the screen
brightness level.
Figure 3-1 Handheld Popup Keypad
7. In the On Battery option, tap and hold the stylus on the slider and adjust the
slider up to the second tick (Figure E-1).
8. Tap at the top right. : The Pop-up Keypad functions much like a typical computer keyboard with certain
exceptions:
123 – shows keys found on the right side of a computer keyboard & all symbols
9. In the list of available icons, tap the Screen icon ( ) to access the Align CAP – shows upper case letters and number keys as their associated symbols
screen (Figure E-2). Shift – shows upper case letters and number keys as their associated symbols
10. Place the PFED handheld night vision filter over the handheld screen and - moves the cursor left or right and up or down
snap it in place (Figure E-3).
3.1.3 Field Types
While using the PFED application, you will find several types of fields to
complete. Most fields will be of the text type where the operator will need to
use a keypad to enter the needed information.
Another field type is a drop-down selection list (Figure 3-2). These can be
recognized by the down-arrow ( ) symbol usually to the right of a field label.
By tapping on this symbol, a selection list will appear. Some lists will be too
long to display all options, so a scroll bar will be available to scroll through the
list. The chosen option is then displayed in the field.
DRAFT 261 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 10 March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual Appendix D – PFED Error Messages PFED User Manual
There are also button style fields (Figure 3-3). In most cases these fields will User Info Please select a PLATFORM TYPE.
display a secondary screen when tapped. These secondary screens are used for You must enter a Unit Name or URN.
completing these types of fields. These fields may also be completed using the WayPoint WayPoint already exists with this name, update the existing
WayPoint's location?
available keypad ( ) rather than going to the secondary screen.
Select Waypoint to delete
Select Waypoint to edit.
Others are radio buttons (Figure 3-4) that allow only one choice and in some
Select Waypoint to navigate to
limited cases will display a secondary screen for more information. However,
typically they may be selected by simply tapping one option.
One other type you may find will be check boxes (Figure 3-5). These fields
allow more than one selection under a specific category, and at times will
automatically check other options when one item is selected.
Some fields that require only a number value, there may be an up/down-arrow
shown ( ). These fields may be displayed in conjunction with a button field
(Figure 3-6). These types of fields may be completed one of two ways. The
associated button may be tapped to access the secondary screen to allow entry.
Or, the up/down-arrow may be tapped to scroll to the correct numeric value.
Tapping the up-arrow will begin the values at “1” and the down-arrow will
begin at the largest value allowed for the field (e.g., 100, 999, etc).
Figure 3-4 Radio Button
Field Example
Figure 3-3 Button Field
Examples
Figure 3-2 Drop-down
Selection List Example
Figure 3-6 Up/Down-Arrow
Figure 3-5 Check Box Field Example Field Example
3.2 INITIAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION (3900 MODEL)
The following section shows the Initial Installation for the AN/PSG-10 (V)2
w/PPS, AN/PSG-10 (V)3 w/SAASM, or the AN/PSG-10 (V)1 handheld devices.
Refer to section 3.7 for instructions for the 5700 models.
DRAFT 11 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 260 March 16, 2009
Appendix D – PFED Error Messages PFED User Manual Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual
Please enter WIDTH. The following procedures are performed when installing the PFED application
System Alerts Select alert to delete. on either a new handheld device that does not yet contain any software or
TACFIRE Please select Baud Rate configuration settings, or, when an existing device needs to be completely
Please Select EDC Mode reconfigured due to a memory loss or damage.
Please Select High Subsequent NAD
Please Select Low Initial NAD
Please select Modulation
Please Select NAD
: The instructions in section 3.2 are only used by System Administrators for
TacLink Network name already used, please choose a different net initial PFED installation and setup. They are not recommended for use by field operators.
name. Unless an operator is directly instructed by an Administrator to perform such a function,
Network Name must be defined there should be no need to perform a Hard Reset and a Re-Installation of the system while
Station Rank MUST be less than Number of Stations! in the field.
Target Block Please enter the END target number.
Please enter the START target number. 3.2.1 Hard Reset Using External Buttons on the 3900
START target number must begin with two letters.
The End number must be greater than the Start number.
Track Edit Please enter a LOCATION.
Please enter a STRENGTH/SIZE between 0 and 1000. : The following procedure should only be used as a “Last Resort.” The
Track Overlay Please enter your allocated Target Block. operator should access the Hard Reset application from the Start menu (refer to section
3.2.1).
TwoWire Failed to create/open output file
TxActivity Could not Abort message - send is in progress. 1. If not already off, power off the handheld device by pressing the small round
Could not Defer message - send is in progress. button at the top right-hand corner of the device (Figure 3-7). Next, you will
Please select a message. need to remove any external power sources the device may have.
Send is in progress.
Unit Info You must enter a Observer ID.
: This next step (step 2 below) instructs you to remove the Expansion Power
You must enter a Unit Name and URN.
Pack on the back of the device. This WILL void any warranty associated with the device
Unit List Delete selected address? and the power pack. ONLY perform this process for emergency reasons or if directly
Please check-mark unit(s) to delete. instructed to do so by an Administrator.
Please select a Unit(s).
2. You will need a small Phillips screwdriver for this step. Remove the
Please select an address to edit Expansion power pack on the back of the device by removing the four (4)
The address could not be retrieved. screws found along the left and right side of the pack (Figure 3-8).
The radio subscriber list must be reset. This process may 3. Also, remove any external power cable that may be attached to the bottom
take up to 15 seconds.
of the device (Figure 3-9).
Unit Select Please select a Unit(s).
Unit Status Please enter LENGTH.
Please enter WIDTH.
UnitConnect The maximum number of stations on this network has been
reached, please delete one from the net.
URN Query Cannot Query on your own URN!
Please enter a URN to add
Please select URN to add to Query.
Please select URNs to query on.
URN must be between 0 and 6499999
DRAFT 259 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 12 March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual Appendix D – PFED Error Messages PFED User Manual
Please select Modulation
Outbox Delete Selected Messages?
Password Blank passwords are not allowed.
Power Expansion Incorrect Password
Button Pack Screws New and confirm passwords do not match.
New Password and Confirm New Password differ.
The old password is incorrect.
Figure 3-7 Device Power Button Your password has been changed.
Planned Target No more Target Numbers available, Please set Target Block
Please enter full Target Number
Figure 3-8 Expansion Pack Screw Please enter SIZE/STRENGTH.
Locations
Please enter the target LOCATION.
Please select the TARGET TYPE.
Target already exists, edit existing target?
External Power Platform Status Corrupt UnitStatus Database!
Cable
Reports Report/request is not available.
Resupply No data has been entered
Please enter a LOCATION.
You cannot have more than 25 items in a resupply report.
Review Message Editing of messages can result in databases being out of
sync!!
Figure 3-9 External Power Cable Location
Message could not be accessed.
4. Power the handheld “on” by pressing the small round button at the top right- Route Please enter Route's Name!
hand corner of the device. Please select at least one Waypoint!
5. Perform a hard reset on the device. Do this by first locating the stylus Select a row.
(Figure 3-10). Select Route to navigate to
6. Next, locate the reset button (a recessed button) found on the underside of Select Waypoint to edit.
the device (Figure 3-12) and the device operation buttons. Salute Please enter a LOCATION.
7. Now perform a “hard reset” by using two (2) fingers of one hand to press Please enter a STRENGTH/SIZE between 0 and 9999.
and hold the two (2) outside buttons found at the bottom of the device while Please select a PLATFORM TYPE.
simultaneously pressing the stylus tip into the reset button (Figure 3-12). Please select THREAT TYPE.
Hold this position for about 10 seconds until the screen goes completely
blank. Saved Messages Select a message to delete.
Select a row.
8. Once the screen has gone blank, you may release all of the buttons.
Set Time Error Setting Time.
9. Lastly, use the stylus and press the reset button once more very lightly until Shelling Please enter a LOCATION.
the Compaq splash screen appears. The system will then display a
Please select a Caliber.
Welcome screen (Figure 3-13).
Please select a Detection Method.
Please select a Weapon Subtype.
Please select a Weapon Type.
The END time must be later than the start time.
Size Please enter ATTITUDE.
Please enter LENGTH.
Please enter RADIUS.
DRAFT 13 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 258 March 16, 2009
Appendix D – PFED Error Messages PFED User Manual Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual
Please enter ALTITUDE.
Please enter hemisphere for longitude Reset
Please select hemisphere for latitude Button
Please select hemisphere for longitude.
Stylus
Please select the hemisphere for the latitude
Location Name Please enter a position name Figure 3-11 Reset Button
Please enter a valid position
Location Polar Are you sure you want to cancel (data will be discarded)?
Main Please enter a primary destination address. Figure 3-10 Stylus Pen
Please enter your allocated Target Block.
Please enter your altitude. Right Button
Please enter your location.
The Voice Activation module is not loaded on this system.
Map Datum Invalid Datum Selected
Invalid Datum, Ellipsoid, Area combination Left Button
Invalid Ellipsoid
Mark Location Location already exists, edit existing location?
Reset Button
Please enter a LOCATION.
Please select a COLOR. Figure 3-12 Performing “Hard Rest”
Medevac Either Location or Pick Up Zone Name allowed, not both
Enemy Data Must be entered
Please enter a Pick Up Location or a Pick Up Zone Name
Please enter a REQUEST NUMBER.
Please enter the Battle Roster (BR) NUMBER.
Please select a direction to delete. Figure 3-13 Handheld Welcome
Please select CONTAMINATION. Screen
Please select MARKINGS.
10. Once the handheld Welcome screen appears, you may reassemble the
Please select PZ SECURITY.
handheld. With your small Phillips screwdriver, replace the Expansion
Please select the DIRECTION to ENEMY. power pack on the back of the device by re-attaching the four (4) screws
REQUEST NUMBER must be 5 characters long. found along the left and right side of the pack (Figure 3-8).
You may not enter 'Branches, Stones' or 'Fabric Strips' for an 11. Then, replace any external power cables that may have been removed
Air mission. previously (Figure 3-9). Then follow the instructions in section 3.2.3.
Message To Observer Laser Alert Time: <intiger> sec’s.
Messaging Manager <string> routed from <string> to <string> 3.2.2 Hard Reset Using Reset Application on the 3900
Position Report received older than stored position for unit.
Database not updated 1. On the devices main Today screen, tap in the Title bar and select
NBC1 Please enter NBC1 Location. Reset (Figure 3-14).
Please select Burst Type 2. Tap to begin the hard reset process. Then follow the
Please select Delivery Means. instructions in section 3.2.3.
The END attack time must be later than the start time.
Net 188220a Please select Baud Rate
Please select ComSec mode
Please select Frequency Hopping mode
DRAFT 257 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 14 March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual Appendix D – PFED Error Messages PFED User Manual
3.2.3 Reset Process on the 3900 EOM received for <string>
Fire CMD received for <string>
1. The Welcome screen for Windows will display and ask that you tap the
screen to continue. Go ahead and tap the screen once to display the Align Fire Mission received
screen (Figure 3-15). MTO received for <string>
2. Perform a screen alignment process by tapping the stylus in the center of MTO received for mission not in buffers!
the five (5) crosshairs that appear on the screen (Figure 3-15). If the Subs Adjust received for <string>
alignment does not work the first time, the Alignment screen will reappear Subsequent Adjust received for mission not in mission buffers
asking you to repeat the process. Make sure you tap in the very center of Fire Mission Monitor FPF missions must have LINEAR target data. Please verify
the crosshairs. the size information.
3. When the alignment process is complete, a Stylus screen will appear giving No changes have been made.
you some general information about using the stylus pen. To pass this Please enter ADJUST data!
screen, tap . Please enter the ATTITUDE for the FPF line.
4. The next few screens ask you to tap and hold the stylus pen on a few items Please select a TARGET#.
shown to give you a little practice using the instrument. On the first screen, Formatted Edit Invalid Length
tap and hold the stylus on the name Dr. Johnson’s Office until a pop-up Invalid Range
menu appears. Free Text Enter text to send.
5. In the pop-up menu tap the Cut option. Please Specify at Least One Recipient
6. Next tap and hold the stylus on the item number 11 that is being indicated Geometry <string> deleted from FSCM/Geometry database
on the screen until another pop-up menu appears. <string> updated in FSCM/Geometry database
7. In the pop-up menu tap the Paste option. A Line requires at least 2 points.
EFFECTIVE TIME must be before the EXPIRATION TIME.
8. On the last screen, tap to pass the Congratulation’s screen and FSCM/Geometry database purged
move on to the Location screen.
GEOMETRY (shape/points) data is incomplete.
9. In the Location screen, tap the to the right of the Time Zone field and The following geometries have expired and will be purged
select the appropriate time zone you are located (i.e., GMT-5 Eastern US for immediately. They will be deleted upon application exit or
the US East Coast, etc.). system power-up.
10. Then tap . Inbox You are limited to protecting 10 files!
Known Points Known Point already exists. Overwrite existing data?
11. Tap once anywhere on the next two (2) final screens to take you to the
devices’ Today screen (Figure 3-16). Known Point Number already exists, overwrite existing?
Please enter a location
Please enter the point LOCATION.
Please enter the POINT NUMBER.
Laser Info INVALID LASER/PRF CODE: One or more blank digit field
Local-Non-Local Please select a Unit to receive this message.
Addressing
Location Grid Are you sure you want to cancel (data will be discarded)?
Error Setting Time.
Invalid 100,000 METER ZONE (2nd box).
Invalid GRID ZONE (1st box).
Invalid LAT/LON.
Invalid MGRS coordinate.
Invalid UTM coordinate.
Please enter a 6, 8, or 10 digit grid.
DRAFT 15 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 256 March 16, 2009
Appendix D – PFED Error Messages PFED User Manual Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual
Call For Fire More Please enter QUICK SMOKE data.
Please select a Smoke FFE Projectile.
Call For Fire Smoke Please select a DURATION.
Please select a SHEAF LENGTH.
Please select the CLOUD COVERAGE.
Please select the WIND DIRECTION.
CAS Request Please enter a CAS Mission Number that is 5 characters long.
Please enter a FIRE PLAN NAME.
Please enter a LOCATION.
Please enter a MISSION PRIORITY.
Please enter the CAS Mission Number.
Please select a TARGET TYPE.
Please select the MISSION TYPE.
Please specify the Initial Point Location.
Please specify the Initial Point Name.
Check Fire Cancel check firing on ALL targets? Figure 3-14 Reset Application Figure 3-15 Stylus Alignment Screen
Check firing on ALL targets?
Close Air Support Please specify the egress Cardinal Direction or Offset.
Egress
Cloud Data Please select cloud Top or Bottom.
Comms Do you want to delete all member network data associated
with this device?
Please select Network connections to delete
Unable to add device.
Database <string> database is <intiger> percent full, please delete some
records
Database Manager Are you sure you want to delete all unit addresses?
Are you sure you want to delete PFED settings?
Cannot delete
Could not delete registry.
Delete selected databases?
End Of Mission WARNING!!!! Deleting Mission without a Target Number can
corrupt Data, Continue? Figure 3-16 Today Screen
WARNING!!!! PFED may become out of sync with fire support
systems processing this mission. Proper procedure to 3.2.4 Application Installation on the 3900
inactivate missions is sending EOM. Continue?
Fire Mission Manager <string> received for <string> 1. Insert the small SD memory card into the top of the handheld device. Make
sure the SD memory card is seated all the way into the slot.
<string> routed from <string> to <string>
Cancel Check Firing received for <string> 2. On the devices main Today screen, tap found at the top of the screen
Cancel Check Firing received for mission not in buffers. in the Title bar and select the Programs item. Then tap the File Explorer
Cease Loading received for mission not in buffers. program icon. This will display the File Explorer screen.
Check Firing received for <string> 3. Tap found at the right of the My Documents title. Then select My Device
Check Firing received for mission not in buffers. from the drop-down.
Delete message received for <string> 4. From the displayed list, tap the Storage Card option.
DRAFT 255 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 16 March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual Appendix D – PFED Error Messages PFED User Manual
5. To begin the installtion process, tap the file name Install. This will display
the DoD Install Warning screen (Figure 3-17). APPENDIX D
6. Tap . The system will then display a hard reset prompt (Figure PFED ERROR/ALERT MESSAGES
3-18).
7. Tap at the top right of the window. D.1 ERROR/ALERT MESSAGES
a. If the system requests a hard reset, perform steps 3 through 12 in
section 3.2.1 to hard reset the device. Appears in … Message
Address Call Sign cannot be blank!
b. You may need to repeat the steps in this section to begin the
Delete selected address?
installation process again.
Please check-mark address(es) to delete.
c. Once the reset has completed, continue to step 8 below to complete Please select a recipient(s).
the process.
Please select an address to edit
8. The system will then install the application and all needed tools. If you The address could not be retrieved.
watch the title bar area, it will display the items it is installing. The maximum number of stations on this network has been
9. When the system has installed all of the tools and software, the Date/Time The radio subscriber list must be reset. This process may
Entry screen will display (Figure 3-19). Enter the current date and time here take up to 15 seconds.
and tap when finished. URN cannot be blank!
URN must be unique!
Air Crew Briefing Please enter a CAS Mission Number that is 5 characters long.
Please enter EGRESS Information.
Please enter required data in Lines 3-7.
Please enter required data in Lines 8-9.
Please enter the CAS Mission Number.
Please enter the TARGET LOCATION.
Please select a MARKING TYPE.
Please select a Target Number
Please select a TARGET TYPE.
Please specify the Contact Point Location.
Please specify the Initial Point Location.
Please specify the Initial Point Name.
App Lock Continue unlocking system?
Incorrect Password
Call For Fire ALERT!: This Mission is specified as a moving target
Figure 3-17 DoD Install Warning Screen Figure 3-18 Hard Reset Prompt FPF missions must have LINEAR target data. Please verify
the size information.
No More Target Numbers, please set up Target Block
Please enter a LOCATION.
Please enter the ATTITUDE for the FPF line.
Please select a TARGET TYPE.
Please select the MISSION TYPE.
Call For Fire Adjust Please enter a value for DIRECTION.
Please enter SHIFT data.
There are no known locations.
DRAFT 17 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 254 March 16, 2009
Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation PFED User Manual Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual
Select AVAM MODE
Select INTERNAL NORMAL for MODE
Select MILS for ANGULAR UNITS
Select EXIT
e. Select AVAM MAGVAR
Select MAGNETIC for NORTH REFERENCE
Select EXIT
Select QUIT
f. Select SYSTEM INFO
Select SAVE SETTINGS
Select EXIT
Select QUIT
Figure 3-19 Date/Time Entry Screen
10. The system will then process through the PointSec Security installation
process. From here, follow the instructions found in section 3.2.5.
3.2.5 PointSec Installation or System Recovery on the 3900
1. When date/time entry is complete the system will display the PointSec
Security ID screen (Figure 3-20). On this screen enter a system ID for
configuring the PointSec security software. When ready, tap in the top
right hand corner.
2. Draw any straight line across the blank PointSec Line Draw screen (Figure
3-21) to set the new encryption algorithm. Once complete, the PIN and
Confirmation screen will appear (Figure 3-22).
DRAFT 253 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 18 March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation PFED User Manual
f. rot -60° rotate by -60°
g. tilt LEFt tilt the left side of the LEICA downwards
h. undo tilt return to horizontal
i. too FAr reverse direction
j. PrES butn press button
: Always turn in the same direction for all ”rot 90°” instructions.
: Perform each movement slowly and steadily, until the next instruction appears.
When you see the ”StOP” instruction, immediately hold the LEICA still and on no
account move it while ”StOP” is displayed.
Figure 3-20 PointSec Security ID Setup Figure 3-21 PointSec Line Draw C.6 LLDR SETUP
Screen
LLDR: Setup for communication with PFED
1. Select SETUP.
2. Select GPS SETUP
a. Select COMMUNICATIONS.
Select SLP for Port Protocol
Select RS-232 for SLP Mode
Select EXIT
b. Select GRID SYSTEM
Select MGRS-NEW
Select EXIT
Select DATUM
Select WGD
Select EXIT
c. Select Mode/Elevation Settings
Figure 3-22 PointSec Security PIN Setup Screen
Select CONTINUOUS for Mode (This must be set each time
3. In the PIN and Confirm fields, enter the same password in both to confirm LLDR is turned on)
the entry. It is recommended that the operator use their AKO password so it Select MIXED for the SATELLITE TYPE
is easily remembered. Once entered tap . Select MEAN SEA LEVEL for the ELEVATION REFERENCE
4. The device will perform a soft reboot on its own and the PointSec splash Select METERS for the ELEVATION UNITS
screen will display (Figure 3-23). Tap this screen once. After a few seconds Select AUTOMATIC for the ELEVATION HOLD
the system will continue to the PointSec Password screen (Figure 3-24). Select FOM for the GPS ERROR
Select EXIT
5. Using the available keypad, enter the same password as in step 3. When Select QUIT
ready, tap . If the system clock was not configured correctly, the system
may display a warning screen informing the operator that the PIN has d. Select AVAM SETUP
DRAFT 19 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 252 March 16, 2009
Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation PFED User Manual Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual
expired. This is just a warning message. If this screen does appear, tap
in the top right hand corner.
: Use the azimuth key to change between increment and decrement!
6. As a final step, the system will perform another soft reset and display a
2. Click the azimuth key three times in rapid succession to store the new prompt for the operator to encrypt the SD Card that was used during the
declination value. installation (Figure 3-25).
3. If the azimuth key is not correctly clicked three times, the previous settings
remain unchanged and ”Old dECL” is displayed.
Reset to Factory Settings
1. Click the azimuth key eight times in rapid succession.
2. "rSt to dEFAULt" is displayed followed by "no YES".
: Yes: Click on distance key (allows to change back to factory settings)
No: Click on azimuth key (keeps current settings)
3. Click the azimuth key eight times in rapid succession to set LEICA to factory
settings. "Stor dEFAULt" is displayed.
4. If not done correctly, the settings remain unchanged and ”no CHAnGE” is
displayed.
C.5.4 4-Point Compass Calibration (Handheld)
Figure 3-23 PointSec Splash Screen Figure 3-24 PointSec Password Screen
Perform compass calibration:
After every battery change
After the LEICA has been exposed to strong magnetic fields
When metallic parts have been attached to the LEICA (e.g. night vision
device)
After movement greater than 20 km and/or to a different terrain type
1. Point the LEICA roughly northwards.
2. Click the azimuth key four times in rapid succession. ”FIEL Co” appears
briefly, followed by ”4 Pt Co” for the regular 4 point calibration.
3. Click the distance key when ”4 Pt Co” is displayed until the desired option is
displayed. The selected procedure starts automatically in a few moments.
4. The LEICA needs to be swivelled in various directions during calibration.
Instructions for the required direction of movement appear successively in
the display:
a. turn UP tilt upwards
Figure 3-25 PointSec Card Encryption Prompt
b. rtrn hori return to horizontal
c. turn dn tilt downwards 7. This process is NOT to be completed. Please tap to pass. The
installation is now complete and the Today screen will appear. Based on
d. rot 90° rotate by 90° the version you have installed, a different background photo or theme
(Figure 3-26, Figure 3-27 and Figure 3-28) will be shown.
e. rot 60° rotate by 60°
DRAFT 251 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 20 March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation PFED User Manual
a. At the left: angular unit in mils, gon or degrees.
b. At the right: distance unit in metres (SI-Unit), yards, or feet.
4. Click the azimuth key five times in rapid succession to save your preferred
units.
5. If the azimuth key is not correctly clicked five times, the previous settings
remain unchanged and ”Old Unit” is displayed.
6. If the azimuth key is correctly clicked five times, the previous settings
change to “Stor”.
Distance Gate
1. Click the distance key three times in rapid succession. ”diSt GAtE“ appears
followed by the current setting.
2. Click the azimuth key until the desired minimum distance appears (e.g. 500
m).
Figure 3-26 Today Screen Version Figure 3-27 Today Screen Version 3. Depending on LEICA model the distance gate limits will be different.
1.1 2.0
: Setting the minimum distance to "5 SI-U" disables the distance gate (default gate =
5m).
4. Click the distance key three times in rapid succession to save the setting.
5. If you do not press the distance key, the previous setting remains
unchanged and "Old Gate" is displayed.
6. If you do press the distance key, the previous settings change to “Stor”.
: "GAtE on" is displayed when closer ranges are measured.
Declination Setting/Correction
1. Click the azimuth key three times in rapid succession. The stored
declination value is displayed.
Figure 3-28 Today Screen Version 3.0
3.3 RESETTING THE DEVICE (3900 MODEL) : When used with PLGR (or other device determining declination (MAGVAR))
declination must be set at "0.”
The following section shows the Resetting The Device for the AN/PSG-10 (V)2
w/PPS, AN/PSG-10 (V)3 w/SAASM, or the AN/PSG-10 (V)1 handheld devices.
Refer to section 3.8 for instructions for the 5700 models. : Distance key:
Short click: the declination value changes by one unit per click.
Long click (> 0.5 s): the declination value changes continuously.
DRAFT 21 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 250 March 16, 2009
Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation PFED User Manual Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual
2. The following items appear in the field of view: Resetting the handheld is very much like re-booting a desktop computer. This is
a. The current azimuth at the left. done using the stylus and the external Reset button found at the bottom
underside of the device.
b. The current angle of inclination at the right.
3. Azimuth and Inclination will update twice per second as long as the operator 3.3.1 Soft Reset on the 3900
continues to hold down the azimuth key.
1. Using the reset button on the underside of the device (Figure 3-11), press
4. Sight the object with the pointing circle, then release the azimuth key while
the tip of the stylus very lightly until the Pocket PC splash screen appears.
holding the LEICA steady.
2. This will re-boot the device and process a new login using the PointSec
5. The azimuth and angle of inclination to the object are displayed.
login screen.
Azimuth & Horizontal Distance Between Two Objects 3. In the space provided, enter the password created when the system was
first installed. When finished, tap .
1. Press and hold the azimuth key.
2. The current azimuth appears. 3.4 HANDHELD DEVICE SETTINGS (3900 MODEL)
3. Sight the first object with the pointing circle.
4. Click the distance key (> 0.5 s) while holding the LEICA steady. The following section shows the Handheld Device Settings for the AN/PSG-10
5. The first object measurement is confirmed (1-P = first point). (V)2 w/PPS, AN/PSG-10 (V)3 w/SAASM, or the AN/PSG-10 (V)1 handheld
devices. Refer to section 3.9 for instructions for the 5700 models.
6. Sight the second object with the pointing circle.
7. Release the azimuth key while holding the LEICA steady.
3.4.1 Access System Setting Options on the 3900
8. The azimuth appears at the left and the horizontal distance at the right of the
field of view. 1. Using the stylus, tap .
2. To access the handheld power and backlight options, tap the Settings
Relative Horizontal/Vertical Angle menu option (Figure 3-29).
1. Click the azimuth key once, then immediately press and hold it down. 3. This will display the main Settings screen that contains three (3) tab options
2. The following items appear in the field of view: at the bottom (Figure 3-30): Personal, System, and Connections.
a. The current azimuth at the left.
b. The current angle of inclination at the right.
3. Sight the first object with the pointing circle.
4. Click the distance key while holding the LEICA steady.
5. Both angles are set to zero.
6. Sight the second object and release the azimuth key.
7. The relative angles appear in the field of view.
C.5.3 Settings
Measurement Units
1. Click the azimuth key five times in rapid succession.
2. ”Unit SEtt” appears briefly, followed by the measurement units currently in
use by the LEICA.
3. Click the distance key until the desired units appear in the field of view:
DRAFT 249 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 22 March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation PFED User Manual
Horizontal Distance and Height Difference
1. Click the distance key once, then immediately press and hold it down.
2. Sight the object with the pointing circle.
3. Release the distance key while holding the LEICA steady.
4. The horizontal distance appears at the left and the height difference at the
right of the field of view.
Slope Distance Between Two Objects
1. Press and hold the distance key.
2. Sight the first object with the pointing circle.
3. Click the azimuth key (> 0.5 s) while holding the LEICA steady.
4. The first object measurement is confirmed (1-P = first point).
5. Sight the second object with the pointing circle.
Figure 3-29 Today Screen Settings Menu Figure 3-30 Settings Screen
Option
6. Release the distance key while holding the LEICA steady.
7. The slope distance between the two objects is displayed.
3.4.2 Power Configuration on the 3900
Horizontal/Vertical Distance Between Two Objects
All handheld computers contain an internal power source that allows the device 1. Click the distance key once, then immediately press and hold it down.
to operate without any external assistance. However, most often the device will
2. Sight the first object with the pointing circle.
be connected to an external battery power supply when in the field for added
support. For this situation, you will be instructed to disable the devices 3. Click the azimuth key (> 0.5 s) while holding the LEICA steady.
automatic “shut off when not in use” feature so as not to experience any 4. The first object measurement is confirmed (1-P = first point).
communication disconnect. If the PFED device “goes to sleep” the device will 5. Sight the second object with the pointing circle.
experience a communications loss. This can be avoided by setting the device to 6. Release the distance key while holding the LEICA steady.
continual on.
7. The horizontal distance appears at the left and the vertical distance at the
right of the field of view.
To prolong the external battery power, you will also be instructed to set the
C.5.2 Azimuth & Inclination Measurements
backlight display to an “off” state when not in use and to set the light level as
low as possible so as not to drain the battery unnecessarily. This “off” state is Azimuth
not the same as the “shut off when not in use” feature mentioned above. It is a
separate control for the light display only. 1. Press and hold the azimuth key.
2. The current azimuth appears.
1. From the main Settings screen, tap the tab at the bottom to access 3. The display updates twice per second.
the handheld system setting options.
4. Sight the object with the pointing circle, then release the azimuth key while
holding the LEICA steady.
2. In the list of available icons, there is an option for battery power ( ). If 5. The most recently measured azimuth is displayed.
you do not see it right away, you may need to scroll down through the list
using the stylus and the scroll bar to the right of the screen. Combined Azimuth & Inclination Angle
3. When you have found this picture icon, tap it once. This will access the 1. Click the azimuth key once, then immediately press and hold it down.
Settings – Power configuration screen (Figure 3-31).
DRAFT 23 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 248 March 16, 2009
Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation PFED User Manual Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual
Button momentarily will cause transfer from the calibration process 4. Make sure the option “On battery power: - Turn off device if not used for” is
back to the original DMC mode. unchecked. To uncheck the option, tap it once. This power option refers to
the internal battery that is part of the R-PDA device.
C.5 LEICA SETUP 5. Make sure the option “On external power: - Turn off device if not used for” is
also unchecked. To uncheck the option, tap it once. This power option
User Manual, Leica Mod B & Leica 23, Operating & Operator Maintenance refers to any external battery power source plugged into the R-PDA device
Instructions, Vectronix, Version 1.5, 2006. (i.e., power plug to wall or external battery pack). When ready tap to exit
this screen.
C.5.1 Distance Measurements
Slope Distance 6. In the list of available icons, there is an option for backlight ( ). If you
do not see it right away, you may need to scroll through the list using the
1. Press and hold the distance key. stylus and the scroll bar to the right of the screen.
2. Sight the pointing circle on the object. 7. When you have found this picture icon, tap it once. This will access the
3. Hold the LEICA steady as you release the distance key. Settings – Backlight configuration screen (Figure 3-32).
4. Read off the distance.
8. If not already shown, tap the tab at the bottom.
5. If "----" appears in the display, the object lies outside the measuring range,
9. Make sure the option “On battery power: - Turn off backlight if device is not
or measuring conditions are poor.
used for” has been checked. To check the option, tap it once.
Multiple Object 10. Then tap to the right of this and select the time option 10 sec. This
selection is recommended for the best power usage, however it is not
1. Click the distance key five times in rapid succession. “Con FIG” appears for required. You may select any time option needed.
a short instant. 11. Next, make sure the option “Turn on backlight when a button is pressed or
2. Click the azimuth key until the “3 dIS” function appears. the screen is tapped” has been checked. To check the option, tap it once.
3. Click the distance key five times in rapid succession to save your settings.
12. Now tap the tab at the bottom to access settings for the screen
4. If the distance key is not correctly clicked five times, the previous settings brightness level (Figure 3-33).
remain unchanged and “Old Conf” is displayed.
5. Sight on the most visible portion of the object.
6. Operate the LEICA as described under ”Slope Distance”.
7. The distance display blinks for a few seconds after a multiple distance
measurement.
8. Click the distance key repeatedly to obtain all the measured distances in
succession.
Combined
1. Hold down both keys simultaneously (or the remote fire button); the current
azimuth appears and updates twice per second.
2. Sight the object with the pointing circle.
3. Release both keys (or the remote fire button) while holding the LEICA
steady.
4. The azimuth appears at the left and the slope distance at the right of the
field of view. Figure 3-31 Settings - Power Figure 3-32 Settings - Backlight
5. The inclination angle is not displayed, but it is sent via the data interface. Configuration Screen Configuration Screen – Internal Power
DRAFT 247 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 24 March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation PFED User Manual
Tilt down
S2 - (not flashing) Hold in this position
Press and release Fire Button
Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on
Turn 90 degrees to right
S3 - - (flashing) Hold level (do not bank – do not tilt)
S3 - - (not flashing) Hold in this position
Press and release Fire Button
Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on
S3 - (flashing) Bank right
Tilt up
S3 - (not flashing) Hold in this position
Press and release Fire Button
Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on
Turn 90 degrees to right
Figure 3-33 Settings - Brightness Level Configuration Screen S3 - (flashing) Bank left
Tilt down
13. Here, you have two (2) options. The left side control, On Battery, is used S3 - (not flashing) Hold in this position
when the system is being run by any battery power source be it the internal Press and release Fire Button
power or external battery pack. The right side control, On Power, is used
Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on
when the device is attached to a constant electrical source such as power
cord. S4 - - (flashing) Hold level (do not bank – do not tilt)
S4 - - (not flashing) Hold in this position
14. It is recommended that the On Battery option be set to the lowest possible
level. To set the backlight, tap and hold down on the slide bar ( ) in the Press and release Fire Button
On Battery level control. Slide this bar down as far as you can while still Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on
being able to read the screen. S4 - (flashing) Bank right
15. To exit the Settings screen tap at the top right. Tilt up
S4 - (not flashing) Hold in this position
3.4.3 System Clock on the 3900 Press and release Fire Button
Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on
The system clock will need to be set to military time so PFED will date/time Turn 90 degrees to right
stamp messages correctly. If the system experiences a power failure or “hard S4 - (flashing) Bank left
reset,” the system date defaults to May 2002 that will need to be corrected to the Tilt down
current date. S4 - (not flashing) Hold in this position
Press and release Fire Button
1. From the main Settings screen, tap the tab at the bottom to access Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on
the handheld system features.
b. If the accuracy figure of merit is > or = 3.1, the display will flash to
indicate an unacceptable compass calibration. If this occurs, the Mark
VII will be disabled from providing compass azimuth data until an
2. In the list of available icons, there is an option for regional settings ( ). acceptable compass calibration is performed. Pushing the Fire Button
If you do not see it right away, you may need to scroll down through the list momentarily will cause a return back to begin the “soft” calibration
using the stylus and the scroll bar to the right of the screen. process again.
3. When you have found this picture icon, tap it once. This will access the
Settings – Regional Settings configuration screen (Figure 3-34). c. If the accuracy figure of merit is < or = 3.0, the display will be constant
to indicate an acceptable compass calibration. Pushing the Fire
DRAFT 25 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 246 March 16, 2009
Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation PFED User Manual Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual
d. If the value is > or = 4, the display will flash to indicate an unacceptable 4. At the bottom of this screen there are five (5) tab options: Region, Number,
compass calibration. If this occurs, the Mark VII will not provide Currency, Time and Date.
azimuth data until an acceptable compass calibration is performed.
Clicking the Fire Button will cause the “hard” calibration process to 5. Tap the tab to access the Settings – Time configuration screen (Figure
begin again. 3-35).
e. If the accuracy value is < or = 3, the display will be constant to indicate
a valid calibration.
f. If you wish to continue with a “soft” calibration, press the Fire Button
momentarily, then continue on to step 6.
g. If a valid calibration was attained and you do not wish to perform a
“soft” calibration, press and hold the Fire Button for more than two
seconds (reticle turns off to indicate two seconds), then release (reticle
will turn back on).
6. Soft Calibration:
a. Face the Mark VII device in any convenient horizontally level direction
[S1 - - (flashing)].
Displayed on screen What to do
S1 - - (flashing) Hold level (do not bank – do not tilt)
S1 - - (not flashing) Hold in this position
Press and release Fire Button Figure 3-34 Settings - Regional Settings Figure 3-35 Settings - Regional Settings
Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on Configuration Screen Time Configuration Screen
S1 - (flashing) Bank left
6. In the Time Style field, tap and scroll down through the options until you
Tilt up
have located the HH:mm:ss selection. Tap on this option to select it. This
S1 - (not flashing) Hold in this position will allow you to set your system time to the military 24-clock. You will see
Press and release Fire Button an example at the top of the screen.
Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on
7. The Time Separator field should have the “:” symbol for separation. As well
S1 - (flashing) Bank right as the AM and PM symbol fields should be set to AM and PM.
Tilt down
S1 - (not flashing) Hold in this position 8. Tap the tab at the bottom of the screen to access the Settings – Date
Press and release Fire Button configuration screen (Figure 3-36).
Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on 9. In the Short Date field, tap and scroll through the options until you have
Turn 90 degrees to right located an appropriate format to set the date. The option typically used is
S2 - - (flashing) Hold level (do not bank – do not tilt) dd-MMM-yy, however this is optional. You will see an example at the top of
S2 - - (not flashing) Hold in this position the screen.
Press and release Fire Button 10. The Date Separator field should be displaying the “-” symbol and the Long
Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on Date field should have the option of ddd, dd MMMM, yyyy displayed.
S2 - (flashing) Bank left 11. When these settings are complete, tap to exit and save your selections.
Tilt up 12. From the available icons on the main Settings screen, tap once on the
S2 - (not flashing) Hold in this position
Press and release Fire Button
Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on Clock ( ) icon (you may need to scroll up to find the picture icon). This
S2 - (flashing) Bank right will access the Settings – Clock screen (Figure 3-37).
DRAFT 245 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 26 March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation PFED User Manual
next character is a number 1, 2, 3, 4 which corresponds to four orthogonal
13. Make sure the Time tab at the bottom is selected. If not, tap the directions where the calibration is to be performed (it is not necessary for the
tab. four directions to be North, East, South, and West, but only that they be at
14. The system clock feature allows the configuration of two (2) separate clocks right angles to each other). To the right of these characters are two symbols
that run simultaneously. A local (Home) clock and an alternate (Visiting) that appear as “ ” shapes, or unused staples (e.g., , , , ). The last
clock. symbol you may see in the display as a dash (-).
: It is recommended that the Home time be set to the option GMT Casablanca so : Either “hard” or “soft” calibration may be performed. The “soft” calibration
PFED will accurately date and time stamp all transmissions. procedure includes the “hard” calibration that will result in the most accurate compass
calibration. To skip “hard” calibration and proceed directly to “soft” calibration, first enter
15. To set the local clock, make sure the Home clock is active by tapping the “hard” calibration mode as noted above, then press and hold the Fire Button for more than
Home button. two seconds (reticle turns off to indicate two seconds), then release (reticle will turn back
16. The first field on the right allows the selection of the Greenwich Mean Time on). Then skip to step 6.
location. Tap to the right and scroll through the available options and
5. Hard Calibration:
select GMT Casablanca.
17. Tap on the Hours in the displayed time, located under the GMT selection, to a. Face the Mark VII device in any convenient horizontally level direction
highlight it. Use and to set the current hours. [H1 - (flashing)].
18. Repeat step 17 to set the Minutes and Seconds to compete the local time b. Then complete the steps in the table below.
setting.
Displayed on screen What to do
19. In the Date field, tap to open a small calendar (Figure 3-38).
H1 - (flashing) Tilt up (do not bank)
H1 - (not flashing) Hold in this position
Press and release Fire Button
Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on
Turn 90 degrees to right
H2 – (flashing) Tilt down (do not bank)
H2 – (not flashing) Hold in this position
Press and release Fire Button
Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on
Turn 90 degrees to right
H3 - (flashing) Tilt up (do not bank)
H3 - (not flashing) Hold in this position
Press and release Fire Button
Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on
Turn 90 degrees to right
H4 – (flashing) Tilt down (do not bank)
Figure 3-36 Settings - Regional Settings Figure 3-37 Settings - Clock H4 – (not flashing) Hold in this position
Date Configuration Screen Configuration Screen Press and release Fire Button
Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on
c. The display will read H---- with the dashes flashing in sequence
indicating that the DMC is calculating the new calibration values. The
display will then show the value calculated on the screen. If the value
is greater than 9 degrees, the compass will automatically start the
“hard” calibration sequence again.
DRAFT 27 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 244 March 16, 2009
Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation PFED User Manual Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual
2. Look through the viewfinder.
3. The system settings will be displayed in sequence on the bottom of the
screen.
4. Eventually, the screen will display CO XX where XX is two numbers.
5. If those numbers are 00, then the Mark VII is set to output data in PLGR
CON format.
6. If those numbers are anything but 00, then continue to the next step.
7. Turn the Mode Select Switch to the OFF position. Figure 3-38 Calendar Configuration Setting
8. Open the battery compartment. 20. Tap and to select the current month.
9. Above and to the left of the battery, there is a plastic microswitch with two
switches on it. 21. Tap on the displayed year ( ) and use available up and down scroll
buttons that appear to select the current year.
10. The leftmost one is for setting the output data type for the Mark VII.
22. Tap the day of the week to select the current weekday.
11. Slide the leftmost switch down towards the letter N printed on the switch.
The rightmost switch is used to select output readings in Degrees or Mils. 23. If you wish to set an alternate time zone, make sure the Visiting clock is
Move the switch to 1 for Degrees or 0 for Mils. active by tapping the Visiting button and continue to the next step. If not,
skip to step 25.
12. Close the battery compartment.
24. To set the alternate clock, repeat steps 16 through 22 choosing the
13. Turn the Mode Select Switch to the SYS position. appropriate time, month and day for the location of the alternate settings.
14. Look through the viewfinder.
25. When all settings are complete, tap . Tap to save these settings.
15. The system settings will be displayed in sequence on the bottom of the
screen. 3.4.4 Power Low Warning on the 3900
16. The screen will display CO 00. This is the protocol used by the Mark VII for
data output for PLGR CON. If the battery power gets critically low, a warning message (Figure 3-39) will
C.4.2 Calibrating the Mark VII notify the operator that the external batteries need to be replaced or the internal
battery may need to be recharged.
: The magnetic field around the Mark VII Laser is affected by the battery. The
battery must be stabilized by firing the laser prior to performing compass calibration.
Therefore, before performing a compass calibration, switch the Mark VII Laser to LST or
FST and fire the laser by ranging three times on any convenient target or into the air (do : Do not allow the battery power to be completely extinguished or all stored
not fire the laser with the lens cover on, damage to the laser receiver may result). After data and settings will be lost. If the power low message does appear, battery power should
ranging, switch back to the DMC mode and proceed with compass calibration as described be replaced immediately.
below. The above stabilization of the battery must be performed whenever the battery is
replaced, or if the battery compartment is opened for any reason, since the battery may
rotate when opening or closing the battery compartment door. It is recommended that the
ranging before calibration process be performed whenever compass calibration is done.
: If power is completely lost, a re-initialization process will be needed to rebuild the
1. Remove the lens cover. handheld. This will include the installation of the PFED application software, the
configuration of all time, volume and battery power usage settings as well as all PFED
2. Make sure the Mode Select Switch is set to DMC. The display should show
database stored information such as unit list, user and device settings, etc (refer to sections
the azimuth or elevation data. 3.2, 3.3, and 3.4.1 through 3.4.3).
3. Press and hold the Fire Button for more than two seconds (reticle turns off
to indicate two seconds), then release (reticle will turn back on).
4. The 5 digit display will now show two characters and two symbols. The left
most symbol will be either an “H” (hard) or “S” (soft) to indicate the
calibration mode (Should be “H” when first entering calibration mode). The
DRAFT 243 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 28 March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation PFED User Manual
: There are no selective fields on this page. The information displayed is used for
navigation only.
7. Line 1 (left corner) is the waypoint number you are currently navigating
to.Line 1 (right corner) is the position accuracy.
8. Line 2 is your current heading in degrees (TRK 020.5 deg magnetic).
9. Line 3 is the direct azimuth from your current position to the waypoint. Line
Figure 3-39 Battery Low warning Message
3 (right corner) is your ground speed.
1. When you receive this power low message, the batteries located in the 10. Line 4 is your left/right steering angle. The steering angle lets you know
PFED battery pack compartment (Figure 2-9) will need to be replaced. how much your heading is off from the azimuth (The difference between
2. If the external batteries cannot be immediately replaced, that may cause the Line 2 and Line 3).
PFED unit to shut down, the unit may require re-initialization.
3. To re-initialize the device, perform a screen alignment process by tapping
: If your TRK (line 2) is within 10 degrees or less from the azimuth this means you
and holding the stylus down in the center of the five (5) crosshairs that are on course. However, one must be outside and moving for this to be accurate.
appear on the screen.
4. When prompted, choose a time zone for setting the devices system clock. 11. Press the down arrow key to access page3of navigation.
For further information on setting the system time, refer to section 3.4.3.
5. Also, complete a full installation of the PFED application software and
: The third page includes: range, time to go, elevation difference and minimum miss
reconfigure all system and application settings as noted in the warning
difference. No data is available (n/a) for time to go and minimum miss distance if you’re not
stated above. moving.
12. Line 1 is the range to the waypoint. As you move toward the waypoint the
: The re-initialization process may also need to be performed if the handheld device range should decrease. If not you’re going the wrong way.
experiences a “hard reset” operation (i.e., using the reset button found at the bottom of the
13. Line 2 represents the total time it will take you to reach the waypoint (hours,
device).
minutes: and seconds).
14. Line 3 is the difference in elevation (current position minus waypoint
3.5 BLUETOOTH MODE (3900 MODEL) altitude).
15. Line 4 is the minimum miss difference (MMD). Normally it is identical to
The following section shows the Bluetooth Mode for the 3900 model. Refer to your range providing you’re on course.
section 3.12 for instructions for the 5700 model.
C.4 MARK VII
1. To access the Bluetooth feature, tap the black wireless symbol ( ) located
at the bottom right of the main Today screen (Figure 3-40). Reference for section C.4: Operation and Maintenance Manual Mark VII
2. From the menu select the Turn Radio On option. This will make Bluetooth Eyesafe Miniature Laser Target Locator (MFT60000-17), Litton Laser Systems,
active and is indicated by a white wireless symbol ( ). August 2002.
3. To connect to other wireless devices, tap the white wireless symbol and C.4.1 Setting the data output to PLGR CON on the MarkVII LRF
select the Bluetooth Manager option from the menu. This will display the
Manager screen (Figure 3-41). To enable communications between a Mark VII laser range finder and the PFED
4. To find other active devices, tap Search at the bottom of the screen. This application, the Mark VII must be setup to output data in the PLGR CON
will display a message requesting if you would like to search now. Tap format. The following steps describe how to verify that the Mark VII is setup
to start the process (Figure 3-43). for PLGR CON output.
1. Turn the Mode Select Switch to the SYS position.
DRAFT 29 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 242 March 16, 2009
Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation PFED User Manual Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual
Line 1 - Time and Time Error 5. When the search is complete, the screen will display all devices that it has
Line 2 - Date, Day of the Week found (Figure 3-43), if any.
Line 3 - Track Heading
Line 4 - Ground Speed 6. When processing is complete, tap then to exit the Manager screen.
C.3.5 Track / Search Information
1. Press the POS key to obtain information on the satellite vehicle that the
PLGR is tracking and searching.
: This display page contains the satellite tracking data and almanac age.
Line 1 - Satellite Track/Search Table Heading
Line 2 - Satellite identifier for each satellite tracked or searched for. IDs to the
left of the slash / are satellites tracked. IDs to the right of the slash are satellites searched
for.
Example; Line 2 -- 07 17 24 31 / 01 Tracking 4 satellites and Searching for 1.
Example; Line 2 -- 07 17 24 / 31 01 Tracking 3 satellites and searching for 2.
Line 3 - Shows the number of visible satellites, the number of visible satellites
that are in good health.
Line 4 - Shows the age of the almanac. The age can be from 1 to 99.
Figure 3-40 Today Screen Figure 3-41 Bluetooth Manager Screen
: The almanac provides the PLGR with the location of the satellites. A 1 day
almanac is the most current.
C.3.6 How To Navigate
1. There are four navigating modes that may be accessed and selected.
However, we will only discuss one which is 2D FAST. This mode maybe
used for land or sea navigation.
2. Press the NAV key once to display the Nav menu page.
3. Press the right arrow key to highlight the Nav mode of operation. Now use
the down arrow key to select the various mode of operation (Slow, 2D Fast,
3D Fast and Custom). Please select 2D Fast.
4. Press the right arrow key to highlight the Navigation method field of
operation. Now use the down arrow key to see the various methods of
navigation (Direct, CRS to, CRS FROM). Please select Direct.
: Direct is used to navigate from your current position directly to the waypoint. Not Figure 3-42 Searching For Devices Figure 3-43 Devices Found
taking obstacles into consideration.
5. Now press the right arrow key to highlight the waypoint number field. Use
3.6 EXTERNAL BUTTONS (3900 MODEL)
the up or down arrow key to select waypoint number 2. Now press the right
arrow key twice. The following section shows the External Buttons for the AN/PSG-10 (V)2
6. Press the down arrow key to change the Waypoint page. w/PPS, AN/PSG-10 (V)3 w/SAASM, or the AN/PSG-10 (V)1 handheld devices.
Refer to section 3.12 for instructions for the 5700 models.
DRAFT 241 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 30 March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation PFED User Manual
When the PFED application is active on the handheld, the four (4) external C.3.1 Turning on the PLGR
buttons found on the device (Figure 3-44), will be programmed for a specific 1. Press the ON BRT key to turn the receiver on. A self test begins
use. They become access buttons for CFF mission templates and Check Firing immediately and upon completion, the results are displayed. The “No
(refer to section 4.4.11 Fire Support Setup – CFF Templates). Faults” message indicates the unit is functioning properly.
Application : FIX and OLD will be displayed on the first line every time the set is turned on and
Buttons is not connected to external or vehicle power. If connected to external or vehicle power the
default will be CONT OLD.
Figure 3-44 PFED Handheld Computer External Buttons : The position initially displayed is “OLD” information until the receiver collects and
calculates satellite data and displays the current position known as the “First Fix”.
3.7 INITIAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION (5700 MODEL) C.3.2 Mode Selection
1. Press the MENU key once.
The following section shows the Initial System Installation for the 5700 models. 2. Use the right arrow key to move the flashing cursor to the SETUP field.
3. Press the down arrow key to activate the SETUP function.
The following procedures are performed when installing the PFED application
on either a new handheld device that does not yet contain any software or
configuration settings, or, when an existing device needs to be completely : Line 1 will display SETUP MODE: FIX. Line 2 and 3 provides a brief explanation
reconfigured due to a memory loss or damage. of each Mode selected. Line 4 displays the Satellite Vehicle (SV) type.
4. Press the right arrow key once to highlight the FIX mode of operation.
: Fix mode means the PLGR acquires satellites and determines the present
: The instructions in section 3.7 are only used by System Administrators for position. Then automatically changes to standby (STBY) mode, after the position is
initial PFED installation and setup. They are not recommended for use by field operators. determined.
Unless an operator is directly instructed by an Administrator to perform such a function,
there should be no need to perform a Hard Reset and a Re-Installation of the system while 5. Press the up arrow key to change the mode of operation to CONT.
in the field.
6. Press the right arrow key once to highlight SV-TYPE: all-Y
3.7.1 Hard Reset Using External Buttons 7. Press the right arrow key once to obtain the change page symbol next to the
P.
: All-Y tells the PLGR to track only Y-code signals when crypto keys are loaded.
: The following procedure should only be used as a “Last Resort.” The Mixed allows the PLGR to track any type of satellite signal.
operator should access the Hard Reset application from the Start menu (refer to section
3.7.1).
C.3.3 How to Obtain Position, Time and Tracking Information
1. Press the POS key to display the position page.
1. If not already on, power the handheld on by pressing the small round button
at the top right-hand corner of the device (Figure 3-45). C.3.4 To Obtain Dynamic Information
2. Locate the stylus (Figure 3-46). 1. Press the POS key to select page # 2.
: This display contains dynamic information fields:
DRAFT 31 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 240 March 16, 2009
Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation PFED User Manual Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual
3. Then locate the reset button (a recessed button) found on the front of the
APPENDIX C device at the bottom left, and the two round operation buttons to the right
(Figure 3-47).
PERIPHERAL HARDWARE SETUP & OPERATION
C.1 INTRODUCTION
Power
This appendix describes setup procedures for peripheral devices that connect to Button
Stylus
the PFED system, including GPS, LRF and Communications devices.
C.2 SINCGARS ASIP Figure 3-45 Device Power Button
Figure 3-46 Stylus Pen
The SINCGARS ASIP radio connected to your PFED and the destination radio
must be configured with the same frequencies, security mode, and data rate
Reset
(4800). Button
Top Right
Operation Button
1. If the radios have been filled with a frequency set and crypto, simply turn the
SINCGARS position switch from Standby to RXMT and proceed to step 7.
If the radio has not been previously programmed, continue with step 2.
Bottom Right
Operation Button
: Steps 2-6 provide example settings. Your actual radio parameters are dependent
upon the rest of your communications net. Figure 3-47 Hard Rest Buttons
2. Turn the SINCGARS position switch to REM. 4. Now perform a “hard reset” by first pressing the stylus into the reset button
3. With the radio handset, set the radio to Single Channel (SC), power level to with your left hand. While holding down the stylus with the left hand, use
Medium (M), and the channel to 1. two (2) fingers of your right hand to press and hold the two round operation
buttons on the right. Then immediately release the stylus from the reset
4. Turn the SINCGARS position switch to LD. button, and continue to hold the two operation buttons for up to 30 seconds.
5. Press the FREQ button followed by the CLR button. Enter the 3-digit 5. After 30 seconds release both operation buttons and the system will perform
frequency provided by the signal officer. the reset. Wait a few seconds until you see the Welcome screen (Figure
6. Press the STO button to store this new frequency for channel 1. 3-48).
7. On your SINCGARS keypad, press the Data button. If 4800 appears on the
front display of the radio, continue to the next step. Otherwise, press the
CHG button repeatedly until 4800 appears.
8. Turn the SINCGARS position switch from LD to SQ ON.
C.3 PLGR
Reference for section C.3: 46 EN BN Smart Book (v1)[1]-PLGR Fundamentals
dated July 1, 2004. The following section applies when operating a device other
than the AN/PSG-10 (V)2 w/PPS or AN/PSG-10 (V)3 w/SAASM.
DRAFT 239 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 32 March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual Appendix B – Troubleshooting PFED User Manual
Figure 3-48 Handheld Welcome Screen Figure B-4 Align Screen
6. Once the handheld Welcome screen appears, follow the instructions on the 5. On the Align screen tap to start the process.
screen to complete the reset process (refer to section 3.7.3).
6. Perform a screen alignment process by tapping the stylus in the center of
3.7.2 Hard Reset Using Reset Application on the 5700 the five (5) crosshairs that appear on the screen. If the alignment does not
work the first time, the Align screen will reappear asking you to repeat the
process. Make sure you tap in the very center of the crosshairs.
1. On the devices main Today screen, tap in the Title bar and select
Reset. 7. The system will return you to the initial Align screen when the process is
complete. To exit this screen, tap in the top right corner.
2. Tap to begin the hard reset process. Then follow the instructions
in section 3.7.3. 8. Then tap in the top right corner to return to the Today screen.
3.7.3 Reset Process on the 5700 B.8 PFED BLUETOOTH CONNECTION
1. The Welcome screen for Mobile 6 will display and ask that you tap the 1.
screen to continue. Go ahead and tap the screen once to display the Align
screen (Figure 3-50).
2. Perform a screen alignment process by tapping the stylus in the center of
the five (5) crosshairs that appear on the screen. If the alignment does not
work the first time, the Alignment screen will reappear asking you to repeat
the process. Make sure you tap in the very center of the crosshairs.
3. When the alignment process is complete, an informational screen will
appear stating “This device includes the Worldwide English language
version of Microsoft Windows Mobile.” To pass this screen tap .
4. Next you will see a series of color patterns flash, blink and rotate on the
screen. When it’s complete it will ask “Did you see the screen colors and
patterns change?” Tap the appropriate button to exit this screen.
5. Next you will see another crosshair screen. The system wil ask you to tap in
the center of each crosshair in each corner of the screen. Each time you tap
a crosshair, the crosshair will change and colorize.
DRAFT 33 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 238 March 16, 2009
Appendix B – Troubleshooting PFED User Manual Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual
6. The next screen will state a question, “Did you hear the device beep?” Wait
a few seconds to hear a sound from the device. After a few seconds tap the
appropriate button for the result.
7. The next test will show three statements with a color bar. For each of the
three statements, tap the appropriate button indicating what the color bar is
doing at that time (i.e., flashing, always one, etc).
8. Lastly, the final test screen will process through a series of operation button
presses (Figure 3-49). If you wish to pass this screen, you may tap the Skip
Figure B-3 Data Entry Options Menu Button Test button. Otherwise tap the appropriate buttons as instructed.
Data Entry Button Keys; Right,
Menu Button Down, Left and Up Application
Button 3
Application
Button 2 Enter Button
Key
Figure B-2 Data Entry Option Menu Application Application
Button Button 1 Button 4
Figure 3-49 Operation Button Test
B.7 CALIBRATING THE PFED
9. Once you have completed this last testing screen, the system will display
the Today screen (Figure 3-51).
1. On the devices main Today screen, tap found at the top of the screen
in the Title bar.
2. Tap the Settings menu option.
3. From the Settings screen, tap the tab at the bottom.
4. In the list of available icons, tap the Screen icon ( ) to access the
Align screen (Figure B-4).
Figure 3-50 Stylus Alignment Screen Figure 3-51 Today Screen
3.7.4 Application Installation on the 5700
1. Insert the small SD memory card into the top of the handheld device. Make
sure the SD memory card is seated all the way into the slot.
DRAFT 237 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 34 March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual Appendix B – Troubleshooting PFED User Manual
2. To begin the installation process, first copy the needed files to the handheld The settings you have set in your PFED do not seem to be saved
device. On the devices main Today screen, tap found at the top of when you exit Setup.
the screen in the Title bar and select the Programs item. Then tap the File
Explorer program icon. This will display the File Explorer screen.
Did you tap located at the bottom of the PFED setup screen to save your
3. Tap found at the right of the My Documents title. Then select My Device changes? Tapping or located in the upper right-hand corner will cancel
from the drop-down.
any changes you have made.
4. From the displayed list, tap the Storage Card option.
5. Tap the file name InstallDLL.cab. This will display a screen asking where The application keypad is not displaying the basic keyboard or is
you would like to copy the files. not functioning properly.
6. Make sure the Device radio button is selected. Then click Install at the
bottom of the screen. If your system keypad is not displaying the basic keyboard keys, you may have
7. Once the copy process has been completed, install the application on the accessed an alternate data entry form.
device. Return to the devices Today screen and tap , select the
Programs, tap File Explorer icon.
8. Then tap at the top and select My Device>Program Files>InstallCab.
Then tap the file name Install. The installation process will then begin by
displaying the DoD Install Warning screen (Figure 3-52).
9. Tap . The system will then display a hard reset prompt (Figure
3-53). Figure B-1 Keyboard
10. Tap at the top right of the window. Due to the critical nature of the information contained and transmitted through
a. If the system requests a hard reset, perform steps 3 through 12 in the PFED application, it is required that the Keypad (Figure B-1) feature be used
section 3.7.1 to hard reset the device. at all times.
b. You may need to repeat the steps in this section to begin the 1. If you find yourself in an entry form other than the Keyboard feature, as
installation process again.
displayed above, tap shown in the very bottom right of the screen (Figure
c. Once the reset has completed, continue to step 8 below to complete B-2).
the process.
2. This will display an option menu (Figure B-3). To return to the Keyboard
11. The system will then install the application and all needed tools. If you function, tap the menu option Keyboard.
watch the title bar area, it will display the items it is installing.
12. When the system has installed all of the tools and software, the Date/Time
Entry screen will display (Figure 3-54). Enter the current date and time here
and tap when finished.
DRAFT 35 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 236 March 16, 2009
Appendix B – Troubleshooting PFED User Manual Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual
6. Replace the battery in the Leica.
7. Replace the battery compartment cover and screw back on.
8. On the PFED, delete the Leica device from the Device Setup screen.
9. Exit PFED.
10. Soft reset the handheld.
11. Follow the steps for setting up a Leica with Bluetooth (refer to section
5.1.1.1 Configuring Devices step 8).
12. If you initially get “bt fail” on the first laze, relaze again.
13. If you see “bt fail” again:
a. Exit PFED
b. Soft reset the device
c. Laze again.
14. If you still get “bt fail”, start from step 3 above and be sure to wait for 15
seconds (step c) after removing the battery. Figure 3-52 DoD Install Warning Screen Figure 3-53 Hard Reset Prompt
B.6 PFED COMPUTER
This section lists possible solutions for problems encountered with the PFED
handheld computer.
Tapping the screen doesn’t seem to work or produces unexpected
results.
1. Restart the PFED application, if possible.
2. Reset the handheld using your stylus. The reset button is located on the
bottom (or sometimes the side) of the computer.
3. If the screen responds, but the pen alignment seems to be off, you may
need to recalibrate the handheld. Pen calibration is accessible through the
Start/Settings/System Tab/Screen menu option.
I cannot access the PFED application. It does not appear in the Figure 3-54 Date/Time Entry Screen
Start menu.
13. The system will then process through the PointSec Security installation
process. From here, follow the instructions found in section 3.7.5.
If the handheld computer loses power abnormally, it sometimes erases all stored
information (including applications) from memory. If this occurs, the PFED 3.7.5 PointSec Installation or System Recovery on the 5700
software must be reloaded (refer to section 3.2 Initial System Installation for the
1. When date/time entry is complete the system will start the PointSec
reload process).
installation process (Figure 3-55). Tap in the top right hand corner to
start the process.
2. The next screen to appear will be the PointSec User ID screen (Figure
3-56). On this screen enter an ID for configuring the PointSec security
software. When ready, tap in the top right hand corner.
DRAFT 235 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 36 March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual Appendix B – Troubleshooting PFED User Manual
3. On the next security screen (Figure 3-57), enter the same password in both a. On the PLGR, press the Menu button. Select the Setup menu by
the PIN and Confirm fields. It is recommended that the operator use their pressing the left and right directional arrows until Setup begins
AKO password so it is easily remembered. When complete, tap in the blinking.
top right hand corner. b. Press the up and down directional arrows to scroll through the various
setup screens. Stop at the Setup I/O screen.
c. Press the right directional arrow until the word following SERIAL
begins to blink. This word will either be Standard, Instrum or Custom.
Push the down arrow button until Standard is selected.
d. Setting the serial connection to Standard allows the PFED software to
program the PLGR automatically. This is done on startup when the
PLGR is connected and a COM port is enabled for the PLGR.
e. Press the POS button to go back the main position display.
f. Restart the PFED software to make sure the PLGR is initialized.
The PLGR indicates an old position and never initializes to my
actual location.
1. Has it been longer than 30 minutes? The first time you turn your GPS on in
a new area, it can take up to 30 minutes to acquire satellites. After this first
initialization, it should not take longer than two (2) minutes to locate you.
Figure 3-55 PointSec Installation Process Figure 3-56 PointSec User ID
2. Check that the cable between the external GPS antenna and the PLGR is
intact and connected.
3. Is the GPS antenna properly mounted? It should be flat (horizontal) with a
clear view of the horizon.
4. Does the antenna have a clear view of the horizon? If you are under a
shelter, in a hide, or underneath trees (especially pine trees), you may not
be able to receive a GPS signal. Try to move, or extend your antenna, to a
location where your GPS antenna can receive signals from the GPS
satellites.
B.5 LEICA BLUETOOTH CONNECTION FAILURE
If PFED is not receiving any data when using a Bluetooth connection:
1. Verify that you have a Bluetooth enabled build of PFED:
a. Check the About screen and verify that the build does not have “No
BT” after it.
Figure 3-57 PointSec Security PIN Setup 2. Verify that you have set up the Leica within PFED correctly with the correct
Bluetooth address.
3. Using a coin or a screwdriver, remove the battery compartment cover on the
Leica.
: To display the Rules for a password (Figure 3-58), tap the button. Tap
4. Remove the battery from the Leica.
in the top right hand corner of this screen to exit the rules.
5. Wait at least 15 seconds.
DRAFT 37 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 234 March 16, 2009
Appendix B – Troubleshooting PFED User Manual Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual
Parity = None 4. The device will then display a message stating that it will perform a soft
reboot (Figure 3-59). Tap in the top right hand corner once more to
e. Change information as necessary then tap . begin the reboot process.
5. Once the handheld has completed the soft boot, the Password entry screen
f. Tap on the PLGR item in the list then tap . This will initiate the
will display (Figure 3-60). Using the available keypad, enter the same
PLGR device and turn the indicator “green” ( ).
password as in step 3. When complete, tap in the top right hand
2. Add a Mark VII LRF to your device list. corner.
a. At the top, above Sensors tap .
b. Tap on the Mark VII option. This will be added to the Sensors list.
c. Tap on the Mark VII item in the list then tap .
d. When using the serial communication:
Port Num = COM1
Baud Rate = 4800
Stop Bits = 1
Flow Control = None
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
e. Tap the first grey box in the Range Gate field and using the available
keypad, enter the beginning range limitation for the LRF device. When
entered, tap .
f. Tap the second grey box in the Range Gate field and using the Figure 3-58 PointSec Password Rules Figure 3-59 PointSec Restart Message
available keypad, enter the ending range limitation for the LRF device.
When entered, tap .
g. Change information as necessary then tap .
h. Tap on the Mark VII item in the Sensors list then tap .
3. Save all settings by tapping until you have returned to the Main
PFED screen.
4. Exit PFED by tapping and Exit.
5. If the system prompted you to reboot the handheld to enable the
communications network, perform a Soft Reset and restart PFED.
B.4.2 PLGR Verification
The following section applies when operating a device other than the AN/PSG-
10 (V)2 w/PPS or AN/PSG-10 (V)3 w/SAASM.
Figure 3-60 PointSec Password Prompt
1. Verify the PLGR settings:
6. The installation is now complete and the Today screen will appear. Based
on the version you have installed, a different background photo or theme
(Figure 3-61, Figure 3-62, Figure 3-63) will be shown.
DRAFT 233 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 38 March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual Appendix B – Troubleshooting PFED User Manual
The AFATDS box displays a communications error that says
“Unknown Recipient.”
On the PFED User Info screen make sure that your Unit and URN entries
correspond to what AFATDS expects on your Handheld.
B.4 GPS
This section lists possible solutions for problems encountered with GPS location
or connectivity.
The position display on the Main PFED screen is not updating.
1. Check that the PLGR batteries are good and that it is powered on.
2. Check to see if the cable leading from the GPS is intact and connected. If it
is not connected, re-attach.
Figure 3-61 Today Screen Version Figure 3-62 Today Screen Version
1.1 2.0 3. Does the PLGR display indicate an old position? If so, it is possible that the
PFED display is being updated, but the position is old and has not changed.
4. Check the PFED Communications Setup. You can access this screen by
tapping from the Main PFED screen then tap Devices.
a. Is PLGR in your list of sensors? If no, then add PLGR and tap .
b. Select PLGR from the sensors list and tap . Verify that all
configuration settings are accurate. Tap to return to the setup
screen.
5. If any of the above settings are incorrect, correct them and tap
located at the bottom of the setup screen.
B.4.1 Configuring GPS Devices on PFED
1. Add a PLGR to your device list.
Figure 3-63 Today Screen Version 3.0 a. Above the Sensors section, tap .
b. Tap on the PLGR option. This will be added to the Sensors list.
3.8 RESETTING THE DEVICE (5700 MODEL)
c. Tap on the PLGR item in the list then tap .
The following section shows the Initial System Installation for the 5700 models. d. Check to make sure all connection information is set correctly:
Port Num = COM1
Resetting the handheld is very much like re-booting a desktop computer. This is Baud Rate = 9600
done using the stylus and the external Reset button found at the bottom Stop Bits = 1
underside of the device. Flow Control = None
Data Bits = 8
DRAFT 39 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 232 March 16, 2009
Appendix B – Troubleshooting PFED User Manual Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual
3.8.1 Soft Reset on the 5700
APPENDIX B 1. Using the reset button on the front of the device (Figure 3-47), press the tip
TROUBLESHOOTING of the stylus very lightly until the Welcome screen appears.
2. This will re-boot the device and process a new login using the PointSec
B.1 INTRODUCTION login screen.
3. Using the available keypad, enter the same password created when the
The troubleshooting guide that follows is just that, a guide. It covers the most system was first installed. When complete, tap in the top right hand
common system problems and their solutions. Problems or solutions not corner.
covered in this manual should be addressed by technical personnel only.
3.9 HANDHELD DEVICE SETTINGS (5700 MODEL)
B.2 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING TECHNIQUES
The following section shows the Initial System Installation for the 5700 models.
Troubleshooting should be done using a process of elimination. In general,
troubleshooting involves following, in order, the steps below. 3.9.1 Access System Setting Options on the 5700
1. Check your hardware. 1. Using the stylus, tap .
a. Check the power source. Are your batteries good? Is the power 2. To access the handheld power and backlight options, tap the Settings
connected? menu option (Figure 3-64).
b. Check all cable connections. Are the connectors fitted tightly? 3. This will display the main Settings screen that contains three (3) tab options
at the bottom (Figure 3-65): Personal, System, and Connections.
2. Check your equipment settings. Is the function you are trying to use
enabled? Refer to the appropriate PFED component outline for proper
configuration instructions.
3. Restart effected components. If everything is set up properly, restarting
hardware and/or software is sometimes the quickest way to restore proper
operation.
When experiencing problems with data communications, you may need to
coordinate your troubleshooting efforts with FDC personnel because the
problem may not be yours. However, you should first eliminate possible
problems with your equipment.
The following sections list possible solutions for a number of problems that you
may encounter while using the PFED system in the field. Proceed through the
list of possible solutions. If after completing the list you still are having system
trouble, please contact technical support.
B.3 DATA COMMUNICATIONS Figure 3-64 Today Screen Settings Menu Figure 3-65 Settings Screen
Option
This section lists possible solutions for problems encountered with sending or
3.9.2 Power Configuration on the 5700
receiving messages using the PFED system.
All handheld computers contain an internal power source that allows the device
to operate without any external assistance. However, most often the device will
DRAFT 231 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 40 March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual Appendix A - Acronyms PFED User Manual
be connected to an external battery power supply when in the field for added OBCO Observer Coordinates
support. For this situation, you will be instructed to disable the devices PFED Pocket-sized Forward Entry Device
automatic “shut off when not in use” feature so as not to experience any PLGR Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver
communication disconnect. If the PFED device “goes to sleep” the device will PM BC Project Manager, Battle and Command
experience a communications loss. This can be avoided by setting the device to PTM Plain Text Message
continual on. RFA Restrictive Fire Area
RFL Restrictive Fire Line
To prolong the external battery power, you will also be instructed to set the R-PDA Rugged - Personal Digital Assistant
backlight display to an “off” state when not in use and to set the light level as SALUTE Size Activity Location Unit Time Equipment
low as possible so as not to drain the battery unnecessarily. This “off” state is SATCOM Satellite Communication
not the same as the “shut off when not in use” feature mentioned above. It is a SINCGARS ASIP Single Channel Ground Airborne Radio System Advanced
separate control for the light display only. Systems Improvement Program
SLP Sensor Link Protocol
1. From the main Settings screen, tap the tab at the bottom to access SMDBL Space & Missile Defense Battle Lab
the handheld system setting options. TACFIRE Tactical Fire
TACSOP Tactical Standard Operating Procedures
TOF Time Of Flight
2. In the list of available icons, there is an option for battery power ( ). If TOT Time On Target
you do not see it right away, you may need to scroll down through the list URN Unit Reference Number
using the stylus and the scroll bar to the right of the screen. UTM Universal Transverse Mercator
3. When you have found this picture icon, tap it once. This will access the ZOR Zone Of Responsibility
Settings – Power configuration screen (Figure 3-66).
4. Next tap the at the bottom. Under this tab make sure the option
“On battery power: - Turn off device if not used for” is unchecked. To
uncheck the option, tap it once. This power option refers to the internal
battery that is part of the R-PDA device.
5. Make sure the option “On external power: - Turn off device if not used for” is
also unchecked. To uncheck the option, tap it once. This power option
refers to any external battery power source plugged into the R-PDA device
(i.e., power plug to wall or external battery pack). When ready tap to exit
this screen.
6. In the list of available icons, there is an option for backlight ( ). If you
do not see it right away, you may need to scroll through the list using the
stylus and the scroll bar to the right of the screen.
7. When you have found this picture icon, tap it once. This will access the
Settings – Backlight configuration screen (Figure 3-67).
8. If not already shown, tap the tab at the bottom.
9. Make sure the option “Turn off backlight if device is not used for” has been
checked. To check the option, tap it once.
DRAFT 41 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 230 March 16, 2009
Appendix A - Acronyms PFED User Manual Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual
10. Then tap to the right of this and select the time option 10 sec. This
APPENDIX A selection is recommended for the best power usage, however it is not
required. You may select any time option needed.
ACRONYMS 11. Next, make sure the option “Turn on backlight when a button is pressed or
the screen is tapped” has been checked. To check the option, tap it once.
A.1 ACRONYM LIST
12. Now tap the tab at the bottom to access settings for the screen
AF Adjust Fire brightness level (Figure 3-68).
AFATDS Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System
ATI Artillery Target Information
BDA Battle Damage Assessment
CAS Close Air Support
CFF Call for Fire
CFL Coordinated Fire Line
DARPA Department of the Army Research Project Agency
DISA Defense Information System Agency
DNL Do Not Load
EOM End Of Mission
FA Field Artillery
FDC Fire Direction Center
FED Forward Entry Device
FFE Fire for Effect
FO Forward Observer
FOM Figure Of Merit
Figure 3-66 Settings - Power Figure 3-67 Settings - Backlight
FOS Forward Observer System
Configuration Screen Configuration Screen – Internal Power
FPF Final Protective Fire
FSCL Fire Support Coordination Line
FSCM Fire Support Coordination Measures
FiST Fire Support Officer/Element/Team
GPS Global Positioning System
HF High Frequency
HOB Height of Burst
HST Helicopter Support Team
IP Initial Point
LFED Lightweight Forward Entry Device
LRF Laser Range Finder
MEDEVAC Medical Evacuation
MGRS Military Grid Reference System
MOI Messages Of Interest
MTO Message to Observer
NAD Network Access Delay
NBC Nuclear Biological Chemical Figure 3-68 Settings - Brightness Level Configuration Screen
NFA No Fire Area
DRAFT 229 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 42 March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual Chapter 9 - Security PFED User Manual
13. Here, you have two (2) options. The top control, Battery Power, is used
3. If you wish to cancel this activation, tap at the top right hand corner of
when the system is being run by any battery power source be it the internal
this message window.
power or external battery pack. The bottom control, External Power, is used
when the device is attached to a constant electrical source such as power
cord.
9.3.2 Deactivating Duress Mode
14. It is recommended that the Battery Power option be set to the lowest 1. If the PFED unit has been placed in duress mode, you will need to access
the About screen to deactivate it. To quickly access the PFED About
possible level. To set the backlight, tap and hold down on the slider ( ) in screen, turn the device’s power off then on again.
the Battery Power level control. Slide this bar to the left as far as you can
while still being able to read the screen. 2. Or, tap on the Main PFED screen then tap About.
15. To exit the Settings screen tap at the top right. 3. Tap in the top right hand corner once. A message window will display
(Figure 9-3) for confirmation of deactivating duress mode.
3.9.3 System Clock on the 5700
The system clock will need to be set to military time so PFED will date/time
stamp messages correctly. If the system experiences a power failure or “hard
reset,” the system date defaults to May 2002 that will need to be corrected to the
current date.
1. From the main Settings screen, tap the tab at the bottom to access Figure 9-3 Duress Mode Deactivation Confirmation
the handheld system setting options.
4. Tap in the top right hand corner of this message box to confirm the
deactivation request. The system will now exit duress mode and function
2. In the list of available icons, there is an option for regional settings ( ). normally.
If you do not see it right away, you may need to scroll down through the list
using the stylus and the scroll bar to the right of the screen.
: Be aware that address information was removed at the time duress mode was
3. When you have found this picture icon, tap it once. This will access the initiated. This information must be re-entered before any message processing takes place.
Settings – Regional Settings configuration screen (Figure 3-69).
4. At the bottom of this screen there are five (5) tab options: Region, Number, 5. If you wish to continue the duress mode, tap in the center of this
Currency, Time and Date. message window.
5. Tap the tab to access the Settings – Time configuration screen
(Figure 3-70).
DRAFT 43 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 228 March 16, 2009
Chapter 9 - Security PFED User Manual Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual
2. Using the available keypad, enter your existing password in the Old
Password field.
3. Enter your new password in both the New Password and Confirm New
Password fields.
4. When complete, tap . You will receive one of three messages.
a. If you receive a message stating “Old password is incorrect,” tap
and try entering your Old Password again.
b. If you receive a message stating “New Password and Confirm New
Password differ,” tap and try entering your New Password
again in both fields.
c. If you receive a message stating “Your password has been changed,”
tap and return to the Main PFED screen.
9.3 DURESS MODE Figure 3-69 Settings - Regional Settings Figure 3-70 Settings - Regional Settings
Configuration Screen Time Configuration Screen
Each time the PFED application is started, the About screen will automatically 6. In the Time Style field, tap and scroll down through the options until you
appear. This will allow the operator to quickly activate and/or deactivate the have located the HH:mm:ss selection. Tap on this option to select it. This
duress mode, if needed. When duress mode is initiated, all databases will be will allow you to set your system time to the military 24-clock. You will see
purged except for the primary address and the operator’s address. These an example at the top of the screen.
addresses will be used to send out a plain text message. This message will alert 7. The Time Separator field should have the “:” symbol for separation. As well
the primary on the network that the PFED operator is in duress mode. This as the AM and PM symbol fields should be set to AM and PM.
message will include the operator’s current location, and will be transmitted at 5
minute intervals or the time that has been set in the Auto Positioning Report. 8. Tap the tab at the bottom of the screen to access the Settings – Date
configuration screen (Figure 3-71).
9.3.1 Activating Duress Mode 9. In the Short Date field, tap and scroll through the options until you have
located an appropriate format to set the date. The option typically used is
1. Once the PFED application has been accessed the About screen will dd-MMM-yy, however this is optional. You will see an example at the top of
appear. Tap in the top right hand corner once. A message window will the screen.
display (Figure 9-2) for confirmation of the duress mode. 10. The Date Separator field should be displaying the “-” symbol and the Long
Date field should have the option of ddd, dd MMMM, yyyy displayed.
11. When these settings are complete, tap to exit and save your selections.
12. From the available icons on the main Settings screen, tap once on the
Clock & Alarms ( ) icon (you may need to scroll up to find the picture
Figure 9-2 Duress Mode Activation Confirmation icon). This will access the Settings – Clock & Alarms screen (Figure 3-72).
2. Tap in this message box to activate duress mode. The system 13. Make sure the Time tab at the bottom is selected. If not, tap the tab.
will then appear as if it is functioning properly. However, it will be
14. The system clock feature allows the configuration of two (2) separate clocks
transmitting the alert message and will not process any incoming or
that run simultaneously. A local (Home) clock and an alternate (Visiting)
outgoing messages.
clock.
DRAFT 227 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 44 March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual Chapter 9 - Security PFED User Manual
: It is recommended that the Home time be set to the option GMT Casablanca so CHAPTER 9
PFED will accurately date and time stamp all transmissions. SECURITY
15. To set the local clock, make sure the Home clock radio button is active by
tapping Home. 9.1 INTRODUCTION
16. The first field on the right allows the selection of the Greenwich Mean Time
location. Tap to the right and scroll through the available options and
select GMT Casablanca. When the PFED handheld is being used in FiST mode, security consists of two
components. The first component is at the handheld level where the operator
17. Tap on the Hours in the displayed time, located under the GMT selection, to
highlight it. Use and to set the current hours.
will access all handheld processes with the PointSec password. The second
component is at the application level that provides access control by requiring
18. Repeat step 17 to set the Minutes and Seconds to compete the local time
the user to enter a system FiST Mode Password. When the PFED handheld is
setting.
“not” set to FiST mode, security consists of the one PointSec access component.
19. In the Date field, tap to open a small calendar (Figure 3-73).
9.2 FIST MODE PASSWORD
Passwords for the application shall consist of the following:
Passwords must be between one (1) and eight (8) alpha-characters
Passwords shall not be blank
9.2.1 Changing the FiST Mode Password
1. Tap on the Main PFED screen. Then tap the Passwords option
followed by the Set FiST Mode Password option to access the Change
FiST Password screen (Figure 9-1).
Figure 3-71 Settings - Regional Settings Figure 3-72 Settings - Clock
Date Configuration Screen Configuration Screen
Figure 3-73 Calendar Configuration Setting
20. Tap and to select the current month. Figure 9-1 FiST Mode Password Screen
DRAFT 45 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 226 March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual
21. Tap on the displayed year ( ) and use available up and down scroll
buttons that appear to select the current year.
22. Tap the day of the week to select the current weekday.
23. If you wish to set an alternate time zone, make sure the Visiting clock is
active by tapping Visiting and continue to the next step. If not, skip to step
25.
24. To set the alternate clock, repeat steps 16 through 22 choosing the
appropriate time, month and day for the location of the alternate settings.
25. When all settings are complete, tap . Tap to save these
settings.
3.9.4 Power Low Warning on the 5700
If the battery power gets critically low, a warning message (Figure 3-74) will
notify the operator that the external batteries need to be replaced or the internal
battery may need to be recharged.
Figure 8-37 Fire Mission Monitor – CAS Tab (5700 Screen)
2. To access the CAS Request and create a new message tap . : Do not allow the battery power to be completely extinguished or all stored
data and settings will be lost. If the power low message does appear, battery power should
be replaced immediately.
3. To access the Check Fire functions, tap the button.
: To access the different sections of a CAS message, tap any of the , ,
: If power is completely lost, a re-initialization process will be needed to rebuild the
or tabs. handheld. This will include the installation of the PFED application software, the
configuration of all time, volume and battery power usage settings as well as all PFED
database stored information such as unit list, user and device settings, etc (refer to sections
8.3.5.1 Processing BDA 3.7, 3.7.1, and 3.9.1 through 3.9.3).
1. If needed, tap the tab.
2. To send a CAS BDA message, tap the Send CAS BDA radio button.
3. If you wish to specify the results for this transmission, tap the to the right
of the Results field and select an option.
4. To add a percentage of damage, tap in the % Damage field and enter a
value.
5. To specify if this is to be a reattack, tap the checkbox to the left of the
Reattack field. Figure 3-74 Battery Low warning Message
6. And finally, to specify if this is a secondary explosion, tap the checkbox to
the left of the Secondary Explosion field. 1. When you receive this power low message, the batteries located in the
PFED battery pack compartment (Figure 2-9) will need to be replaced.
7. Once this information if entered, tap the . 2. If the external batteries cannot be immediately replaced, that may cause the
PFED unit to shut down, the unit may require re-initialization.
DRAFT 225 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 46 March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual
3. To re-initialize the device, perform a screen alignment process by tapping original on call target information is held in the On Call tab for accessing
and holding the stylus down in the center of the five (5) crosshairs that multiple times if needed.
appear on the screen.
4. When prompted, choose a time zone for setting the devices system clock. 1. If needed, tap the tab in the center of the screen to make changes to
For further information on setting the system time, refer to section 3.9.3. the Target Location and Description information. Make sure you have the
5. Also, complete a full installation of the PFED application software and target selected in the list.
reconfigure all system and application settings as noted in the warning
stated above. 2. Tap to access the Target Description screen.
3. Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for instructions on completing the
Location information.
: The re-initialization process may also need to be performed if the handheld device
4. Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for instructions
experiences a “hard reset” operation (i.e., using the reset button found at the bottom of the
on completing the Size information.
device).
5. Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for instructions
on changing the Activity or Protection options.
3.10 LOCK/UNLOCK DEVICE (5700 MODEL)
6. If needed, tap the tab in the center of the screen to make changes
The following section shows the Lock/Unlock Device feature for the 5700 to the Method of Engagement information.
models.
7. Tap to access the CFF – [Target #] screen.
The 5700 R-PDA models contain a locking feature that will completely lock the 8. Refer to section 8.2.2 CFF - Extended (Screen 2) for instructions on
completing the Method of Fire information.
device and prevent any tapping or processing of any kind. This feature can very
easily be engaged by mistake. However, it can just as easily be disengaged 9. To send the mission, tap .
when this occurs.
8.3.4.2 MTO Processing
1. On the devices Today screen (Figure 3-75) there is an item that shows
when the device is locked or unlocked.
You may also process an MTO from the On Call tab of the Fire Mission
2. If the device becomes locked, the indicators padlock will be closed ( ) and Monitor.
the word Unlock will appear in the bottom left coner of the screen.
1. Refer to section 8.3.1.1 for information on the MTO process.
3. To unlock the device, tap the word Unlock at the bottom left to access the
Unlock screen (Figure 3-76).
8.3.4.3 Deleting an On Call Mission
4. Tap the button. The device will then return you to the Today
You may delete an on call mission from the On Call tab of the Fire Mission
screen and the indicators padlock will now be opened ( ). Monitor.
1. Make sure you have the target selected in the list. Tap it once if it is not
highlighted.
2. Tap the tab in the center of the screen.
8.3.5 CAS Missions
All CAS Request target missions are placed in the Fire Missions Monitor CAS
tab when transmitted.
1. Tap the tab at the top of the screen (Figure 8-37).
DRAFT 47 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 224 March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual
8.3.3.3 Log
Viewing the observer notifications may also be performed from the Inactive tab.
1. Refer to section 8.3.1.12 for more information on viewing log entries. Lock/Unlock
Indicator
8.3.4 On Call Fire Missions
FPF or any On Call target missions are placed in the Fire Missions Monitor On
Call tab when:
A CFF FFE mission is sent with the FPF or Priority option selected
(for FPF and Priority Copperhead missions, this will send an
Assign FPF or Assign Priority Copperhead message), or
Cease Loading is sent for an FPF mission, or
EOM is sent for priority targets, or
Local Make Inactive option is selected for the mission.
Figure 3-75 Lock/Unlock Indicator Figure 3-76 Unlock Screen
The On Call tab on the Fire Mission Monitor screen allows you to delete or re-
initiate completed priority missions. 3.11 STEALTH MODE (5700 MODEL)
1. Tap the tab at the top of the screen (Figure 8-36). The following section shows the Stealth Mode feature for the 5700 models.
The 5700 R-PDA models contain a stealth feature that will place the device in a
“camouflage” configuration where the display becomes very dark to avoid
detection. This mode will engage automatically when the device has been left
on for a fairly long length of time, but has not been operated.
1. From the devices Today screen tap .
2. To access the Stealth feature, tap the Settings menu option, then tap the
tab at the bottom.
3. In the list of available icons, there is an option for the stealth program
( ). If you do not see it right away, you may need to scroll down
through the list using the stylus and the scroll bar to the right of the screen
(Figure 3-77).
Figure 8-36 Fire Mission Monitor – On Call Tab Screen
8.3.4.1 Re-Initiating A On Call Target
On Call targets may be fired from the Fire Mission Monitor On Call tab. Any
missions fired from this area are placed in the Active tab for monitoring. The
DRAFT 223 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 48 March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual
8.3.3.1 Re-Initiating An Inactive Target
Inactive targets may be fired from the Fire Mission Monitor Inactive tab. Any
missions fired from this area are placed in the Active tab for monitoring.
1. If needed, tap the tab in the center of the screen to make changes to
the Target Location and Description information. Make sure you have the
target selected in the list.
2. Tap to access the Target Description screen.
3. Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for instructions on completing the
Location information.
4. Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for instructions
on completing the Size information.
5. Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for instructions
Figure 3-77 Stealth Setting Screen on changing the Activity or Protection options.
4. If the device has been placed in Stealth mode, the Backlight and Volume 6. If needed, tap the tab in the center of the screen to make changes
levels will be set to “0”, and the Disable button will be available. to the Method of Fire, Control and Engagement information.
5. To disengage the Stealth mode, tap then tap to exit. 7. Tap to access the CFF – [Target #] screen.
8. Refer to section 8.2.2 CFF - Extended (Screen 2) for instructions on
3.12 BLUETOOTH MODE (5700 MODEL) completing the Method of Fire information.
The following section shows the Bluetooth Mode feature for the 5700 model. 9. To send the mission, tap .
1. The Bluetooth feature can be accessed one of two ways. From the devices 8.3.3.2 Deleting an Inactive Mission
Today screen tap . This will display the Wireless Manager You may delete an inactive mission from the Inactive tab of the Fire Mission
screen (Figure 3-78).
Monitor.
2. To either turn Bluetooth on or off, tap the button.
1. Make sure you have the target selected in the list. Tap it once if it is not
This will change the toggle display to either or highlighted.
.
3. When the appropriate setting has been selected, tap at the bottom 2. Tap the tab in the center of the screen.
left to exit the screen.
4. You may also access the Bluetooth feature by tapping and selecting : Tapping the tab for an on call target will immediately send a Delete Target
Settings. message to FOS or AFATDS.
5. Tap the tab, then tap the program. : The Inactive tab contains a maximum of 50 fire missions that may be held within
this tab. This is an external number that can not be changed by the operator. When this
6. At the bottom of the screen tap the tab (Figure 3-79). maximum has been reached, the oldest mission will be automatically removed and
replaced with the most recent. The system will not notify the operator of this action.
DRAFT 49 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 222 March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup PFED User Manual
8.3.2.2 Deleting a Pre-Planned Mission
You may delete a preplanned mission from either the Planned tab of the Fire
Mission Monitor or from the Planned Targets List option off of the Main PFED
Edit menu. A preplanned target may not be deleted from the Planned tab if the
mission is still active. You must complete the mission first before removing it.
: When PFED deletes targets from the Planned or On Call target lists, PFED will
generate a Cancel Target (delete the On Call target) message to FOS/AFATDS.
1. Make sure you have the target selected in the list. Tap it once if it is not
highlighted.
2. Tap the tab in the center of the screen.
8.3.3 Inactive Fire Missions Figure 3-78 Wireless Manager Screen Figure 3-79 Settings Bluetooth Mode
Screen
An inactive target is any non-priority target for which an EOM message is sent
or the local Make Inactive option is selected for the mission, or a Mission 7. Here you can toggle the Bluetooth mode on or off by checking or
Denied message was received. The Inactive tab on the Fire Mission Monitor unchecking the Turn on Bluetooth option.
screen allows you to delete or re-initiate completed missions. 8. Tap to exit the screen.
1. Tap the tab at the top of the screen (Figure 8-35). 3.13 EXTERNAL BUTTONS (5700 MODEL)
The following section shows the Initial System Installation for the 5700 models.
When the PFED application is active on the handheld, the four (4) external
buttons found on the device (Figure 3-80), will be programmed for a specific
use. They become access buttons for CFF mission templates and Check Firing
(refer to section 4.4.11 Fire Support Setup – CFF Templates).
Application
Buttons
Figure 3-80 PFED Handheld Computer External Buttons
Figure 8-35 Fire Mission Monitor - Inactive Tab Screen
DRAFT 221 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 50 March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual
CHAPTER 4
MAIN SCREEN
4.1 ACTIVATING THE PFED APPLICATION
This section provides instructions on how to access and activate the PFED
application on the handheld device.
: When entering data of any kind, verify the values are correct before tapping
any Ok, Send, Save or any other process button.
Figure 8-34 Fire Mission Monitor - Planned Tab Screen
1. Using the stylus, tap at the top of the main Today screen, then tap the
PFED option (Figure 4-1). The About screen will display (Figure 4-2).
8.3.2.1 Firing a Pre-Planned Mission
Pre-Planned targets may be fired from the Fire Mission Monitor Planned tab.
Any missions fired from this area are placed in the Active tab for monitoring.
The original planned target information is held in the Planned tab for accessing
multiple times if needed.
1. If needed, tap the tab in the center of the screen to make changes to
the Target Location and Description information. Again, make sure you
have the target selected in the list.
2. Tap to access the Target Description screen.
3. Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for instructions on completing the
Location information.
4. Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for instructions
on completing the Size information.
5. Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for instructions
Figure 4-1 Handheld Start Menu Figure 4-2 PFED About Screen on changing the Activity or Protection options.
Screen
6. If needed, tap the tab in the center of the screen to make changes
to the Method of Fire, Control and Engagement information.
7. Tap to access the CFF – [Target #] screen.
8. Refer to section 8.2.2 CFF - Extended (Screen 2) for instructions on
completing the Method of Fire information.
9. To send the mission, tap .
DRAFT 51 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 220 March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual
GPS
Information
Access to
PFED
Functions
Toolbar
Figure 4-3 Main PFED Screen
Figure 8-32 Log Information Screen Figure 8-33 Log Command Information
Screen 2. To exit this screen and enter the application, tap the large graphic in the
middle of the screen.
8.3.2 Planned Fire Missions
Preplanned targets are listed in the Planned tab of the Fire Mission Monitor : Duress mode may be activated or deactivated from the PFED About screen. Refer
screen. You may create a planned target using the Edit/Fire Support/Planned to section 9.3 Duress Mode for further information.
Target List menu option available from the Main PFED screen.
GPS information is displayed in the rectangular box located above the function
buttons at the top of the Main PFED screen. This box display’s the position
1. To send a pre-planned fire mission, tap the tab at the top of the
Fire Mission Monitor screen (Figure 8-34). Make sure you have the planned
data received from your GPS or that was manually entered depending upon the
target you wish selected by tapping it once in the list. mode of operation. Your current location is as stated here. Your position can be
displayed in Military Grid Reference System (MGRS), Latitude/Longitude
coordinates or Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM).
When the GPS is activated, the Position display will be automatically updated
with your current location approximately every ten (10) seconds. If your GPS is
disabled, you may manually enter your location.
: When PFED is first installed or the operator is forced to perform a “hard reset”
(zeroizing) on the device, the PFED application will not retain the current location
information. When PFED is accessed after such a contingency, the system will require the
operator to enter their current location information.
DRAFT 219 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 52 March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual
: It is important that the location shown in the Position display be accurate. All : Any Check Firing processes on a target may only be cancelled on the initiating
reports generated and sent by PFED will be based on and tagged with this location, device.
regardless of how it was entered.
Information displayed on this screen is as follows:
: If a Cancel Check Firing All message is sent and the device does not receive this
transmission (if the device is turned off or temporarily disconnected from the network), a
Location Button ( ): Either your current
Check Firing All indicator icon ( ) will display in the top right corner of the Fire Mission
latitude and longitude, or MGRS or UTM location. Pressing this
Monitor and the CFF Screen 1 windows (Figure 8-31). The operator may continue to send
button allows you to manually edit your location (refer to section 4.4.1 fire missions on the tactical network while in this state. However, the operator may be
GPS/Manual Time Sync) prompted to cancel this state during processing and will be required to confirm the Cancel
Time of Fix: States the time the location information was entered Check Firing All before continuing.
Source of Fix: States how the location information was entered
Alt/Elev: Displays your current altitude/elevation (altitude/elevation is
shown in meters only)
: When processing a Check Firing All or Check Firing by Target Number, a unit
Heading: Displays your current heading cofigured as a FiST device may not stop this processing when the originator of the
Speed: Displays your current speed message is set in Review mode.
Compass Arrow (Nav): Displays your current position in relation to
the configured waypoint showing which direction the operator will
need to proceed Check Fire
Received Icon
4.2 PFED NAVIGATION
Figure 8-31 Check Fire Icon
4.2.1 Title Bar Ok Button 8.3.1.11 New Call For Fire
On several PFED screens you will see an in the application title bar (Figure At any time you may initiate a new CFF mission.
4-3) at the top right of the screen.
1. Tap to access the CFF screen.
2. Refer to section 8.2 Call For Fire for instructions creating a new CFF
request.
Figure 4-4 Application Title Bar
3. If available, may be tapped at any time to cancel the current function 8.3.1.12 Log
being performed and return you to the previous screen.
Occasionally observer notifications (shot, splash, rounds complete) are received
too quickly to view in the the Fire Mission Monitor target list. The Fire Mission
: The will always operate as a “cancel and return” function within the PFED Monitor provides access to a history of observer notifications received, as well
application. In very limited cases, this button is disabled forcing an entry on the current as MTO received and subsequent adjusts sent.
screen.
1. Tap the tab to access the history information (Figure 8-32).
4.2.2 Minimizing PFED
2. Highlight the message or command of interest and tap to view its
When you first access the PFED application, the Main PFED application screen specific information (Figure 8-33).
will contain an in the title bar at the top right of the screen.
3. Tap to exit.
DRAFT 53 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 218 March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual
The button is enabled if the CFF request was received or if PFED sent the 4. When you tap at the top right, the Main PFED (Figure 4-3) screen will
message but did not receive an acknowledgement after three (3) retry attempts. disappear or minimize and display the main Today screen (Figure 4-1).
The latter ensures that you can send a Check Firing message in the case where 5. To display the PFED application, tap at the top of the Today screen
AFATDS received the message, is processing it, but could not successfully send and select PFED from the pop-up menu. You will not need to enter your
PFED an acknowledgement. password since you did not actually exit PFED using the Exit option (refer to
section 4.4.19 Exiting PFED).
When PFED receives a shot or splash acknowledgement, the indicator is shown
6. You will also notice that the option at the top left of the title bar
in the Status column for any Check Firing or Check Firing All messages. When
a cancel acknowledgement of a Check Firing is received, a large splash screen is changes to when you enter the PFED application. If you tap in
briefly displayed. This splash screen will automatically disappear after a few the title bar, the Today menu appears (Figure 4-5). If you happen to
seconds and will be the only indicator received. select a menu option from this list, the PFED application screen will again
disappear or minimize. Either repeat step 2 to return to the PFED
1. From the systems master toolbar at the very bottom of the handheld screen, application, or tap any or you see at the top right until the Main PFED
screen reappears.
tap . Or, from the Fire Mission Monitor screen, tap . You may
press the fourth (4th) hotkey button on the handheld device. Any one of
these will access the Check Firing button options (Figure 8-30).
Figure 8-30 Check Firing Button Options
2. Make sure you have the target you wish to perform a check firing on is
selected by tapping it once in the above list.
3. To check firing on the selected target, tap . Tap to
send a message to check firing on the selected target. Tap to exit
the request.
4. If a target is in a Check Firing state and you initiated the check firing on that
target, you may resume firing on the selected target by tapping
Figure 4-5 Start Menu
. Tap to cancel the check firing on the selected
target. Tap to exit the cancellation request. 4.3 TOOLBAR
5. To check firing on all of the targets (including those not in your list), tap
The PFED Toolbar (Figure 4-6) at the bottom provides quick access to some
. Tap to send a message to check firing on all frequently used functions for monitoring system and communication status.
targets. Tap to exit the request.
6. If all targets are in a Check Firing state and you initiated the check firing on
all targets, you may resume firing on all targets by tapping .
Tap to cancel the check firing on all targets. Tap to exit
the cancellation request.
DRAFT 217 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 54 March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual
others) to transmit to. Place a check mark to the left of each unit you wish to
Transmit Queue transmit to, then tap .
Fire Mission Check Firing
Monitor
8.3.1.9 Set Mission to Inactive
Communications Status
System Alerts
Once the end of mission message has been acknowledged by AFATDS, the fire
GPS Time Sync
mission will be automatically moved to the Inactive tab. If transmission of this
Handheld message is not acknowledged, the operator has the option of manually setting
Keypad
Manual Time Sync the target to an inactive state. On Call type missions will be moved to the On
Call tab. Note that using the local Make Inactive feature will not send an update
to AFATDS.
Figure 4-6 PFED Toolbar
1. To manually set the mission to inactive, tap the tab in the center of
4.3.1 GPS/Manual Time Sync the screen. Make sure you have the target you wish to adjust by tapping it
once in the list.
The GPS Time Sync ( ) and Manual Time Sync ( ) toolbar button opens a
screen that allows the selection of setting the system time through GPS methods 2. Tap .
or setting the time manually. Based on the option selected the system will
display the appropriate picture button. For more detail on this toolbar button,
refer to section 4.4.1 GPS/Manual Time Sync. : Pressing the Make Inactive button will cause the system to display one of the
following alerts:
4.3.2 Communications Status 1. If the mission is an immediate suppression or immediate smoke that has not been
assigned a target number, the alert will be: “WARNING!!!! Deleting Mission without a
Target Number can corrupt Data, Continue?”
The Communications Status toolbar button ( ) opens a screen which shows 2. For all other type missions, the alert will be: “WARNING!!!! PFED may become out of
the current connect status of attached communications devices. If the active sync with fire support systems processing this mission. Proper procedure to inactivate
communications device is not connected, the toolbar will display a down-arrow missions is sending EOM. Continue?”
( ). Refer to section 5.2 Communications Status for more detail on this toolbar
button. 8.3.1.10 Check Firing
4.3.3 Transmit Queue
: Check Firing on all targets may be executed at any point whether you have active
fire missions listed in your monitor or not.
The Transmit Queue toolbar button ( ) opens a screen which shows the
current status of messages queued for transmission over your radio. The status Once a CFF request has been sent, you have the option to check firing ( ), or
of a message may be: Queued, Sending, Retrying, Sent but Waiting for immediately halt firing, on the target. You may access this feature from the Fire
Acknowledgement, Deferred for Later Transmission, or Failed. For more detail Mission Monitor as well as from the system toolbar shown at the bottom of the
on this toolbar button, refer to section 5.3.1 Accessing Transmission Queue. handheld.
4.3.4 Fire Mission Monitor Under certain conditions, the Check Firing button is disabled (gray). The button
is disabled if the selected CFF message is waiting in the transmission queue or
The Fire Mission Monitor toolbar button ( ) allows you to view the status of failed transmission due to a communications problem.
active fire missions. For more detail on this toolbar button, refer to section 8.3
Fire Mission Monitor.
DRAFT 55 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 216 March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual
4. If you wish to save the target as a Planned Target and notify the FDC, check 4.3.5 Check Firing
the box for the Save as Planned Target then continue to step 7 below.
a. If the Save as Planned Target option is chosen, the Save as On Call The Check Firing toolbar button ( ) allows you to quickly send a ‘check
Target option is inactive. You may only save a mission to either
firing’ message for any or all active fire missions. For more detail on this
Planned or On Call, not both.
toolbar button, refer to section 8.3.1.10 Check Firing.
5. If you wish to save the target as an On Call target and notify the FDC, check
the box for the Save as On Call Target then continue to step 7 below.
4.3.6 System Alert
a. If the Save as On Call Target option is chosen, the Save as Planned
Target option is inactive. You may only save a mission to either
Planned or On Call, not both.
The System Alert toolbar button ( ) allows you to view a list of system
notifications, such as a message received for a recipient. If there are no alerts
6. If you wish to send any Battle Damage information, tap to access stored on the system, then the button will be disabled ( ). For more detail on
the Battle Damage Assessment (BDA) screen (Figure 8-29). this toolbar button, refer to section 5.4.1 Accessing Alerts.
4.3.7 Handheld Keypad
The Keypad toolbar button ( ) displays the full keypad.
4.4 SETTING UP YOUR PFED HANDHELD
4.4.1 GPS/Manual Time Sync
1. To access the Manual Time Sync option, tap (or if the system was
previously set to GPS, tap ) in the application toolbar. This will display
the Set System Time screen. This screen will be different based on which
selection has been chosen (Figure 4-7 or Figure 4-8).
2. To allow the system to set and sync the time with the GPS device, tap the
Set Time from GPS option.
Figure 8-29 Battle Damage Assessment Screen
3. Or, to perform a manual time hack, tap the option titled Set Time Manually.
a. Using the available keypad, enter the % Damaged and # Casualties
values. This will display a button.
b. Tap to select an Effects value of Burning, Destroyed, Neutralized,
Neutralized/Burning, No Effect or Suppressed. When finished, tap
4. Tap to display the Date/Time Entry screen (Figure
. 4-9).
7. Before sending the EOM, enter refinement data (if applicable) under the Tgt,
Control and Adjust tabs.
8. If you are finished with all changes and wish to send the correction, tap
.
9. If this EOM is being processed on a fire mission that was initiated by a
subordinate unit, the Select Units to send to prompt will appear (Figure
8-22). The operator may select up to four (4) units (their primary plus three
DRAFT 215 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 56 March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual
2. Tap to access the CFF – [Target #] screen.
3. Tap to the right of the At My Command field option in the Method of Fire
and Control section and select When Ready. When finished, tap .
4. If you are finished with all changes and wish to send the cancel AMC
message, tap .
8.3.1.7 Repeat Fire For Effect and Cease Loading Command
1. Tap at the bottom of the screen. Make sure you have the target you
wish to fire upon selected by tapping it once in the above list.
2. To repeat a FFE, Imm Smoke or Imm Suppression command, tap
. Tap to confirm the request. Tap to
cancel.
Figure 4-7 Set Time from GPS Screen Figure 4-8 Set Time Manually Screen 3. To cease loading on a target, tap . Tap to confirm
the request. Tap to cancel.
8.3.1.8 Sending EOM
An EOM message may be sent at any time during the sequence for an AF or
FFE mission. Immediate Smoke and Immediate Suppression missions may only
be made Inactive.
PFED will allow the operator to create EOM messages for missions that are
initiated by themselves or by subordinate units. When the device is configured
as a FiST unit, and the received mission was intiated by a subordinate unit, the
operator may create and send an EOM to up to four (4) units (their primary plus
three [3] others). When the operator creates an EOM for a mission, PFED will
also allow this EOM to be designated as an On Call target. This mission will be
placed in the On Call tab of the Fire Mission Monitor.
Figure 4-9 Date/Time Entry Screen
When an EOM message is sent with BDA data, AFATDS will display 3%
suppressed no matter what percent is sent by PFED. The transmitted
5. Tap on the day, hour, minute, or year to change this data. information has not been altered, simply displayed differently.
6. Tap and select another month if needed.
7. When complete, tap . 1. Tap the tab in the center of the screen. Make sure you have the
target you wish to adjust by tapping it once in the list.
4.4.2 Operator (Positional) Location 2. To send an EOM on the selected fire mission, tap the End Of Mission radio
button then continue to step 7 below.
If the PFED device identifies that the Time of Fix or Source of Fix information 3. If you wish to save this target as a Known Point and notify the FDC, check
shown on the Main PFED screen is incorrect, based on one of the situations the box for the Save as Known Point then continue to step 7 below.
DRAFT 57 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 214 March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual
described in sections 4.4.2.1 through 4.4.2.4, these fields will flash indicating
the discrepancy (Figure 4-10).
Figure 8-28 Target Description Screen
: The Target Location and Target Type information may not be modified.
Figure 4-10 Main PFED (OTF/EPE Flash Indication) Screen
3. Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for information
on completing the Size information. 4.4.2.1 Non-existent GPS Device or Embedded GPS
4. Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for information
on changing the Activity and/or Protection. PFED utilizes positional data for the location of the FO in a number of ways
5. If you are finished with all changes and wish to send the correction, tap depending on how that data is acquired. When a GPS device is connected to the
PFED handheld (AN/PSG-10 (V)1), or embedded within the PFED handheld
.
(AN/PSG-10 (V)2 w/PPS or AN/PSG-10 (V)3 w/SAASM), connection is
8.3.1.5 Sending the Fire Command established with the GPS device at the data link level and a port is opened for
communications. Using the PLGR message protocol, handshaking occurs to
For an At My Command mission, the Fire button under the Commands button establish the link between the PFED handheld and the GPS device and a
will be enabled after it is received by AFATDS, and PFED receives a Ready ( ) message 8 is sent by the PLGR to the PFED upon start up. A message 253 is
notification. also sent by the PLGR every 6 seconds and the PFED device acknowledges this
message.
1. Tap at the bottom of the screen. Make sure you have the target you
wish to fire upon selected by tapping it once in the above list. Within PFED, the GPS object is set into an initializing state, waiting for valid
data to be sent from the GPS device. Positional data is then sent by the GPS
2. Tap . Tap to confirm the fire request. Tap device in the form of the 5040 status message. It includes a flag that tells if the
to cancel.
GPS device is “converged”; meaning that enough satellites have been locked on
and a valid fix is possible. This message, once established with the PFED and
8.3.1.6 Canceling an At My Command (AMC) the GPS device, is in continuous mode and is sent once every second regardless
of the state of the data.
1. Tap the tab in the center of the screen. Make sure you have the
target you wish to adjust by tapping it once in the list. If the data sent by the GPS device (message 5040) is converged, meaning that
the GPS device has a fix on the satellites and the data being sent is valid, the
DRAFT 213 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 58 March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual
PFED application sets the FO’s position to the position sent by the GPS and
updates the PFED Main screen with this position. The Figure Of Merit (FOM)
is parsed from the 5040 message and the PFED Main screen displays text on the
screen according to the following table:
FOM value Text displayed on the Main Screen of the PFED application as
sent by the the Source of Fix
GPS device
1 GPS, +/- 25m
2 GPS, +/- 50m
3 GPS, +/- 75m
4 GPS, +/- 100m
5 GPS, +/- 200m
6 GPS, +/- 500m
7 GPS, +/- 1000m
Figure 8-27 CFF - [Target #] Screen
8 GPS, +/- 5000m
9 GPS, OLD 3. Refer to section 8.2.2 CFF - Extended (Screen 2) for instructions on making
Table 1 5040 Message Parse Configuration changes.
4. If you are finished with all changes and wish to send the correction, tap
.
: If the GPS is in standby or initializing, the FOM internal to the GPS is set to “0” and
the display shows GPS Old on the GPS device (if external). The PFED application will also
show GPS Old on the PFED Main screen as the Source of Fix. Target Location and Description
The following information is parsed from the 5040 message and displayed 1. Tap the tab in the center of the screen. Make sure you have the
target you wish to adjust by tapping it once in the list.
within the Comms Status screen when the GPS device is selected from the list:
Number of satellites visible 2. Tap to access the Target Description screen (Figure 8-28).
Number of satellites used (locked on)
Key status
Almanac Age
If the user has not manually set the time on his PFED device from within the
PFED application (refer to section 4.3.1 GPS/Manual Time Sync), the time
information provided by the GPS is used to set the system time on the PFED
handheld (in Zulu).
4.4.2.2 Disconnected GPS Device
If the GPS is disconnected or not sending data to the PFED handheld, a timer is
set within the PFED application upon initialization of the GPS device. This
timer is set to check that data has been received from the GPS every seven (7)
seconds. If data has not been received within seven seconds, the following will
occur:
DRAFT 59 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 212 March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual
update the mission and route it to the subordinate unit regardless of the routing An alert is presented to the user that states “DANGER!!! GPS has lost
configuration in the devices Unit List. The operator will NOT receive an alert connectivity, your position is not guaranteed”
for this routing process. The GPS object within the PFED application is turned OFF so as to
preclude further error messages popping up every seven (7) seconds
The Comms Setup screen is displayed so that the FO can see that the
: The icon will only display for a Check Firing By Target Number or Cancel GPS object within the PFED application has been turned off. This
Check Firing By Target Number messages. All other Check Firing messages will not affords the FO the opportunity to correct the problem with the GPS and
display an icon indicator. restart the GPS object within the PFED application
The position within the PFED application related to the FO is flagged
8.3.1.4 Making Subsequent Corrections as being in error, and the PFED Main screen of the application
display’s “GPS Error” where the FOM is usually displayed
After transmitting a CFF, you can make corrections to elements previously
If the FO chooses to close out the Comms Setup screen without
transmitted including parts of the target description, method of engagement, fire
correcting the problem with the GPS device, the position related to the
and control. You can also enter corrections necessary to adjust rounds onto the
FO remains in an error state
target.
If the FO attempts to compose or send any message that uses this position data:
When sending a Subsequent Adjust message, the mission cannot be defined as
An alert is presented that states “DANGER!!! GPS has lost
both an At My Command and a Cannot Observe. To correctly communicate
connectivity, your position is not guaranteed. Enter your location”
with AFATDS, PFED will automatically transmit this message type as an At My
The Grid Location screen is presented for the FO to manually set their
Command as the method of control.
location.
: In all cases you must make sure that the appropriate target number is selected in : This screen will not allow the FO to cancel out. They must hit the Ok to
the target list. acknowledge that they are setting their position manually.
The position data related to the FO is set to “manually entered” and the
Deviation, Range and Height of Burst (HOB) FOM on the PFED Main screen of the PFED application displays
“Operator Entered”
1. Tap the tab in the center of the screen. Make sure you have the
target you wish to adjust by tapping it once in the list. 4.4.2.3 GPS Device Not Providing Data
2. Tap to access the Adjust Fire screen. If there is not a GPS device providing positional data to the PFED application,
3. Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for instructions on making changes
the position stored as the FO’s position is set as “Operator Entered”, and the
for a Shift. logic for checking the ‘oldness’ of the position (described below) is applied.
4. If you are finished with all changes and wish to send the adjustment, tap
4.4.2.4 Position Data Not Updated within Set Time Period
. Otherwise you may continue to make corrections to the other
parameters. If the position data related to the FO has not been updated in a set period of
time, a timer is started each time the Time of Fix is set within the PFED
Method of Engagement, Fire and Control application. The length of this timer is based upon the value set by the FO in the
Automatic Position Reporting screen. By default, this value is set to five (5)
1. Tap the tab in the center of the screen. Make sure you have the minutes. If the current time minus the Time of Fix of the position for the FO is
target you wish to adjust by tapping it once in the list.
beyond the duration described above, an alert is presented stating “Your position
2. Tap to access the CFF – [Target #] screen (Figure 8-27). has not been updated in <<duration>> minutes if the FO attempts to send a
message (i.e., Call for Fire, Position Report, Air Crew Briefing). If the FO
DRAFT 211 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 60 March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual
chooses to set the position manually from this alert, the Source of Fix on the
PFED Main screen will be set to “Operator Entered” and the Time of Fix will be
set to the current time. If a GPS is connected and initialized, once the next 5040
message is received from the GPS device, the position FOM will be set based on
the data received from the GPS (refer to Table 1). If the user elects to ‘cancel’
out of this alert, the message will be sent, but the position’s Time of Fix will not
be changed and this alert will appear the next time the user attempts to send a
message.
4.4.2.5 Setting Operator (Positional) Location
When the PFED application has been installed for the first time, or the operator
performs a zeroizing of the device, the operators’ current location information
will be removed. This information is required for correct PFED operation.
Figure 8-26 MTO Mission Denied Screen
: If no location information exists, the system will automatically prompt the operator 1. When you tap on the MTO message containing a denied mission, all other
to enter their current location when any operation is chosen. tabs will be disabled (Figure 8-26).
1. From the Main PFED screen, tap the Location
2. To accept the denial, tap . Once this is tapped, the message will
( ) button. This will display the MGRS - Grid be removed from the Active folder and placed in the Inactive folder.
Location screen (Figure 4-11).
8.3.1.3 Report Upon Firing
As your fire missions are processed by AFATDS, you will automatically receive
Shot, Splash, Rounds Complete, Check Firing and Check Firing All messages.
These messages are displayed in the status column of the active targets list, as
they are received:
PFED will allow processing of observer notification messages such as shot,
Figure 4-11 MGRS - Grid Location Figure 4-12 Decimal Degrees - Grid splash, round’s complete and ready messages. When an observer notification
Screen Location Screen message is received that was initiated by the operator (local message), an alert
will display and the mission will be updated.
When the device is configured as a FiST unit, and an observer notification
message is received for a mission initiated by a subordinate unit, PFED will
DRAFT 61 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 210 March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual
Figure 8-25 MTO Display Screen
Figure 4-13 Deg:Min:Sec - Grid Figure 4-14 UTM - Grid Location
Location Screen Screen
2. Tap the tab (Figure 8-25). If there is no MTO present for the selected
fire mission, this tab will be unavailable. 2. Note the default of MGRS as your position measurement unit. If needed,
change this to another unit of measure for your position (Figure 4-12, Figure
Information displayed in this screen is: 4-13, and Figure 4-14).
Units: Units to fire 3. Using the available keypad, complete the information to designate your
position.
AF: Adjust fire shell/fuze
FFE: Fire for effect shell/fuze MGRS require’s the Zone, 100k, Easting, Northing and Altitude.
PE Range: Probable error in range Decimal Degrees and Deg:Min:Sec requires the Lat, Lon and
#Vol: Number of volleys Altitude.
Angle T: Angle T value UTM requires the Zone, Easting Prfx, Easting, Northing Prfx,
TOF: Time of flight Northing and Altitude.
8.3.1.2 Confirming Denied Missions
: Altitude/Elevation data can only be entered in meters with 2 decimal places.
When the mission is denied, the MTO message will flash the red exclamation
( ) point. The operator would then need to accept the denied mission.
4. Tap . This will access the Date/Time Entry screen (Figure 4-9).
5. Tap on the day, hour, minute, or year to change the data.
6. Tap and select another month if needed.
: When entering data of any kind, verify the values are correct before tapping
any Ok, Send, Save or any other process button.
7. When complete, tap twice.
DRAFT 209 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 62 March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual
8. On the Main PFED screen you should now see your current location
displayed in the Location button at the top.
: The summary tab for an MTO on the Fire Mission Monitor is for displaying partial
information about a message to observer received for a fire mission. For full information
4.4.3 Waypoint/Route Configuration and Navigation contained in a message to observer messge, select the Log tab (section 8.3.1.12) within
the Fire Mission Monitor and open the corresponding MTO.
A waypoint is a fixed location with a specified longitude and latitude, or UTM
coordinates, that is maintained by a radio navigation system receiver such as a When the device is configured as an FO or a FiST unit, PFED will allow the
GPS set. A waypoint is also a destination, a location of a course change along a receipt of an MTO from their primary unit for a mission in their mission buffers,
journey, or a point of reference useful for navigation. PFED allows the operator and update the status of the fire mission as well as add the MTO to the mission
to enter one or more waypoints to navigate individually, or to configure a route log.
containing multiple waypoints.
When the device is configured as a FiST unit, PFED will forward MTO
messages received and initiated by a subordinate unit as a “carbon copy” to the
1. To configure and select a Waypoint/Route, tap . This will display the
Navigation screen (Figure 4-15). At the bottom of this screen there are units defined within the devices Unit List based on that subordinate units routing
several buttons (Table 2) for creating, selecting, and recording configurations.
waypoints/routes.
If the subordinate units routing configuration is set to review, PFED will alert
-- record your movement as a route the operator and save the MTO to the Inbox. The operator may edit this MTO
from the Inbox prior to routing the message to the subordinate unit.
-- jump to previous waypoint
-- navigate a waypoint/route
-- jump to next waypoint : The alert will indicate that editing this MTO message can cause the database
to be Out Of Sync with their primary unit.
-- create waypoint using current
location If the subordinate units routing configuration is NOT set to review, PFED will
update the mission within the system and route the MTO to the subordinate unit
-- create/edit/delete waypoints with no alert to the operator.
-- create/edit/delete routes If an MTO is received that is not addressed to another known unit, PFED will
display an alert indicating this and discard the message.
-- access thresholds screen
Figure 4-15 Navigation Screen Table 2 Navigation Screen Buttons When an MTO is received from AFATDS with a recalcualted target position,
PFED will change the target’s position to match this recalculated location as
4.4.3.1 Use Current Location as Waypoint well as displaying it in the MTO and Log tab in the Fire Mission Monitor.
2. To store your current location as a waypoint, tap . This will access the
Mark Location screen (Figure 4-16).
3. If needed, place a check mark in the Required field.
: When a Copperhead MTO message is received, the Angle T and TOF will
4. Tap and select Friendly, Hostile, Neutral, or Unknown in the drop
display as N/G in the MTO.
down.
1. If not already selected, tap the target number in the list that has an
5. In the Name field enter a label for this waypoint, then tap .
associated MTO (status of MTO received).
DRAFT 63 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 208 March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual
icons to the left of each target number give a quick glance indication of the
transmission or processing status, as shown in the table below.
Icon Transmission or Processing Status
The message is queued (waiting) for transmission.
This symbol is used when a third immediate mission is waiting for an
empty system buffer for processing.
The message is being sent or has been sent and PFED is waiting for an
acknowledgement. The number (1, 2, 3) depicts the number of send
(yellow) attempts made.
The message was received, or you are receiving mission updates (such
(green) as Shot or Splash messages).
Transmission was attempted 3 times (the maximum number of retries)
(red) and no acknowledgement was received.
Figure 4-16 Mark Location Screen
Transmission failed immediately. This usually indicates that there is a
(red) problem with communications equipment or setup.
4.4.3.2 Create/Edit Waypoints
PFED is waiting for the operator to perform an action.
6. To create and store several new waypoints tap to access the Waypoints
Attention is needed. For example, the mission was denied. screen (Figure 4-17).
(red)
PFED has received a Ready notification from AFATDS for an At My 7. Tap to access the New Waypoint screen (Figure 4-18). Enter a new
(blue) Command mission.
PFED has received a CANTPRO message and the recipient is unable to location by tapping then tap the appropriate option
process. NOTE: A fire mission with this status cannot be acted upon (refer to section 8.2.1.1 for more information) for the location entry.
(red yield) from the fire mission monitor. You must open the Transmit Queue and
abort the message.
Table 5 Fire Mission Transmission/Processing Status Indicators : You may also use your current location for this new waypoint by tapping
As a fire mission is processed, the monitor will automatically update with instead of entering a location.
changes. To view details about the fire mission, simply highlight it by tapping 8. When the location has been set, place a check mark in the Required field if
on the target number in the list. Details of the fire mission are shown below. needed.
9. Tap and select either Friendly, Hostile, Neutral or Unknown in the drop
8.3.1.1 Message to Observer (MTO) down.
10. Then enter a label for this waypoint in the Name field. When complete tap
When the firing unit receives a CFF, the firing unit returns a MTO message to
. The new waypoint will be added to the list on the Waypoints
the PFED device. Reviewing this MTO provides the operator with valuable screen.
information about the mission to be fired. When an MTO is received for a
target, the status description of that target will change to MTO received (Figure
8-25). : You may also modify and delete existing waypoints by selecting one, or selecting
all with the , and tapping , . To unselect all waypoints, tap
. You may also send the Imagery information by tapping .
DRAFT 207 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 64 March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual
11. To exit the Waypoints screen tap . 8.3 FIRE MISSION MONITOR
Once a CFF request is sent, the Fire Mission Monitor is automatically displayed.
This tabbed screen (Figure 8-24) allows you to; monitor the transmission and
processing status of your active fire missions, view received MTO messages,
perform subsequent corrections, send EOM messages, send pre-planned
missions, make an inactive mission active, delete inactive missions, and view a
log of message processing. If your device has been configured as a FiST, the
operator will also see the subordinate targets.
: When a fire mission is processed and the Fire Mission Monitor is not displayed, the
system will show an alert ( ) indicating that a
message has been processed through the monitor. To view and/or remove these alerts,
refer to section 6.4.10 for more information.
Figure 4-17 Waypoints Screen Figure 4-18 New Waypoint Screen
1. To access the Fire Mission Monitor from the Main PFED screen, tap the
4.4.3.3 Create/Edit Routes icon at the bottom.
12. To create and store new routes tap to access the Route List screen 2. To view the list of active targets, tap the tab if needed.
(Figure 4-19).
13. Now tap to access the Edit Route screen (Figure 4-20). This
screen is where you will enter all of the waypoints that make up a route.
14. In the field block at the very top is the label for this route. PFED will fill this
field for you with a label that contains what it believes is the next
consecutive number (i.e., Rte 1, then Rte 2, etc.). If you wish to save this
route with a different name, tap in this field block and replace the route
name.
15. Next you may create new waypoints, or select existing waypoints to build
the route. To select an existing waypoint tap . This will
display the Select Waypoint screen (Figure 4-21).
16. Tap on the waypoint you wish to include in this route. The system will return
to the Edit Route screen and list the selected waypoint.
17. Repeat steps 15 and 16 to add as many existing waypoints as you need.
18. To create a new waypoint tap . This will display the Location
screen. Figure 8-24 Fire Mission Monitor - Active Tab Screen
19. Enter a location by tapping then tap the
8.3.1 Monitoring Active Targets
appropriate option (refer to section 8.2.1.1 for more information) for the
location entry. To the right of each target number in the list is a text description of the mission’s
current transmission status or processing status according to AFATDS. The
DRAFT 65 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 206 March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual
: You may also use your current location for this new waypoint by tapping
instead of entering a location.
20. When the location has been set, place a check mark in the Required field if
needed.
21. Tap and select either Friendly, Hostile, Neutral or Unknown in the drop
down.
Figure 8-22 Units Selection 22. Then enter a label for this waypoint in the Name field. When complete tap
a. Tap to the left of each unit to place a check mark for the units you wish . The new waypoint will be added to the route on the Edit Route
to send to. screen. This new waypoint will also be added to the Waypoints screen
identifying in what route it was created.
b. When ready, tap . Any subordinate messages that are not sent 23. Repeat steps 18 through 22 to create any number of new waypoints for this
to this local device will be processed in the Active folder, then route.
immediately placed in the Inactive folder of this unit’s Fire Mission 24. When navigating a route, PFED allows the operator to pick whether the
Monitor. route will be run from first to last (forward order) or last to first (reverse
order). If you wish to change the order of the waypoints within a route,
8.2.3 Sending CFF Template Fire Mission
select a waypoint and move it up or down in the list by tapping or .
If you have already configured the devices hotkey capability, you have the 25. To exit the Edit Route screen tap .
ability to quickly send a pre-filled fire mission literally at the tap of a button.
The hotkeys configured on the device are shown below (Figure 8-23).
: You may also edit and delete single waypoints within a route on the Edit Route
screen by selecting the waypoint then tapping or . On the
Button 2 Route List screen, you may modify and delete a route by selecting the route and tapping
Button 3
, .
26. Then exit the Route List screen by tapping .
Button 1 Button 4
Figure 8-23 PFED Handheld Hotkey Buttons
1. To display a pre-filled template for transmission, press the appropriate
hotkey you have previously configured (refer to section 4.4.11 Fire Support
Setup – CFF Templates). This will display the CFF screen containing the
template information.
: Note that button 4 is reserved for the Check Firing functionality and may not be
changed.
2. Tap on the CFF screen to transmit the displayed mission.
DRAFT 205 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 66 March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual
c. If you have selected Time On Target, tap to access the
Date/Time Entry screen. Using , enter the desired date and time on
target time. This field is initially set to the current system time. When
finished, tap .
26. Tap in the Control Method field to select this option if needed for the
Secondary control method.
27. Finally, tap in the Sheaf/Distribution field to select the sheaf/distribution
option. Depending on the shell type selected for the FFE1 field only, the
sheaf/distribution pull-down list will change. If no shell type, or Copperhead
type, is selected this field is disabled.
: When transmitting a Copperhead mission, the Method of Engagement will default
to High Angle and cannot be changed.
Figure 4-19 Route List Screen Figure 4-20 Edit Route Screen
: When transmitting a non-Priority Copperhead mission, PFED will transmit this
message as an FFE mission.
Control Method Distributin Sheaf
Cannot Observe 1 Gun Illum Converged
Coordinated Illum 2 Gun Illum Open
Continuous Illum 2 Gun Illum, Lateral Parallel
Spread
Continuous Fire 2 Gun Illum, Range
Spread
4 Gun Illum, Lateral &
Range Spread
28. When ready to transmit the message tap .
29. If the unit has been configured as a FiST device and this message is being
Figure 4-21 Select Waypoint Screen transmitted as a Non-Local message, the system will display a prompt
requesting the selection of all units it is to be transmitted to (Figure 8-22).
4.4.3.4 Record A Route
1. To autotmatically record your movement as a route, tap . This will display
the Define Route screen (Figure 4-22).
2. In the Name field, PFED will fill this field for you with a label that contains
what it believes is the next consecutive number (i.e., Rte 1, then Rte 2, etc.).
If you wish to save this recorded route with a different name, tap in this field
and enter a new name.
3. To have each waypoint of this route recorded by a specific number of
meters, enter a numeric value in the available box for the number of meters
DRAFT 67 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 204 March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual
(i.e., 500, 100, etc.). Or, enter a numeric value in the available box for a
specific number of seconds or minutes.
4. When ready, exit the Define Route screen by tapping . The system
will then begin recording your movement as you had specified.
5. During the recording of a route you may either Stop or Pause the process
(Figure 4-23).
a. To Stop tap then tap to end the recording.
b. To Pause tap then tap . To Resume recording
of a Paused process, tap .
Figure 8-20 Comments Screen
24. Tap in the blank Comments field and use the available keypad to enter any
statement you wish. When complete tap . Or, tap to exit
the screen without saving.
Method of Fire and Control
The Method of Fire and Control group in the CFF – Extended screen is used to
describe the manner of attacking the target and control the delivery of fire. Sub-
elements include a primary and secondary method of control and a sheaf or
distribution type based on the FFE1 selection (Figure 8-21).
Figure 4-22 Define Route Screen Figure 4-23 Stop/Pause Prompt
Secondary Control
Primary Control
4.4.3.5 Navigate To Waypoints/Routes
Sheaf/Distribution 1. To navigate to a waypoint, tap to access the Click to Navigate screen
Figure 8-21 Method of Fire and Control (Figure 4-24).
a. To navigate to a waypoint, tap on one of the listed points shown in the
25. Tap to the right of the When Ready option shown to change this option if Waypoints column on the left. The system will immediately return you
needed for the Primary control method. This field is defaulted to When to the Nav to Waypoint # screen (Figure 4-25). This screen will then
Ready. display the selected waypoint location, azimuth and range.
a. If the At My Command option is selected, the fire command will be
b. During navigation of a waypoint you may either Stop or Pause the
sent via the Fire Mission Monitor (refer to section 8.3 Fire Mission
process (Figure 4-26).
Monitor) at the desired time.
b. The Time On Target option is only available for FFE missions. If the i) To Stop tap then tap to end the navigation.
Time On Target option is selected here, will be enabled.
ii) To Pause tap then tap . To Resume
navigation of a Paused process, tap .
DRAFT 203 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 68 March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual
WDG 500 WDG 10
(Smoke) 750 (Smoke) 15
1000 Left Crosswind Scattered
1500
Right
Crosswind
20. Tap to the right of the FFE1 or FFE2 fields for the Fuze type selection, if
applicable.
: When the FFE1 shell option of Excalibur is chosen with a Quick Fuze (Q), this
selection is transmitted as Point Detonating. And when the device is configured as an FO
unit, a Fuze selection is not required.
: PFED will require the operator to select projectile/fuze information when
transmitting FPF missions.
Figure 4-24 Click to Navigate Screen Figure 4-25 Nav to Waypoint # Screen
: When specifying a Copperhead mission, the FFE2 field will be disabled. Entry of a
secondary projectile/fuze could cause issues with FOS, AFATDS, etc.
Volleys/Comments
21. At the right of , tap to increase/decrease the number of
volleys.
22. You may also tap to display the Volleys screen that allows you
to enter the value. When complete, tap .
: When entering Volley data, you must have at least one Munitions (FFE Shell)
value selected.
23. You may also enter any additional comments, and view any Pedigree
Figure 4-26 Stop/Pause Prompt
information, by tapping (Figure 8-20). Enter the comment text
2. To navigate to a route, tap to access the Click to Navigate screen in the space provided, and when complete tap .
(Figure 4-27).
a. To navigate to a route, tap on one of the listed routes shown in the
Routes column on the right.
b. To navigate this route in a first to last waypoint direction tap
.
DRAFT 69 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 202 March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual
c. To navigate this route in a last to first waypoint direction tap
.
d. The system will immediately return you to the Nav to Waypoint # screen
(Figure 4-28). Notice the waypoints that make up this route are listed in
the grey panel on the right hand side and the first waypoint is
highlighted. This is indicating the waypoint it is currently navigating to.
e. During navigation of a route you may do one of four things; Jump to
Next Waypoint, Jump to Previous Waypoint, Stop or Pause this process
(Figure 4-29).
i) To Jump to Next Waypoint tap . Notice that the highlighted
waypoint in the grey panel has skipped to the next waypoint.
ii) To Jump to Previous Waypoint tap . Notice that the highlighted
waypoint in the grey panel has skipped back to the previous
waypoint.
Figure 8-19 Smoke Mission Screen
iii) To Stop tap then tap to end the navigation.
b. Use the available keypad to enter the MTL (Maneuver Target Line)
value. Then, tap to the right of this field to select the appropriate
iv) To Pause tap then tap . To Resume
measurement.
navigation of a Paused process, tap .
c. Tap to the right of the Sheaf Length field and select the appropriate
measurement.
d. Tap to the right of the Wind Direction field and select a direction : When navigating through a route, the system will alert the operator each time it
that is relative to the MTL.
e. Tap to the right of the Cloud Coverage field and select a cloud
density option. reaches a waypoint ( ).
f. Tap to the right of the Duration field and select a time period value.
g. To the right of the Duration field, select whether the smoke mission is
to block Vis(ual) or Infrared (IR) sightings.
h. When complete, tap .
Sheaf Length Wind Direction Cloud Duration
Coverage
WP 100 Calm Winds, Broken WP 5
(Smoke) 200 No Effect (Smoke) 10
300 15
400
600
HC 200 Head Clear HC 4
(Smoke) 400 (Smoke) 6
600 8
800
1000
Figure 4-27 Click to Navigate Screen Figure 4-28 Nav to Waypoint # Screen
FLT 250 Tail Overcast FLT 5
DRAFT 201 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 70 March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual
: When the FFE1 field has been populated, the Distribution/Sheaf field will be
activated.
: .When Copperhead is selected in the FFE1 field as the projectile, the angle will
default to High and cannot be changed.
: When sending an Immediate Suppress/Smoke mission, it is recommended that
this field be left blank. AFATDS will assign this information based on the commander’s
criteria.
Figure 4-29 Stop/Pause Prompt
: When conducting a quick smoke mission through FOS, only select HC (Smoke).
3. Once you have started a navigation process and wish to return to the PFED
Main screen, tap at the top right corner. Notice that the Main screen will
indicate that it is navigating by displaying a moving arrow (Figure 4-30).
When navigation is complete, the moving arrow will disappear (Figure 4-31).
: If a FiST device is configured in Review mode and this device receives a
CFF with WP (Smoke) and a Free Text message with Quick Smoke data, the Quick Smoke
data will be blank when editing this CFF message. When this edited message is routed, it
will result in sending “another” CFF and Quick Smoke Free Text to AFATDS. However, the
original Quick Smoke Free Text message from the FO will still be waiting for routing. This
is only an issue if the FiST modifies the Quick Smoke data. AFATDS will receive two (2)
different Quick Smoke messages when the FiST taps Rte.
a. Tap to access the Smoke Mission screen (Figure 8-19).
Figure 4-30 Active Navigation Figure 4-31 Inactive Navigation
: When a waypoint or route has comlpeted, a finished alert will display
( , ).
DRAFT 71 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 200 March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual
d. Select the Destruction option to indicate that the target is to be 4.4.3.6 Define Thresholds
destroyed.
e. Select the Adj. FPF (Adjust Final Protective Fire) option to indicate On the Navigation screen, the system has the ability to display the location of
an entire battery or mortar platoon firing. If this option is chosen, the any hostiles within the route or waypoints the operator has selected to navigate.
Priority Target option is also checked and disabled from being These hostiles will be shown on the moving compass that appears on this screen.
unchecked. To view these hostiles, the operator has the ability to define the thresholds as to
17. Tap to the right of the AF (Adjustment of Fire) field to select a projectile when to indicate where a hostile is located and when an alert should appear.
or shell type.
1. To access the Define Thresholds screen, tap the icon (Figure 4-24).
: Currently fire support computers do not process coordinated Illumination
missions properly. This type of mission must be transmitted as two (2) CFF missions, one
specifying the Illumination and a second specifying the HE.
: For Continuous Illumination missions, you must select the Illum option as the
FFE1 Shell, and specify a Distribution (i.e., 1-Gun Illum, 2-Gun Illum, etc.).
18. Tap to the right of the AF field for the Fuze type selection.
: The AF Shell/Fuze data will be sent “only” when transmitting to an Army VMF
configured unit. If the receiving unit is configured under another format, this data will not be
transmitted.
19. Tap to the right of the FFE1 and FFE2 (Fire For Effect) fields to select a
Figure 4-32 Mark Location Screen
projectile or shell type. When FFE1 is set to HE/WP, the FFE2 field is
unavailable. 2. Enter the appropriate values in the fields for Do not display hostiles
when… and Display alert when hostiles are…
AF FFE1 FFE2
3. Place check mark if you wish to Adjust alert threshold based on speed.
HE HE HE
WP HE/WP WP 4. Lastly, tap and select a value to Use GPS position for navigation when
WP (Smoke) WP Illum accuracy is…
HC (Smoke) WP (Smoke) DPICM 5. When complete, tap .
FLT WDG (Smoke) HC (Smoke)
Illum FLT WDG (Smoke) 4.4.4 Edit Menu Overview
DPICM Illum
DPICM The PFED application allows for limited user customization and setup. These
Copperhead options are available through the menu accessible from the Main PFED
Excalibur
screen. Depending on the particular handheld hardware, the menu may
appear at the top or bottom left of the main screen. The menu allows you to
: If the option WP Smoke, HC Smoke or FLT WDG Smoke is selected in the FFE1
field, you will be required to enter the information pertinent to a quick smoke mission.
set and customize:
DRAFT 199 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 72 March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual
Address/Unit List: allows you to maintain a list of organizational unit Moving Overhead Cover
recipients for message transmission Observing
Own Unit Info: Here you may set your Call Sign, Unit Name, Unit Recon
Reference Number (URN), ID, Service, Role, Echelon, System Type, Refueling
and Laser Information Securing
Devices: allows you to configure peripheral devices that may be Withdrawing
connected to your system (i.e., sensors or radios), and network
configurations 8.2.2 CFF - Extended (Screen 2)
Map Datum Info: Allows the selection of the Ellipsoid, Datum and
The second CFF - Extended screen is used to enter additional information for
Area
the CFF, including the method of engagement and method of fire and control.
Fire Support: Sub-menu allows you to maintain Target Numbering,
Planned Target Lists, Known Points, CFF Templates and
FSCMs/Geometries information 15. Tap to move to the second CFF screen (Figure 8-4). If you wish to
Prefs (Preferences): Sub-menu allows you to enable/disable the Auto return to the first CFF screen tap .
Position Reporting feature. Default units of measure and formats may
be maintained to specify Position, Distance, Direction, Method of Engagement
Altitude/Elevation and Speed. You may also set the hotkeys to perform
a shortcut CFF transmission and configure the messaging preferences The method of engagement group of controls in the CFF – Extended screen is
Databases: Any data saved by PFED, such as your Inbox/Outbox, used to describe the attack of the target. Sub-elements include trajectory (i.e.,
report’s and fire missions, are saved into local databases. The High Angle), type of engagement (i.e., Danger Close, High Angle, etc.),
Databases option lets you purge any or all of these databases ammunition and volleys.
Passwords: Sub-menu allows you to change your FiST password
About: Displays the PM BC logo and release date of the currently
installed PFED application : When the operator selects the Final Protective Fire (FPF) option during an Adjust
FFE mission, PFED will automatically check the Priority Target option.
4.4.5 Address/Unit List Setup
The Address/Unit List settings determine how the handheld communicates with
other units on the tactical communications network. For more detail, refer to : PFED does not automatically transition to AMC/DNL FFE when the location falls
section 5.1.2 Address/Unit List Setup. below 50 meters. The observer must select FFE for the Adjust FPF to transition to the DNL
assign FPF phase. Selection of FFE will generate an EOM on the adjust portion and a new
assign Do Not Load (DNL)/FFE FPF CFF.
4.4.6 Own Unit Information (Own Unit Info) Setup
16. At the top of this screen, tap the checkboxes to further describe the
When the system type is configured to a generic R5, that device will only trajectory and type of engagement.
receive R5 formatted messages. a. Select the Danger Close option to alert the Fire Direction Center (FDC)
that the predicted impact of the round is within the minimum safe
The device is configured as a Role of FO as the default when PFED is first distance, according to standard operating procedures, of friendly
troops. This option is automatically selected if your position is within
installed. However, it may be changed to a FiST mode at any point. When the
600 meters of the target location (refer to section 8.2.1 Danger Close
device is placed in FiST mode, the system will prompt the operator for a Conditions).
password. This password may only be changed when a valid password has been
entered. b. Select the High Angle option to specify high angle fire for the
trajectory.
When processing fire mission related messages in FiST mode, the system will c. Select the Priority option. Select Priority Target to indicate a mission
alert the user if changes are made to the fire mission related databases for local reaction time of 30 to 60 seconds (plus time of flight).
DRAFT 73 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 198 March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual
missions (missions initiated by the operator). While operating in FiST mode, the
operator may override the manual review setting for a unit on a per mission
basis at the initial CFF stage of the mission. All subsequent mission messages
for that fire mission will then be automatically routed.
1. Locate and tap . A menu similar to the following (Figure 4-33) will
display.
: The appearance of the Edit menu may differ from handheld to handheld, but the
functionality will remain the same.
2. Tap the Own Unit Info option. The Unit screen will display (Figure 4-34).
Figure 8-17 Target Types Screen Figure 8-18 Target Types List Screen
12. Select the type of target by tapping the appropriate picture graphic. This will
display a secondary screen (Figure 8-18) for a more detailed selection. Tap
the detailed information needed to describe the target. This will either
display a third screen of target subtypes, if applicable, or return you to the
previous screen with the type displayed.
Edit Menu
: To close the list to select a different platform icon, tap anywhere outside of the list.
: For Illumination missions, the standard selection for Target Type/Subtype is
Terrain/Unknown.
Figure 4-33 PFED Edit Menu Screen Figure 4-34 Unit Screen
Activity
13. To the right of the Activity field, tap to select the appropriate action.
Degree of Protection/Posture
14. To the right of the Protection field, tap to identify the appropriate
protection.
Activity Protection
Attacking In The Open
Defending Prone
Delaying Prand
Engaging Prug
Fortifying Dug In
DRAFT 197 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 74 March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual
Figure 8-16 Target Size/Shape Screen
Figure 4-35 Laser Information Screen
7. To enter the Strength value, use the keypad.
3. Because PFED’s underlying message formats and communications
protocols require certain information from an observer, there are several 8. Select a Shape to establish the size information in more detail. For
required fields on the Unit screen. These are Call Sign, ID, Unit Name and Rect(angle) and Irreg(ular), enter values for the Length, Width and
URN. Attitude. For Line, enter a Length and Attitude. For Circ(le), enter a
Radius value.
: Naming conventions for the Call Sign, ID, Unit Name, Laser Code, Role and
Echelon fields should be identified in the unit Tactical Standard Operating Procedures : The Rectangle and Irregular field’s normal setup would be Length = Meters,
(TACSOP). The URN field information can be obtained from the unit TACSOP or AFATDS. Width = Meters and Attitude = Mils Grid.
4. When each text field is tapped to enter/change information, a keypad will 9. Do not forget to tap for each of these fields to select the measurement
display at the bottom of the screen (Figure 3-1). Enter or change values (i.e., Meters, Kilometers, Feet, etc).
information in these fields by tapping the desired keys on the pop-up
keypad. When one field is complete, tap on the next field. 10. When complete, tap .
5. The Service, Role and Echelon fields are all drop-down selection lists and Type (Required)
filtered based on the service selected. Tap to the right of each field name
and tap the appropriate selection from the displayed list. 11. The system default for the Target Type is set to Unknown Personnel,
Service Role Echelon however this may be changed. If needed, tap to select a different
Air Force Administrative Air Army Target Type. This will display the Target Type screen (Figure 8-17).
Army Aerial Observer Air Command
Coast Guard Airbourne Commando Air Control Party
Navy Airbourne Infantry Air Corps
Marines Air Cavalry Air Detachment
Joint Air Defense Artillery Air Division
Composite Airmobile Infantry Air Element
Unknown Air-to-Air Missile Air Flight
Air-to-Surface Missile Air Group
Amphibious Assault Air Regiment
DRAFT 75 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 196 March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual
Amphibious Engineers Air Squadron
Amphibious Tank Air Wing
Antiair Warfare Army Group
Antiarmor Missile Battalion
Antisubmarine Warfare Battery
Armor Border District HQ
Armored Cavalry Brigade
Army Aviation Combat Command
Artillery Unit Command
Assault Engineers Company
Assault Landing Corps
Biological Ordnance Detachment
Capable
Bomber Division
Cavalry Divisional Artillery
Figure 8-14 Imagery Interface Error Figure 8-15 Imagery Interface Group
Prompt Confirmation Prompt Chemical Field Army
Combat Engineers Fleet
Target Description Combat Observation Front
Team
Combat Service Support Group
The target description allows entry of target information in the Size, Target
Type, Activity and Protection. The Target Number for the target you are Combat Type Unknown Group of Forces
describing is located to the right of the Size field. When calling for fire on a Combined Arms Group of Fronts
new target, this number is automatically assigned by the system from your Commando Komendatura
allocated target block previously entered in the Auto Target Numbering screen Composite Warfare Major Fleet
Command
accessible from the Main PFED screen (Edit/Fire Support/Target
Dismounted Cavalry National Defense
Numbering). However, the target number will be blanked out for immediate Headquarters
missions until a message to observer is received. Electronic Counter Naval Detachment
Measures
Size Electronic Support Naval Division
Measures
The number displayed in the gray box to the right of the # Size button is the Engineer Naval Force
target’s strength, or number of targets being observed. You can also enter EW Coordinator Naval Group
information describing the target’s general shape, physical dimensions and Field Artillery Naval Section
orientation (attitude). Fighter Naval Squadron
Fighter Bomber Naval Task Element
Fire Direction Center Naval Task Force
6. To enter the Size, you can either tap to increase/decrease the value, or
Firing Platform Naval Task Group
tap to display the Size screen (Figure 8-16) that allows you to Fire Support Officer Naval Task Unit
enter a description of the target shape. Fire Support Team Numbered Fleet
Fire Support Element Other
Forward Observer Otryad
Frog SSM Unit Patrol
DRAFT 195 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 76 March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual
Gun Howitzer Platoon
Helicopter Regiment
Infantry Regimental Artillery
Group : Significant increases in Leica 21B/Viper II average azimuth errors may occur
Infantry on Foot Section when the PFED and PFED/PLGR devices were relocated without being recalibrated
(standard cable length). The devices must be recalibrated when relocated.
Intelligence Squad
Maintenance Squadron
Marine Expeditionary Task Element 8.2.1.1.5 Imagery Data Method
Brigade
Marine Expeditionary Task Force
Force
a. Tap to access the Imagery Data screen (Figure 8-11).
Marine Expeditionary Task Group
Unit
b. To accept the location tap or to not accept.
Mechanized Infantry Task Unit
Medical Theater Army
Military School or Troop 8.2.1.1.6 Refine Imagery Data
Academy
a. Once a location has been set using one of the above methods, tap
Mining Zastrova
Mortar Unknown Location ( ) to refine it.
Motorized Rifle Troops
Mountain Infantry
Navy Infantry/Marines b. Tap to send the current location to the interface
Nuclear Ordnance application (i.e., PFI viewer). If the current location is not sent to the
Capable Unit interface application correctly, an error prompt will appear (Figure
8-14). If the data is correctly sent a Confirmation screen will briefly
Other
appear (Figure 8-15). If this screen does not disappear after a few
Ordnance
moments tap to pass it and display the Interface Viewer
Paramilitary
screen (Figure 8-12).
Picket
Pontoon c. To refine the position tap then drag the crosshair ( ) to the
Railroad Troops appropriate location.
Ranger
Reconnaissance d. Tap at the top to grab the new crosshair location.
Reconnaissance, Armor e. Send this new position to PFED by tapping in the viewer.
Sapper (Mine)
Scud SSM Unit
f. After a few moments the Imagery Data screen will reappear with the
Signal/Electronics new location. Tap to accept the refined location.
Special Forces
Supply
Surface-to-Air Missile
Surface-to-Surface
Missile
Surveillance
Tank
Tank, Light
DRAFT 77 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 194 March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual
Tank, Medium
Tank, Heavy
Flashes between Tank, Destroyer
Black & Grey Tank, Recovery
Training
Transport
Transportation
Weather
Unknown
: When the operator chooses a Role of Fire Support Officer, Fire Support
Element or Fire Support Team (setting the handheld in FiST mode), the system will allow
the customization of the routing of messages within the Address/Unit List menu option
(refer to section 5.1.2.3 Message Configuration for further information).
Figure 8-13 LRF Data Pop-up Screen 6. Tap to the right of the System Type field and select the appropriate
option for the handhelds configuration (i.e., AFATDS, FOS, TACP, R5,
SWB2, SWB3, PFED).
: The Distance field will flash when there is a possible Danger Close situation. The
EPE field will flash when it is beyond +/- 50 meters. The Time Of Flight (TOF) field will
flash when the lazed information is beyond the threshold of the devices current operator : The Laser Code field must meet the following conditions: first digit = 0 or 1;
position information. second digit = 1 through 7; third and fourth digits = 1 through 8.
c. When finished, tap to calculate the position and return to the 7. Tap to enter the laser code information (Figure 4-35). Each digit of
CFF screen, or tap to discard the lazing information and try the Laser Code field is filtered allowing only the appropriate numbers to be
again. selected.
: If you took measurements using your LRF before entering the CFF screen, you : When transmitting a message with Visibility information, the operator may specify
an actual value such as 2500 meters. However, during transmission this value is converted
to an enumeration defining range. When transmitting a message with Cloud Height
can tap to calculate the target’s position without having to retake the information, the operator can specify an actual value such as 2533 meters. However
measurements. If the measurements have expired beyond the systems designated time during transmission this value is converted by dividing by 100. This results in different
frame, the system will prompt the operator that the information is too old to retain. values being seen on PFED and FOS/AFATDS.
d. If you do not have an LRF device physically connected to the PFED 8. Complete this screen by entering any Cloud Height and/or Visibility
system, you can enter the data obtained by lazing the target with the information.
LRF into the PFED system manually.
9. When complete, tap .
e. Laze the target using the LRF to determine the target’s range, direction
and elevation data. These values will be visible on your LRF display. 10. Tap to select the needed Platform Type (refer to section 8.2.1 CFF
f. Then use the Polar method to enter the information (refer to section (Screen 1) – Target Description for information on completing the Target
8.2.1.1.2 Polar Location Method). Type field, also known as platform type in the unit information).
11. When complete, tap until you have returned to the PFED Main
screen.
DRAFT 193 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 78 March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual
4.4.7 Map Datum Information (Map Datum Info) Setup the polar data received. When the screen is displayed, it presents the offset data
between the forward observer’s own location and the calculated target. The user
A local Map Datum can be defined for use within the PFED application from the can then call up that same position by clicking on the ‘LRF’ button on the
Map Datum Info Setup screen. By default, the datum used by the PFED system location panel of any report type that uses positional data. The data shown in
is the WGS 84. If the FO selects a different datum for use with the PFED the pop up window will be different if the user has moved since it is based on of
system, all positions displayed within PFED will be in the selected local datum. the calculated position of the original target lazed. This ensures that the polar
data originally received from the LRF is only applied to the position of the FO at
If there is a GPS device attached to PFED, it is assumed that the GPS device is time of laze. However, if the target/entity has moved and two consecutive lazes
set in WGS 84 and that all data received from the GPS device is WGS 84 data. are taken within twelve (12) seconds, the heading and speed will be calculated
When data is received from the GPS device, it is transformed to the local datum using both lazed values.
selected by the FO using the Molodensky formula.
When the FO manually inputs polar data, or fires the laser to obtain polar data : The PLGR CON setting must be used for the Mark VII, Leica V4, 21A and 21B. If
from his position to define a target position, the T. Vincenty formula is used with the LRF is not set in PLGR CON, you will be presented with the alert “LRF not set to use
the ellipsoid data for the selected local datum. PLGR CON. Set to PLGR CON and Laze again.”
Map information is used by PFED to determine how to calculate geodetic
locations (coordinates on the earth), not to identify map area of operation like : Any LRFs which allow the user to change the Northing Reference must be set into
AFATDS, FOS, etc. These settings are necessary to ensure that your location is Magnetic. If the output of data is not set to Magnetic, you will be presented with the alert
calculated accurately on your PFED system and plotted correctly on AFATDS. “LRF Northing Reference not set to MAGNETIC. Set Northing Reference to MAGNETIC
They also affect target locations and how laser range finder data is interpreted. and laze again.”
All setup data should be displayed on the bottom of your field map.
: When using an LRF device, no compensation should be made within the LRF for
magnetic variation.
: When entering the Map Datum Information, be aware that if the physical a. Ensure that a LRF unit is attached to the PFED device and is
paper maps are not current, this data may be different from what AFATDS and FOS may configured in the PFED application.
contain. If this incorrect datum information is entered into PFED, this can cause conversion
errors when messages are transmitted to AFATDS and/or FOS due to the miss-match of b. Use your LRF option to laze the target. This will transmit the target’s
the datum information. range, direction and elevation data to your PFED system. The location
obtained by lazing (Figure 8-13) will be shown in the location panel on
the first CFF screen (refer to section 5.1.1 Device Setup).
1. Tap then tap the Map Datum Info option to display the Map Datum
Information screen (Figure 4-36). The Datum, Area and Ellipsoid fields
operate as drop-down selection list fields.
DRAFT 79 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 192 March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual
: The normal setup for a Polar method would be Direction = Mils Grid, Distance =
Meters and Vertical Difference = Meters.
: When entering data of any kind, verify the values are correct before tapping
any Ok, Send, Save or any other process button.
c. When finished, tap . The target location entered will display in
the Location box on the CFF screen.
8.2.1.1.3 Shift From Known Point
a. To the right of the Point field, tap to select the known point. Figure 4-36 Map Datum Setup Screen
b. Tap the appropriate button to select between Rgt (right) or Lft (left)
Lateral shift. Then use the available keypad to enter the left or right 4.4.7.1 Datum/Area/Ellipsoid
Lateral shift value.
The Datum, Area and Ellipsoid fields filter and default off of each other based
c. To the right of this field, tap to select the appropriate measurement. on what value is selected in any one field. For example:
d. Tap the appropriate button to select between Add or Drp (drop) Range
shift. Then use the available keypad to enter add or drop Range shift If you choose a Datum of Guam 1963, the Area field will display Guam
value. and the Ellipsoid field will show Clarke 1866. When you tap the drop-
e. To the right of this field, tap to select the appropriate measurement. down for the Ellipsoid and Area fields, the selection lists will show
only those values that pertain to the Guam 1963 datum.
f. Tap the appropriate button to select between Up or Dwn (down)
Vertical shift. Then use the available keypad to enter the up or down
Vertical shift value. Or, if you select an Area of Hong Kong, the Datum field will display
Hong Kong 1963 and the Ellipsoid field will display International
g. To the right of this field, tap to select the appropriate measurement. 1924. Again, when you tap the drop-down for the Datum and Ellipsoid
fields, the selection lists will show only those values that pertain to the
Hong Kong area.
: When entering data of any kind, verify the values are correct before tapping When a selection has been made in any of these fields, the other 2 fields will
any Ok, Send, Save or any other process button.
also contain a selection of Show All. This will allow the operator to display the
entire selection list for that field if a different option needs to be chosen.
h. When finished, tap . The target location entered will display in
the Location box on the CFF screen.
8.2.1.1.4 Laser Data Method
The data received from the LRF is polar data; meaning a range, direction and
vertical difference between the LRF and the lazed target. When PFED receives
this data, it calculates a target based on the forward observer’s own position and
DRAFT 191 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 80 March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual
: This display message is a dynamically created message. If the values for Auto
Position Reporting feature are changed the system displays the time frame listed in the
Auto Position Report. If the values for the Auto Position Reporting feature are not changed
the system uses a default of 5 minutes.
8.2.1.1.1 Grid Location Method
Ellipsoid Value
a. At the top left of the screen, tap to select the format you wish to use
to define the grid coordinates. The options include Decimal Degrees,
Deg:Min:Sec, MGRS (default) or UTM.
b. Use the available keypad to enter the grid coordinates (Easting and
Northing) of the target. You may enter a six (6), eight (8), or ten (10)
digit grid.
Datum Value c. Use the available keypad to enter the Altitude of the target.
d. Use the available keypad to enter the Heading and Speed of the
target.
e. Under each of these fields, tap to select the appropriate
measurement.
: When entering data of any kind, verify the values are correct before tapping
any Ok, Send, Save or any other process button.
Figure 4-37 Field Map Legend
2. Tap to the right of the Datum field name then tap the item you wish to
select. Make sure that the horizontal datum selection matches the value : A FOS device processes attitudes in 100's of Mils. Because of this, any attitude
that is listed on the bottom of your field map (Figure 4-37) and the value that is less than 100 will appear as 0. If an attitude of 100 is transmitted, then FOS will
loaded on AFATDS. If these are not the same, your location may be off by show it as 1. If an attitude of 200 is transmitted, then FOS will show it as 2, etc.
as much as 500 meters or more. Tap Show All to view all available options:
f. When finished, tap . The target location entered will display in
World Geodetic System Fort Thomas 1955 North Sahara 1959
the Location box on the CFF screen.
1984
World Geodetic System GAN 1970 Observatorio Meterologica
1972 1939 8.2.1.1.2 Polar Location Method
Adindan Geodetic Datum 1949 Old Egyptian 1907
Afgooye Graciosa Base SW 1948 Old Hawaiian a. Using the available keypad, enter the Direction, Distance, Vert(ical)
Diff(erence), Heading and Speed of the target. To move between
Ain al Abd 1970 Guam 1963 Oman
American Somoa 1962 Gunung Segara Ordinance GB 1936 fields, tap on the Label (i.e., ) of the field you want to enter.
Anna 1 Astro 1965 Gux 1 Astro Pico De Las Nieves
b. To the right of each of these fields, tap to select the appropriate
Antigua Island Astro Herat North Pitcairn Astro 1967 measurement.
1943
Arc 1950 Hermannskogel Point 58
DRAFT 81 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 190 March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual
Arc 1960 Hjorsey 1955 Pointe Noire 1948
Ascension Island 1958 Hong Kong 1963 Porto Santo SE Base
1936
Astro Beacon ‘E’ 1945 Hu-Tzu-Shan Prov. S American 1956
Astro DOS 71 4 Indian Provisional South Chilean
1963
Astro Tern Island 1961 Indian 1954 Puerto Rico-Virgin Island
Astronomical Station Indian 1960 Pulkovo 1942
1952
Australian Geodetic Indian 1975 Qatar National
1966
Australian Geodetic Indonesian 1974 Qornog
1984
Ayabelle Lighthouse Ireland 1965 Reunion
Bellevue IGN ISTS 061 Astro 1968 Rome 1940
Figure 8-10 LRF Data Screen
Bermuda 1957 ISTS 073 Astro 1969 S-42 (Pulkovo 1942)
Figure 8-11 Imagery Data Screen Bissau Johnston Island 1961 Santo (DOS) 1965
Bogota Observatory Kandawala Sao Braz
Bukit Rimpah Kerguelen Island 1949 Sapper Hill 1943
Camp Area Astro Kertau 1948 Schwarzeck
Campo Inchauspe 1969 Kusaie Astro 1951 Selvagem Grande 1938
Canton Astro 1966 L.C. 5 Astro 1961 Sierra Leone 1960
Cape Leigon S-JTSK
Cape Canaveral Liberia 1964 South American 1969
Carthage Luzon South Asia
Chatham Island Astro M’Poraloko Tananarive Observatory
1971 1925
Chua Astro Mahe 1971 Timbalai 1948
Coordinate System Massawa Tokyo
1937
Corrego Alegre Merchich Tristan Astro 1968
Dabola Midway Astro 1961 Viti Levu 1916
Deception Island Minna Voirol 1874
Figure 8-12 Interface Viewer for Refining Position
Djarkata Monserrat Island Astro Voirol 1960
1958
DOS 1968 Nahrwan Wake Island Astro 1952
: If your PFED device is not connected to a GPS device, the system will display a Easter Island 1967 Naparima: BWI Wake-Eniwetok 1960
prompt message. The message will note the problem based on which option, time or
European 1950 North American 1927 Yacare
distance, has been set.
European 1979 North American 1983 Zanderij
If time is set, the message will contain a reference such as “Your position has not been
updated in # minutes.” If distance is set, the message will contain a reference such as
“Your position is not guaranteed to within # meters.” If both are set, the message will : Make sure that your PLGR is configured to output WGS-84 Datum.
contain a reference to the option that has expired first. If this message appears, the
operator should tap Yes to manually enter their new location. 3. If there are multiple options associated with the selected Datum, the Area
field may be blank. To select an associated area, tap to the right of the
DRAFT 189 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 82 March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual
Area field name then tap the area you wish to select. Tap Show All to view
all available options:
Afghanistan Deception Island Lesotho Salvage Islands
Africa-East (Mean) Diego Garcia Liberia San Salvador
Africa-South- Djibouti Madagascar Sardinia
Central (Mean)
Africa-West (Mean) Easter Island Madeira Island Saudi Arabia
Alaska Eastern Canada Malawi Scotland
Albania Ecuador Malaysia Senegal
Alberta Egypt Mali Seychelles
Aleutian Islands England Malta Sicily
Aleutian Islands E England (Mean) Manado Sierra Leone
of 180W
Aleutian Islands W England: Wales Manitoba Singapore
of 180W
Algeria Espirito Santo Marcus Island Somalia Figure 8-7 Grid Location Screen Figure 8-8 Polar Location Screen
Island
Amazon River Estonia Marshall Island Samoa
Antarctica Ethiopia Mascarene Island South Africa Point Designator
Argentina Europe (Mean) Masirah Island South America
(Mean)
Ascension Island Europe-Western Maui South Georgia
(north border) Islands
Australia Falkland Island Mexico South Korea
Azores Fiji Island Micronesia Sri Lanka
BR-Channel Island Finland Midway Island St. Helena Lateral Range Meters from
Bahamas Florida Mindanao Island St. Kitts & Vertical Target to Point
Bahrain Gabon Morocco Sudan Shift Options
Baltra Galapagos Island Muscat Surinam
Bangkok Germany Nambia Swaziland
Bangladesh Ghana Nepal Sweden
Bermuda Greece Nevis Taiwan
Bolivia Greenland New Georgia Tanzania Figure 8-9 Shift From Known Point Screen
Borneo Guadalcanal New Hebrides Tern Island
Botswana Guam New South Wales Thailand
Brazil Guinea-Bissau New Zealand Tobago
British Columbia Guyana Niger Tokyo (Mean)
Burkina Faso Hawaii Nigeria Trinidad
Burundi Hawaii (Mean) Northwest Tristan da Cunha
Territories
CONUS Hebrides Oahu Tunisia
Cameroon Hong Kong Okinawa US
Canada Hungary Oman US Eastern
DRAFT 83 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 188 March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual
cancel out of the Danger Close alert, the message is not sent, but the message Canal Zone Iceland Ontario US Western
will be set in a Danger Close state (if applicable). Canary Island Indonesia Pakistan United Arab
Emirates
8.2.1.1 Location Entry Caribbean Iran Paraguay Uruguay
Cayman Brac BWI Iraq Peru Venezuela
Central America Ireland Philippines Vietnam (Con
4. Tap to display the selection window for choosing Son Island)
the appropriate Location Method (Figure 8-6). Chatham Island Israel Phoenix Island Vietnam (Hanoi)
Chile Iwo Jima Pitcairn Island Vietnam (Mean)
Chile-North Japan Poland Wake Atoll
Chile-South Johnston Island Portugal Wales
Cocos Island Jordan Puerto Rico Worldwide
Colombia Kauai Qatar Yugoslavia
Congo Kazakhstan Quandahar Yukon
Cuba Kenya Republic of Zaire
Maldives
Cyprus Kerguelen Island Rio Branco Zambia
Figure 8-6 Location Method Selection Screen
Czech Republic Latvia Romania Zimbabwe
5. Tap the appropriate button to bring up a Location Entry screen, or use your Czechoslovakia Leeward Islands Russia
LRF device to designate the target and automatically enter the location.
4. If there are multiple options associated with the selected Datum and Area,
Depending upon the location method selected; Grid Location (Figure 8-7),
the Ellipsoid field may be blank. To select an associated ellipsoid, tap to
Polar Location (Figure 8-8), Shift from Known Point (Figure 8-9), Laser Data
the right of the Ellipsoid field name then tap the ellipsoid value you wish to
(Figure 8-10), Use Imagery Data (Figure 8-11), or Refine Position via
select (the Ellipsoid value will be the Spheroid value on the field map [Figure
Imagery (Figure 8-12); the appropriate screen will be displayed.
4-37]).
World Geodetic System 1972 GRS 80
World Geodetic System 1984 Helmert 1906
: Remember to tap at the bottom of the screen. If the located at Airy Hough
the top right-hand corner is used, a message will display informing the operator that “if Australian National Indonesian 1974
confirmed” the system will disregard any entries made and return the operator to the
previous screen. Bessel 1841 International 1924
Bessel 1941 Krassovsky 1940
Clarke 1866 Modified Airy
Clarke 1880 Modified Fischer 1960
Everest South American 1969
Everest 1948
: A check is performed when you tap OK in the Map Datum Info screen to verify
that the datum selected supports the current position. If it does not, the system will alert
you and switch the system to WGS-84 Datum. A check is also performed when the
operators position changes to ensure that the datum supports the new position. If the
operator’s position is not supported by the selected datum, PFED will switch to the WGS 84
datum and alert the operator of this change.
5. When all map information is entered, tap .
DRAFT 187 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 84 March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual
4.4.7.2 Grid Declination and Magnetic Variance
: The Imagery Data option is only available when there is refinement data available.
Grid Declination is the number of mils from Grid North to True North. This
value is used for converting from mils or degrees Grid to mils or degrees True
and back. PFED calculates this value based on the current Datum selected and
current user position. : The Refine Position option will only be available once a location has been
entered. This option is used to help define a location in more detail.
: The value displayed may be different from that shown on a paper map for the Danger Close Conditions
operator’s area. This is due to the fact that the paper map’s value for Grid Convergence is
based on the center of the map and the map’s age. A Danger Close condition within the PFED application is defined when the
distance between the FO and the target being fired upon is less than 600 meters.
Magnetic Variance is the number of mils from Magnetic North to True North. A check for a Danger Close condition is performed when there is an LRF
This value is used for converting from mils or degrees Magnetic to mils or attached to the PFED and it is fired, or when it is manually selected. The data
degrees True and back. PFED calculates this value based on the World received is checked to see if it is below 600 meters.
Magnetic Model 2005.
If it is, an alert is presented to the FO to warn of the Danger Close condition
(Figure 8-5). If this is performed while in the Call for Fire screen, or the Air
: The value displayed for Magnetic Variance may differ from values displayed on the Crew Briefing screen, then the FO will not be alerted again when he attempts to
PLGR, LLDR or other systems. This is due to the fact that other systems such as PLGR
may be using an earlier version of the World Magnetic Model (such as 2000). send the message from that screen (see next paragraph). For validity, if the LRF
data is invalid, a popup is displayed that states ‘Bad LRF data’ or ‘<<Type>>
4.4.8 Devices Setup Error’ (could be distance or azimuth, this message is only shown for LRF’s that
denote the type of error that was encountered). If the LRF data is valid, a popup
Communication settings determine how the handheld communicates with the is displayed that shows the data received from the LRF, a position is calculated
radio, GPS receiver, laser range finder, and any other external devices. For from this data and FO’s position, and PFED sets the position within the screen
more detail, refer to section 5.1.1.1 Configuring Devices. where the FO is currently located in the PFED application (this can be any
report that uses positional data; [e.g., CFF, SALUTE/ATI, NBC1, etc.]).
4.4.9 Fire Support Setup - Target Numbering
The Target Numbering option allows you to enter your allocated block of target
numbers, and enables automatic assignment of target numbers to new fire
missions you initiate. This information will either be retrieved from the unit
TACSOP or given to the operator from the FiST Chief.
1. To display the Auto Target Numbering screen (Figure 4-38), tap the
following: , Fire Support then Target Numbering. Figure 8-5 Danger Close Warning Screen
If the FO attempts to send a message that uses the FO’s location for calculation
of a position, the calculated position is checked for a distance less than 600
meters. An alert is presented to the FO denoting a Danger Close condition is
present. If the FO elects to send the message anyway, the message will be set in
a Danger Close state (if applicable) and the message is sent. If the FO elects to
DRAFT 85 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 186 March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual
Figure 4-38 Auto Target Numbering Screen
Figure 8-3 Call For Fire (Screen 1) Figure 8-4 Call For Fire - Extended
(Screen 2) 2. In the Start field, enter the first target number of your assigned block (two-
letter prefix followed by four digits).
8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) 3. In the End field, enter the four digits of the last target number assigned to
you. Once this is complete, the Next field displays the target number that
Certain fields are required on the first CFF screen before you can send a fire will be automatically assigned to the next fire mission you initiate. This field
mission or access the second CFF - Extended screen. may not be edited.
4. The Increment field defaults to 1. However, this value can be modified to
Mission Type (Required) establish an alternate incremental increase of the next automatically
assigned target number (e.g., last target number used = 6, increment value
3. Tap the appropriate button to select a Mission Type of either Adjust Fire, = 3, next number assigned = 9).
Fire for Effect, Imm(ediate) Smoke or Imm(ediate) Suppression. The Adjust
Fire option is set as the default. 5. When complete, tap .
Location (Required)
: You will not be able to use the CFF function unless you have entered a target
block.
There are five options for entering a target location: Grid, Polar, Shift from
known point, Laser Data and Imagery Data.
4.4.10 Fire Support Setup - Planned Target List
The Planned Target List option allows you to enter a list of planned targets.
: The Shift from known point method is only available when known points have This option is used to pre-format a target description and location for each
been entered into the system via the Edit/Fire Support/Known Points menu.
planned target.
1. To display the Planned Target List screen (Figure 4-39), tap the following:
: The Laser Data method of location is only available when a LRF (i.e., Mark VII) is , Fire Support then Planned Target List.
connected to your PFED and configured in the PFED application.
DRAFT 185 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 86 March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual
8.2 CALL FOR FIRE REQUEST
: If the operator’s position location has not been updated within a specified system
time period, PFED will display a message prompt asking for updated coordinates. The
operator may change this information at this time or pass the prompt message to update
the location at a later date. 1. Tap on the Main PFED screen. If the device has been configured
as a FiST unit, then a pop-up screen will display requesting the operator to
4.4.10.1 Creating New Targets select whether they wish to create the message as a Local or Non-Local
message (Figure 8-1).
2. To clear all target information and create a new planned target, tap .
3. In the Target Number field, enter a target number value using the available
keypad. This number is defaulted to the next available target number in
your assigned target block. a. To process this message as a Local message tap .
4. Select the Mission Type (e.g., AF (Adjust Fire) or FFE (Fire for Effect)). b. To process this message with a subordinate unit as a Non-Local
5. Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on completing the message, tap one of the units listed in the Non-Local (Subordinate)
Location field. list. Once the selection is made, the system will display the first CFF
screen with the selected subordinate shown in the title bar (Figure 8-2).
6. Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for information
on completing the Size field.
7. Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for information
on completing the Target Type field (this field defaults to Unknown
Personnel).
8. Tap to access the CFF – [Target #] screen (Figure 4-40). Refer to
section 8.2.2 CFF - Extended (Screen 2) for instructions on completing this
screen.
Figure 8-1 Local/Non-Local Selection
Figure 8-2 Subordinate Selection
Example
2. The system will then go directly to the first CFF screen (Figure 8-3).
: Tap to clear any CFF information and begin again.
Figure 4-39 Target List Screen Figure 4-40 CFF - [Target #] Screen
9. When this screen is complete, tap to return to the main Planned
Target List screen.
DRAFT 87 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 184 March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire PFED User Manual Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual
10. Once all target information is entered, tap . The new target will
CHAPTER 8 display at the Planned Target List screen.
CALL FOR FIRE
4.4.10.2 Modify Existing Targets
11. To modify information in an existing planned target, tap on the existing
8.1 INTRODUCTION target in the list to select it. Follow steps 3 through 10 above (section
4.4.10.1).
The CFF preformatted screen allows you to quickly enter necessary information
for a CFF, including mission type, target location, and target description. 4.4.10.3 Removing Existing Targets
Additional parameters, such as method of control and method of engagement,
may be entered if desired. After a fire mission is initiated using PFED, and
: You will not be able to remove a planned target if it is an active mission.
received by AFATDS, you can monitor the mission, adjust firing, make
subsequent corrections and send end-of-mission. 12. To remove an exiting planned target, tap on the existing target in the list to
select it. Tap to remove it.
4.4.10.4 Exit Screen
: When entering data of any kind, verify the values are correct before tapping 13. To exit the screen, tap at the top right.
any Ok, Send, Save or any other process button.
4.4.11 Fire Support Setup – CFF Templates
8.1.1 Fire Support Message Processing
The CFF Templates option allows you to create commonly used CFF missions
When the device is configured as a FiST unit, PFED will allow the operator to as templates that can be sent more quickly. These pre-filled fire mission
designate fire support messages (including initial calls for fire, subsequent templates, that may include any elements of the CFF, can be linked to hotkey
adjustments and end of missions) initiated by the subordinates to be sent as a (shortcut key) buttons on the PFED device. To initiate a mission using a pre-
“copy” to up to four (4) units in their Unit List (three [3] plus their primary). filled template, the operator would press the appropriate button, laze the target
These messages can also be sent as a plain text message, or carbon copy, to up and manually send the mission.
to four (4) units in their Unit List. These units will be mutually exclusive from
the units designated as receiving an actual copy of the message. Before creating the CFF templates, you must first assign the buttons to their
correct functions. To configure the hotkey buttons for the pre-filled CFF
8.1.2 Initial Fire Mission Processing templates, refer to section 4.4.16 Preferences (Prefs) Setup – Hotkeys.
When the device is configured as a FiST unit, PFED will allow the operator to 1. Once all hotkey buttons are assigned properly, display the first CFF
initiate a CFF for a subordinate unit and to specify what addresses in addition to Templates Setup screen (Figure 4-41) by tapping , Fire Support then
the primary should receive this CFF. When a fire mission is received from a CFF Templates.
subordinate unit, who is configured for Review routing in the Unit List, the
system will allow the operator to override this routing process to Automatic or
FR Approval on any subsequent fire support messages received for that mission.
DRAFT 183 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 88 March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual
c. To delete all requests, tap .
d. To exit the Open Report/Request screen, tap at the top right.
Figure 4-41 CFF Templates Setup Figure 4-42 CFF Templates Setup
Screen 1 Screen 2
Notice that the CFF Template Setup screens (Figure 4-41 and Figure 4-42) are
very similar to the CFF mission screens. The template screens allow you to
create a fire mission using all of the same CFF information. One major
difference between both of the first CFF screens is the Button Number field
located at the top right side of the Target Description area. On the template
screen, the Button Number field is used to select which hotkey button will be
associated with the completed template.
2. In the Button Number field, tap and select the button this template will be
associated to.
: If you have already assigned a new template to a button number, and you
mistakenly choose the same button number for another template, the second template will
replace the previous one originally saved. You will need to re-create the first template and
save it to another button number.
3. To create a template, complete both of the CFF mission template screens
as you would when creating a CFF mission (refer to sections 8.2.1 CFF
(Screen 1) and 8.2.2 CFF - Extended (Screen 2) for information on
completing both screens).
: When entering data of any kind, verify the values are correct before tapping
any Ok, Send, Save or any other process button.
DRAFT 89 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 182 March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual
40. On the Egress screen, you may choose a compass direction by tapping on
the compass diagram. This will disable the Pull-Out Offset section and set 4. Save the template by tapping .
its value to N/G (not given).
5. Tap to clear both screens and repeat this process to create each
41. If the Egress value is to be a Pull-Out Offset option, you may choose this by template.
tapping any of the available buttons at the bottom of the screen.
42. To clear the compass diagram and enable the Pull-Out Offset section, tap
: The option may be found on other PFED screens and would perform in
. the same manner.
43. When finished, tap . The selected value will display in the Egress 6. To exit the screen, tap at the top right.
field. 7. Once all templates have been created and saved, they may be used for
sending fire missions (refer to section 8.2.3 Sending CFF Template Fire
Time on Target (TOT) Mission).
4.4.12 Fire Support Setup – Known Points
44. Tap to access the Date/Time Entry screen. Using , enter the
desired time on target. This field in initially set to the current system time. The Known Points menu option allows the FO to create and save known points
When finished, tap . in the PFED system using either the grid or polar methods. These known points
45. Tap the Danger Close box to check if this mission will be within 600 Meters are retained in a PFED database list. Known points may also be added to list
(Munitions Dependant) of friendly units. through the Fire Mission Monitor when sending an End Of Mission (EOM)
(refer to section 8.3.1.8 Sending EOM). This information is only stored in
PFED. Known point information is not sent or stored at FOS or AFATDS.
: Refer to section 8.2.1 Danger Close Conditions for more information on the
Danger Close processing.
1. To display the Known Points screen (Figure 4-43), tap the following: ,
Fire Support then Known Points.
Remarks
4.4.12.1 Creating New Known Points
46. Tap to access the Text Entry screen to enter any additional
remarks using the available keypad. 2. To clear all information and create a new known point, tap .
47. When finished, tap . 3. In the Point field, enter a numeric value using the available keypad. This
value should be unique for each known point created.
Send, Save, Open Buttons 4. Select the method of either Grid or Polar. This will display either the Grid
Location (Figure 4-44) or the Polar Location (Figure 4-45) screen based on
which method is chosen.
48. Tap after reviewing your report for accuracy. This will queue the
message for transmission.
49. Tap to save the report request to persistent storage for later review
and transmission.
50. Tap to access a list of previously saved report requests.
a. To open a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
.
b. To delete a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
. The selected request will be removed immediately.
DRAFT 181 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 90 March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual
7.2.9.2.3.4 Exit Mark Location List
38. To exit the Mark Location List screen and return to the AirCrew Brief (Line 8-
9) screen, tap .
Egress (Required)
39. Tap to access the Egress screen (Figure 7-43).
Figure 4-43 Known Points Screen Figure 4-44 Grid Location Screen
Figure 7-41 Mark Location Screen Figure 7-42 Mark Friendly Location List
Screen
Figure 4-45 Polar Location Screen
5. Refer to either section 8.2.1.1.1 Grid Location Method or 8.2.1.1.2 Polar
Location Method for information on completing the Grid or Polar location
screen.
6. When this screen is complete, tap to return to the main Known
Points screen.
7. Tap . The new known point will display in the Known Points list.
Figure 7-43 Egress Screen
DRAFT 91 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 180 March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual
Prone Dug In 4.4.12.2 Modify Existing Known Points
Prand Overhead Cover
8. To modify information in an existing known point, tap on the existing target
in the list to select it. Repeat steps 3 through 7 above (section 4.4.12.1).
7.2.9.2.3 AirCrew Brief (Line 8-9)
4.4.12.3 Removing Existing Known Points
26. Tap to display the third AirCrew Brief (Line 8-9) screen (Figure 7-40). 9. To remove an exiting known point, tap on the existing target in the list to
Friendly Locations select it. Tap to remove it.
4.4.12.4 Exit Screen
27. Tap to access the Mark Location List screen (Figure
7-42) for entering location information for the closest Friendly forces. 10. To exit the screen, tap at the top right.
7.2.9.2.3.1 Add New Locations 4.4.13 Fire Support Setup – FSCMs/Geometries
The Fire Support Coordination Measures (FSCMs)/Geometries option allows
28. To enter a new list item, tap to clear all fields.
the operator to view a list of received FSCMs and other battlefield geometries,
29. Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on completing the including maneuver controls and tactical graphics. When sending a CFF or
Location information.
CAS Request message, PFED will perform checks against the geometries stored
30. Tap to select a Mark and corresponding Color value (if available) for how on the system. Specifically, PFED will notify the operator if the target location
the friendly location will be indicated to the aircraft.
given in the fire support request violates any of the following coordination
a. If the Flares, Light, Panels or Colored Smoke option is selected in the measures: Coordinated Fire Line (CFL), Fire Support Coordination Line
Mark field, the Color field will be available. (FSCL), No Fire Area (NFA), Restrictive Fire Area (RFA), Restrictive Fire Line
(RFL), Zone of Responsibility (ZOR) and Forward Line of Own Troops (FLOT).
31. Tap to add the new item to the list.
PFED does not allow creation or editing of these geometries.
32. Repeat this process to enter multiple Friendly forces.
1. To display the Battlefield Geometries screen (Figure 4-46), tap the following:
7.2.9.2.3.2 Edit Existing Locations
, Fire Support then FSCMs/Geometries.
33. To modify an existing location item, tap on the listed entry to select it. 2. If you wish to filter the listed geometry types based on category, shape
34. Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on completing the (e.g. area or line), or threat, tap for one or all of the Show fields and
Location information. select the information you wish to filter.
35. Tap to select a different Mark and corresponding Color value (if 3. To view the details of a specific geometry, tap on one of listed names to
available). highlight it then tap (Figure 4-47).
a. If the Flares, Light, Panels or Colored Smoke option is selected in the
Mark field, the Color field will be available.
36. Tap to update the selected location item.
7.2.9.2.3.3 Remove Existing Locations
37. To remove a listed location, tap on the existing location entry to select it then
tap .
DRAFT 179 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 92 March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual
Mark Type (Required)
13. Tap to access the Mark Location screen (Figure 7-41) and enter
the method that will be used to indicate the target to the aircraft.
14. The Location information from the previous step will pre-fill on the Mark
Location screen. If not, repeat step 12 above.
15. Tap to select a Marking Type.
a. If the Flares, Light, Panels or Colored Smoke option is selected, the
Marking Color field will be available.
b. If the Laser Designator option is selected, the Laser Code, Laser/Tgt
Line and Attack Heading fields will be available.
16. Tap to select a Marking Color for the Flares, Light, Panels or Colored
Smoke Marking Types.
17. Tap to access the Laser Code screen. Using the available
Figure 4-46 Battlefield Geometries Figure 4-47 View Battlefield Geometry
Screen Screen (example keypad, enter the code value. When finished, tap .
4. When finished tap to return to the Battlefield Geometries screen. 18. Tap to access the Laser-Target Line screen. Use the
available keypad to enter the laser/target value. When finished, tap
.
: PFED checks fire missions for violations against the following battlefield geometry 19. Tap to select a measurement for the Laser/Tgt Line value.
types of ZOR, CFL, FSCL, RFL, RFA, NFA and FLOT.
5. If a ZOR geometry is selected, the Responsible Unit field will appear 20. Tap to access the Final Attack Heading screen. Use the
(Figure 4-48). This field allows the operator to select the unit who will be available keypad to enter the attack heading value. When finished, tap
responsible for this zone. .
21. Tap to select a measurement for the Attack Heading value.
: The operator should assign a unit who will be responsible for each ZOR. For 22. When finished with the Mark Location screen, tap .
example; the FO should assign him/herself as responsible for his/her own zone. This field
is local to PFED and is not received from the FDC system. If a zone has no unit
responsible for it, all targets will always violate the zone if short of the CFL.
Target Description - Size
23. Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for information
6. Tap . This will display the Unit List screen. on completing the Size information.
Target Description - Target Type (Required)
: If the target location is outside of the mission initiator’s ZOR, an alert will display
stating Target location is Outside Zone Of Responsibility. However, a violation has not 24. Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for information
occurred. This alert is for information only. on completing the Target Type information.
7. Tap on the unit you wish to select as the responsible party to select it. Then Protection
tap to return to the Battlefield Geometries screen. The selected
unit will appear in the Responsible Unit field (Figure 4-49). 25. Tap to select a degree of Protection value for the target.
Protection
In The Open Prug
DRAFT 93 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 178 March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual
MSN#
5. Tap in the Msn# field and enter an appropriate value using the available
keypad.
Contact Point Name
6. Tap under Contact Point and enter a name using the available
keypad.
Contact Point Location (Required)
7. Tap to access a Grid Location screen.
Refer to section 8.2.1.1.1 – Grid Location for information on completing the
Location information.
Initial Point (IP) Name Figure 4-48 Responsbile Unit Field Figure 4-49 Selected Responsible Unit
8. Tap under Initial Point and enter a name using the available keypad. 8. If you wish to remove a geometry select the item and tap or
Initial Point Location (Required) to remove all of them.
9. When complete, tap to exit the Battlefield Geometries screen.
9. Tap to access a Grid Location screen.
Refer to section 8.2.1.1.1 – Grid Location for information on completing the 4.4.14 Preferences (Prefs) Setup - Measurement Units
Location information.
The Measurement Units screen allows you to choose your default unit of
Offset measure display for position, distance, alt/elev. and speed. Units will be
10. Tap Left, Right or N/G (not given) buttons to select an Offset option for this automatically converted when you generate messages or CFF.
message.
1. To display the Measurement Units screen (Figure 4-50), tap the following:
, Prefs then Measurement Units.
7.2.9.2.2 AirCrew Brief (Line 3-7)
11. Tap to display the second AirCrew Brief (Line 3-7) screen (Figure 7-39).
Target Location
Once the Location information is entered on the previous screen, the Target
Location will be filled and the IP-to-Target will be set. This Target Location
may be changed if needed.
12. Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on completing the
Location information.
DRAFT 177 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 94 March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual
Figure 4-50 Units of Measurement Preferences Screen
Figure 7-38 CAS (Line 1-2) Screen Figure 7-39 CAS (Line 3-7) Screen
2. Tap each for all fields and select the desired information.
: For Field Artillery (FA) observers the following options are recommended: Position
= UTM, Distance = Meters, Direction = mils Grid and Alt/Elev = Meters.
Position Distance Direction Alt/Elev Speed
Decimal Meters Mils True Meters Miles/Hour
Degrees
Deg:Min:Sec Kilometers Mils Kilometers Kilometers/Hour
Magnetic
MGRS Feet Mils Grid Feet Knots
UTM Yards Deg True Yards
Nautical Deg Nautical
Miles Magnetic Miles
Statute Deg Grid Statute
Miles Miles
Figure 7-40 CAS (Line 8-9) Screen
3. When complete, tap .
7.2.9.2.1 AirCrew Brief (Line 1-2)
4.4.15 Preferences (Prefs) Setup – Automatic Position
Reporting
CAS# (Required)
The Automatic Position Reporting function controls how often your position 4. Tap in the CAS# field and enter an appropriate value using the available
will be automatically reported back to the command center. This time interval keypad.
also controls how often the pop-up prompt will appear when an operator’s
position coordinates are too old for accurate transmissions.
DRAFT 95 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 176 March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual
1. To display the Auto Position Reporting screen (Figure 4-51), tap the
41. Tap to save the report request to persistent storage for later review
and transmission. following: , Prefs then Auto Position Reporting.
42. Tap to access a list of previously saved report requests.
Position
a. To open a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
Reporting
. Criteria
b. To delete a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
. The selected request will be removed immediately.
c. To delete all requests, tap .
d. To exit the Open Report/Request screen, tap at the top right. Reporting
Interval
7.2.9.2 CAS (AirCrew) Briefing
When a device is set in FiST mode, the Aircrew Briefing reports may be
forwarded to up to 4 other recipients on the tactical network after being
reviewed or not reviewed.
Figure 4-51 Position Reporting Setup Screen
2. Position reporting may be accomplished either automatically and/or
1. Tap to enter an AirCrew Briefing.
manually as described below.
2. If fire missions were not previously sent, or planned targets have not yet
3. Tapping the Off option will disable automatic reporting but will still allow you
been created, a warning will be displayed stating that there are no
to send out a position report from the Main PFED screen Reports button.
established fire missions. Tapping at this point returns you to the
Main PFED screen.
3. If fire missions were sent, the first AirCrew Brief (Line 1-2) screen will : It is important that the location displayed on the Main PFED screen be your true
display (Figure 7-38). location. This location is attached to every message that is sent. And in case of an
emergency, this location would be used to locate you.
4. Tapping the On option configures PFED to report your position at regular
intervals based on time and/or distance traveled.
: The automatic setting does not prevent you from sending manual position reports
via the Main PFED screen Reports button.
5. When on, you have the option to report your position by Time. Tapping this
option configures PFED to report your position at regular intervals based on
time. Enter a time using the available keypad. It is recommended that this
setting be no less than 15 minutes to reduce system traffic.
6. Tapping the Distance option configures PFED to report your position based
on distance moved. Enter a distance using the available keypad. 500
meters is the recommended entry and is the system default.
7. The Both option configures PFED to report your position based on time or
distance. A position report will be sent based on time or distance depending
DRAFT 175 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 96 March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual
on which condition is met first. Each condition is set independently 7.2.9.1.2.1 Add New Locations
according to steps 5 and 6 above.
8. When complete, tap . 27. To enter a new list item, tap to clear all fields.
28. Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on completing the
4.4.16 Preferences (Prefs) Setup – Hotkeys Location information.
29. Tap to select a Mark and corresponding Color value (if available) for how
The Hotkeys function is used to configure the devices external buttons to allow a the friendly location will be indicated to the aircraft.
quicker way of recalling a fire mission for transmission, or performing a check
firing. The fire missions are stored in PFED in the form of templates. Before a. If the Flares, Light, Panels or Colored Smoke option is selected in the
Mark field, the Color field will be available.
creating any CFF templates, the hotkey buttons must be configured. They are
located on the PFED device itself (Figure 4-52). These buttons may be un- 30. Tap to add the new item to the list.
assigned for no operation if the operator wishes, or configured to activate a
31. Repeat this process to enter multiples Friendly forces.
template.
1. Access the Hotkeys Setup screen (Figure 4-53) by tapping the following: 7.2.9.1.2.2 Edit Existing Locations
, Prefs then Hotkeys. 32. To modify an existing location item, tap on the listed entry to select it.
33. Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on completing the
Location information.
Button 2 Button 3
34. Tap to select a different Mark and corresponding Color value (if
available).
a. If the Flares, Light, Panels or Colored Smoke option is selected in the
Button 1 Mark field, the Color field will be available.
Button 4
35. Tap to update the selected location item.
Figure 4-52 PFED Handheld Hotkey
7.2.9.1.2.3 Remove Existing Locations
Buttons
36. To remove a listed location, tap on the existing location entry to select it then
tap .
7.2.9.1.2.4 Exit Mark Location List
37. To exit the Mark Location List screen tap .
Figure 4-53 Hotkeys Setup Screen
2. To change a hotkey assignment setting, tap on any listed button to select it. Remarks
Your selection will display in the Button assignment field and activate the
assignment selection to its right. 38. Tap to access the Text Entry screen to enter any additional
3. Tap and select any of the available options. remarks using the available keypad.
39. When finished, tap .
4. Tap to save this assignment.
5. If needed, repeat steps 2 through 4 to change any other button Send, Save, Open Buttons
assignments.
40. Tap after reviewing your report for accuracy. This will queue the
message for transmission.
DRAFT 97 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 174 March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual
6. Once you have made all needed changes, you may now create the CFF
17. Tap to access the Final Attack Heading screen. Use the templates for those buttons assigned as CFF Template (refer to section
available keypad to enter the attack heading value. When finished, tap 4.4.11 Fire Support Setup – CFF Templates).
. 7. If you wish to reset all of the buttons back to their defaults, tap
18. Tap to select a measurement for the Attack Heading value. .
19. When finished with the Mark Location screen, tap . 8. When complete, tap at the top right.
Target Description - Size 4.4.17 Preferences (Prefs) Setup – SALUTE/ATI
20. Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for information The Messaging function controls how the SALUTE/ATI report is transmitted.
on completing the Size information.
1. To display the Messaging Preferences screen (Figure 4-54), tap the
Target Description - Target Type (Required)
following: , Prefs then SALUTE/ATI.
21. Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for information
on completing the Target Type information.
Protection
22. Tap to select a degree of Protection value for the target.
Protection
In The Open Prug
Prone Dug In
Prand Overhead Cover
7.2.9.1.2 CAS Request (Screen 2)
23. Tap to display the CAS Request – Screen 2 screen (Figure 7-37).
Initial Point (IP) Name
Figure 4-54 Messaging Preferences Screen
24. Tap under Initial Point and enter a name using the available keypad. 2. Tap the appropriate option to configure how the SALUTE/ATI report will be
transmitted.
Location (Required only if IP Name field has been filled)
3. When complete, tap .
25. Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on completing the
Location information. 4.4.18 Database Maintenance
Friendly Locations PFED stores most data in individual databases. The Database Maintenance
feature allows you to purge these databases, including:
26. Tap to access the Mark Location List screen (Figure
Inbox, Outbox, Plain Text Messages (PTM), Transmit Queue
7-42) for entering location information for the closest Friendly forces.
All Reports/Requests (SALUTE/ATI, MEDEVAC, NBC1, etc)
Fire Support (Fire Missions, Known Points)
DRAFT 173 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 98 March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen PFED User Manual Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual
Tracks: Deletes all tracks (unit positions) received or created by you. FP Name/Mission Priority
A track is created every time you send a SALUTE/ATI report or Fire
Mission 5. If this message is set as a Preplanned, enter a name in the FP Name field.
Unit List: Deletes the unit list 6. Tap to select a Mission Priority of Paramount, Essential, Ordinary or
Routine.
1. To display the Database Maintenance screen (Figure 4-55), tap the
Time on Target (TOT)
following: then Databases.
7. Tap to access the Date/Time Entry screen. Using , enter the
desired time on target. This field in initially set to the current system time.
When finished, tap .
8. Tap to select a Desired Results of Neutralization, Smoke, Mark,
Harassment, Interdiction, Destruction, Illumination or Final Protective
Fire.
Location (Required)
9. Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on completing the
Location information.
Mark Type (Required)
10. Tap to access the Mark Location screen (Figure 7-41) and enter
the method that will be used to indicate the target to the aircraft.
Figure 4-55 Database Management Screen 11. The Location information from the previous step will pre-fill on the Mark
Location screen. If not, repeat step 9 above.
2. To purge data from specific databases, tap the checkbox to the left of the
12. Tap to select a Marking Type.
database name. Tap , then tap either to confirm or
a. If the Flares, Light, Panels or Colored Smoke option is selected, the
to cancel. Marking Color field will be available.
3. To purge all of the listed databases, tap , then tap either to b. If the Laser Designator option is selected, the Laser Code, Laser/Tgt
Line and Attack Heading fields will be available.
confirm or to cancel.
13. Tap to select a Marking Color for the Flares, Light, Panels or Colored
Smoke Marking Types.
4. To purge the address/unit list database, tap , then tap
14. Tap to access the Laser Code screen. Using the available
either to confirm or to cancel.
keypad, enter the code value. When finished, tap .
5. To exit the Database Maintenance screen, tap .
15. Tap to access the Laser-Target Line screen. Use the
4.4.19 Exiting PFED available keypad to enter the laser/target value. When finished, tap
.
1. To exit the PFED application, tap the following: then Exit.
16. Tap to select a measurement for the Laser/Tgt Line value.
DRAFT 99 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 172 March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual Chapter 5 - Communications PFED User Manual
CHAPTER 5
COMMUNICATIONS
5.1 INTRODUCTION
Before PFED can be used to send and receive messages, you must properly
configure the communications device networks. This tells PFED how to “talk”
with external devices (such as a GPS), Lightweight Forward Entry Device
Figure 7-35 CAS Select Screen (LFED) users, Forward Entry Device (FED) users, other PFED users and
AFATDS terminals.
5.1.1 Device Setup
The Devices option is where you configure the external devices and radios
Figure 7-36 CAS Request - Screen 1 attached to your system. The following external sensors are currently supported:
Rockwell-Collins PLGR – GPS receiver
Leica – Laser Range Finding binoculars
Mark VII – Laser Range Finding binoculars
Sensor Link Protocol (SLP) – LRF communications protocol designed
for IP networks
Imagery Interface
: SLP devices are assumed to support location information as well as polar data
(i.e., Azimuth, Elevation Angle, Target Range).
5.1.1.1 Configuring Devices
1. To display the Device Setup screen (Figure 5-1), tap the following: ,
then Devices.
Figure 7-37 CAS Request - Screen 2 2. Add a SINCGARS network:
a. In the Comms section, tap .
7.2.9.1.1 CAS Request - Screen 1 b. Tap on the SINCGARS option. This will display the TACLINK Setup
screen.
3. Select if this request is an Immediate or Preplanned.
c. Tap in the Network Name field and enter a new name.
CAS#
4. The system automatically assigns a CAS# to each briefing message. : PFED will allow the operator to store multiple network configurations for
However, tap in the CAS# field if you need to change this briefing number. communications across multiple types of networks. This configuration will work in relation
to your units in the Address/Unit List. Each unit will be stored based upon a network
configuration using the unique name entered here.
DRAFT 171 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 100 March 16, 2009
Chapter 5 - Communications PFED User Manual Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual
d. In the Network Type field, tap and select the network you will be
using. 6. Once all URN’s have been listed in the URN’s to Query column, tap
to transmit the request. The primary recipient will then reply to this request
e. If you selected the 188-220A or 188-220C network (Figure 5-2): with any and all information available. The reply will appear in the operator’s
Inbox.
: It is strongly recommended that the operator begin by entering a value in the first 7. Tap to save the request for later transmission.
portion of the Rank field. The Station ID and the last part of the Local IP fields will be pre-
filled with the last octet value based on the number entered for the operators Rank. 8. Tap to access a list of previously saved requests.
i) Begin by entering a value in the Rank field. Notice that the last
a. To open a request, tap on the request to select it then tap .
octet value has been entered into the Station ID and the final part
of the Local IP fields.
b. To delete a request, tap on the request to select it then tap .
ii) If needed, change the value of the Station ID field by entering the The selected request will be removed immediately.
correct value for the last octet. If you have changed this value,
notice that the final part of the Local IP field has been updated
with this new value. c. To delete all requests, tap .
iii) In the first three (3) parts of the Local IP field, enter the Local IP
d. Tapping will return you to the URN Query screen to enter a
address that is assigned to your unit. The last portion should be
new query request.
filled with the correct last octet value. If not, correct this value now.
e. To exit the Open Report/Request screen, tap at the top right.
iv) Tap .
7.2.9 CAS Request/AirCrew Briefing
The CAS Request consists of 2 separate screens and the AirCrew Briefing report
consists of 3 separate screens.
: All CAS Briefs will be handled by the unit established as Primary in the unit list.
CAS Briefs may only be created for an established fire mission.
: CAS Briefs can NOT be sent to version 7.01 FOS systems. If the primary unit is a
7.01 FOS system, the FOS system will return a CANTPRO (Cannot Process) message to
the PFED system upon receipt of the CAS Brief.
1. Tap from the Main PFED screen. The CAS Select screen will
Figure 5-1 Device Setup Screen Figure 5-2 188-200A/188-220C Setup display (Figure 7-35) to choose a CAS Request or an AirCrew Briefing.
Screen
7.2.9.1 CAS Request
PFED will transmit all CAS Request reports with a priority of Immediate when
sending on a tactical network.
2. To enter a CAS Request tap (Figure 7-36).
DRAFT 101 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 170 March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual Chapter 5 - Communications PFED User Manual
c. To delete all requests, tap .
d. To exit the Open Report/Request screen, tap at the top right.
7.2.8 URN Query
The URN Query option allows the operator to transmit requests to the designated
primary recipient for all known information on existing URN’s within the
operator’s address book, or new and unknown URN’s. When a device is set in
FiST mode, the URN Query reports may be forwarded to up to 4 other recipients
on the tactical network after being reviewed or not reviewed.
1. Tap from the Reports/Requests screen. The first Query URN
screen will display (Figure 7-34).
Figure 5-3 188-220A/188-220C Settings Advanced Screen
v) Tap and select the parameters according to your radio setup for
the Configuration field.
188-220A 188-220C
4800 PT SC 4800 PT SC
4800 CT SC 4800 CT SC
4800 CT FH 4800 CT FH
Non Standard 1200N PT SC
1200N CT SC
1200N CT FH
2400N CT FH
4800N CT FH
Non Standard
Figure 7-34 URN Query Screen vi) Tap and select the parameters according to your radio setup for
the Modulation field of NRZ, FSK-188C or STANAG-4202A.
2. Enter a new URN in the New unknown URN field and tap . This will vii) Tap and select the parameters according to your radio setup for
place the URN in the URN’s to Query column. the Baud Rate field.
3. Tap on a listed unkown URN in the Rcvd unknown URN’s field and tap . 188-220A 188-220C
This will place the URN in the URN’s to Query column.
600 600
4. You may also query on any known URN’s by selecting a known URN listed 1200 1200
in the Known URN’s field and tapping . This will place these URN’s in 2400 1200N
the URN’s to Query column as well.
4800 2400
5. To remove a URN from the URN’s to Query column, tap on the number to 16000 2400N
select it and tap . 4800
4800N
16000
DRAFT 169 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 102 March 16, 2009
Chapter 5 - Communications PFED User Manual Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual
viii) Tap and select the parameters according to your radio setup for Anti-Tank Rocket All Subtypes Unknown, 75MM, 76MM,
the Security field. Launcher 80MM, 81MM, 82MM, 85MM,
88MM, 90MM, 100MM,
188-220A 188-220C 105MM, 106MM, 107MM/4.2
Plain Text Plain Text Inch Mortar, 120MM, 122MM,
130MM, 152MM, 155MM,
Cipher Text Cipher Vinson 160MM, 175MM, 180MM,
ix) Tap and select the parameters according to your radio setup for 203MM/8 Inch Howitzer
the Hop Mode field, Single Channel or Frequency Hop. Howitzer-Self Propel All Subtypes 155MM
155MM
x) Tap and select the parameters according to your radio setup for
the Error Correct field. Howitzer-Self Propel All Subtypes 203MM/8 Inch Howitzer
203MM
188-220A 188-220C Howitzer-Towed All Subtypes 105MM
None None 105MM
Scrambling Only Scrambling Only Howitzer-Towed All Subtypes 155MM
155MM
FEC Only
FEC + Scrambling Flash-to-Bang Time
FEC + TDC
FEC + TDC + Scrambling 16. In the Flash-Bang Time field, tap to increase/decrease the value of time
Double FEC TDC (in seconds) needed.
xi) Place a check mark in the Use Net Busy Delay field if you wish to
use the timing settings configured for the 188-200C network. 17. You may also tap to access the Flash to Bang Time
screen. Using the available keypad, enter the amount of flash to bang time
xii) When complete tap .
needed. When finished, tap .
xiii) When ready, tap . You may be prompted to reset your
PFED device. Tap to pass this message. DO NOT reset
Comments
the device at this time.
18. Tap to access the Text Entry screen to enter any remarks
f. If you selected the TACFIRE network (Figure 5-4):
and/or damage information. When finished, tap .
i) Tap in the Network Name field and enter a new name.
ii) In the Station ID field enter the address assigned to your unit. Send, Save, Open Buttons
iii) Tap to display the advanced TACFIRE Settings screen
(Figure 5-5). 19. Tap after reviewing your report for accuracy. This will queue the
message for transmission.
20. Tap to save the report request to persistent storage for later review
and transmission.
21. Tap to access a list of previously saved report requests.
a. To open a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
.
b. To delete a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
. The selected request will be removed immediately.
DRAFT 103 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 168 March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual Chapter 5 - Communications PFED User Manual
Caliber (Required)
The Caliber selection list will display only those choices that are associated with
the selected Weapon Type. The list shown here is a complete list of all possible
calibers for all Weapon Types.
15. Tap and select a Caliber. The available options are dependent upon the
selection of the Weapon Type and SubType:
Weapon Type Subtype Caliber
Artillery Unknown Unknown
Light Unknown, 45MM, 57MM,
70MM, 75MM, 76MM, 85MM,
88MM, 100MM, 105MM,
122MM
Medium Unknown, 130MM, 152MM,
155MM
Figure 5-4 TACLINK TACFIRE Setup Figure 5-5 TACFIRE Settings Advanced
Heavy Unknown, 175MM, 180MM, Screen Screen
203MM/8 Inch Howitzer
Mortar Unknown Unknown iv) Tap and select the parameters according to your radio setup for
Light Unknown, 60MM, 81MM, the Baud Rate, Mod(ulation), Network Access Delay (NAD) Hi
82MM Init(ial), Hi Sub(sequent), Lo Init(ial) and Lo Sub(sequent) and
Medium Unknown, 107MM/4.2 Inch the Error Correction.
Mortar, 120MM v) Notice the Key Time field is defaulted with the value of 0.7. If this
Heavy Unknown, 160MM default value is not accurate, tap in the Key Time field and enter
Very Heavy Unknown, 240MM, 280MM the correct value using the available keypad. When complete, tap
Rocket All Subtypes are: Unknown, 20MM, 45MM, .
Unknown 57MM, 60MM, 70MM, 75MM,
Light 76MM, 80MM, 81MM, 82MM, 3. When ready, tap .
Medium 85MM, 88MM, 90MM, 2.75
Heavy Inch/Airborne Rocket
Very Heavy : If corrections are needed tap on the network in the Comms list needing
Nuclear
Light Self Propel adjustment, then tap to access the Taclink Setup screen.
Medium Self Propel
Heavy Self Propel 4. If needed, repeat step 2 above any number of times for additional
Very Heavy Self Propel SINCGARS or Two-Wire networks.
Antipersonnel
Position 5. To activate a network in your device list:
TACAIR, Surface To All Subtypes Unknown, 100MM, 105MM, a. Tap on any SINCGARS or Two-Wire item in the Comms list then tap
Surface Missile and 106MM, 107MM/4.2 Inch
MLRS Mortar, 120MM, 122MM, to initialize the device.
130MM, 152MM, 155MM,
160MM, 175MM, 180MM,
203MM/8 Inch Howitzer,
237MM, 240MM, 260MM,
280MM
Smoke, 5IN38, All Subtypes NO Available Calibers
5IN54 and 16IN50
DRAFT 167 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 104 March 16, 2009
Chapter 5 - Communications PFED User Manual Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual
Weapon Type/Subtype (Required)
9. For the [Weapon] field, tap and select a Weapon Type (see table under
: Be aware that only one network may be activated at any one time. You must Caliber for available options).
10. For the [Subtype] field, tap and select a weapon Subtype (see table
stop ( ) the connection of one network to activate another. To do so, first stop the under Caliber for available options).
active network then activate an alternate network. If the network needs to be restarted, tap
Munitions
.
6. Add a PLGR to your device list. The Munitions Type selection list will display only those munitions that are
associated with the selected Weapon Type. The list shown here is a complete
a. Above the Sensors section, tap (Figure 5-6). list of all possible munitions for all Weapon Types.
b. Tap on the PLGR option. This will be added to the Sensors list.
11. To the left of the [Munition] field, tap to increase/decrease the value of
for the number of rounds.
c. Tap on the PLGR item in the list then tap .
d. Check to make sure all connection information is set correctly: 12. You may also tap to access the Number of Rounds screen. Using the
Port Num = (refer to Table 3 for proper COM settings) available keypad, enter the number of rounds. When finished, tap .
Baud Rate = 9600 13. For the [Munition] field, tap and select a Munitions Type.
Stop Bits = 1
Flow Control = None Munition Type
Data Bits = 8 Unknown Smoke – Red Riot Control ICM Dual Purpose
Parity = None Agent CS
HE Smoke – Gas GB Antipersonnel Mine –
Embedded PLGR COM6 Yellow Long Delay
PLGR Models S & G COM6
PLGR Model C COM6 ICM Smoke – Gas H or HD Antipersonnel Mine –
Violet Short Delay
PLGR With Cable Connection to the COM1
bottom of the R-PDA Antipersonnel Smoke – HC White Antimaterial Mine –
Table 3 COM Settings When Using PLGR Phosphorus WP Long Delay
Smoke – Green Illumination Mix HE and WP Antimaterial Mine –
e. Change information as necessary then tap . Short Delay
f. Tap on the PLGR item in the list then tap . This will initiate the
PLGR device and turn the indicator “green” ( ). Nature of Fire
7. Add a Mark VII LRF to your device list. 14. Tap and select a Nature of Fire of Adjustment, Fire For Effect or
Harassing.
: When configuring a Mark VII device for operation with PFED, you MUST set the
system to use PLGR CON. : When sending R5, SWB2 or SWB3 formatted messages, additional comments
must be sent in voice mode. There is no access to a detailed comment block or field to
a. At the top, above Sensors tap . include these additional comments.
b. Tap on the Mark VII option. This will be added to the Sensors list.
c. Tap on the Mark VII item in the list then tap .
DRAFT 105 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 166 March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual Chapter 5 - Communications PFED User Manual
d. Tap the first blank to enter the minimum Range Gate value.
Enter the value in the displayed screen then tap .
e. Tap the second blank to enter the maximum Range Gate
value. Enter the value in the displayed screen then tap .
: When configuring an LRF device, it is recommended that a beginning and ending
Range Gate value be entered. This range, in meters, will designate the LRF devices
receiving boundaries. If an LRF device receives a value that falls outside its boundary, the
message “Bad LRF Data” will be displayed.
f. When using the serial communication verify the following:
Port Num = COM1
Baud Rate = 9600
Stop Bits = 1
Figure 7-32 Shelling Report Screen Figure 7-33 Weapon Direction Screen Flow Control = None
Data Bits = 8
3. Use the available keypad to enter a value for the weapons direction. When Parity = None
finished, tap .
4. Tap and select a measurement for the Weapon Direction. g. Change any information as necessary then tap .
Detection Method (Required) h. Tap in the Mark VII item in the Sensors list then tap .
8. Add a Leica 4/21A/21B to your device list.
5. Tap and select a Detection Method of Flash, Sound or Groove.
a. At the top above Sensors tap (Figure 5-6).
Start of Strike/End of Strike Time
b. On the Device Select screen tap on the Leica (4/21A/21B) option. This
will be added to the Sensors list.
The Start of Strike/End of Strike Time field is pre-filled with the current system
date and time data. However, this may be changed if needed.
c. Tap on the Leica (4/21A/21B) item in the list then tap .
6. Tap to access the Date/Time Entry screen. Using , enter the d. Tap the first blank to enter the minimum Range Gate value.
desired start time of strike. When finished, tap . Enter the value in the displayed screen then tap .
e. Tap the second blank to enter the maximum Range Gate value.
7. Tap to access the Date/Time Entry screen. Using , enter the
Enter the value in the displayed screen then tap .
desired end time of strike. When finished, tap .
f. Do the following to configure the Leica under a serial connection:
Location (Required) i) On the Configure Device screen (Figure 5-7), make sure the Serial
8. Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on completing the Cable option is selected and tap .
Location information. ii) Verify the following configuration:
Port Num = COM1
Baud Rate = 9600
Stop Bits = 1
Flow Control = None
DRAFT 165 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 106 March 16, 2009
Chapter 5 - Communications PFED User Manual Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual
Data Bits = 8 Send, Save, Open Buttons
Parity = None
iii) Change any information as necessary then tap . 13. Tap after reviewing your report for accuracy. This will queue the
message for transmission.
iv) Tap to return to the Device Setup screen.
14. Tap to save the report request to persistent storage for later review
v) Tap in the Leica (4/21A/21B) item in the Sensors list then tap . and transmission.
This will initiate the Leica device and turn the indicator “green” ( ).
g. Do the following to configure the Leica under a Bluetooth connection: 15. Tap to access a list of previously saved report requests.
a. To open a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
.
: The capability of configuring a device for Bluetooth communications is dependant
upon what build of the PFED software was provided. If the About screen contains the build b. To delete a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
number followed by No BT, then this step will not apply.
. The selected request will be removed immediately.
c. To delete all requests, tap .
d. To exit the Open Report/Request screen, tap at the top right.
: Declination in the Leica MUST be set to 0.0 to insure data integrity.
1. To verify/reset the declination to 0:
7.2.7 Shelling Report
a. Click the left (Azimuth) key 3 times in rapid succession.
b. “deCL 0” should be displayed on the screen. PFED will transmit all Shelling reports with a priority of Routine. When a
device is set in FiST mode, the Shelling reports may be forwarded to up to 4
2. If there is a value entered for declination (a number other than “0” is displayed):
a. Click the left (Azimuth) key 5 times in rapid succession. “Unit Sett” will display on other recipients on the tactical network after being reviewed or not reviewed.
the screen.
b. Click the right button once.
c. Click the left (Azimuth) key 5 times. “Stor” will display on the screen. 1. Tap from the Reports/Requests screen. The Shelling
d. Click the left (Azimuth) key 5 times in rapid succession. Report screen will display (Figure 7-32).
e. Click the right button until the units are “6400 SI-U”.
f. Click the left (Azimuth) key 5 times in rapid succession. “Stor” will display on the
screen.
: Some fields will require the use of the system keypad that appears on the bottom
half of the screen. If this keypad does not disappear automatically for you, you may need
to tap the keypad ( ) found at the very bottom right of the screen. This will remove the
: When configuring an LRF device, it is recommended that a beginning and ending keypad from your display and allow access to any fields or buttons that may have been
Range Gate value be entered. This range, in meters, will designate the LRF devices hidden.
receiving boundaries. If an LRF device receives a value that falls outside its boundary, the
message “Bad LRF Data” will be displayed.
Weapon Direction
i) On the Configure Device screen tap to enter the Select
Connection screen and highlight the Bluetooth option. This will 2. Tap to access the Weapon Direction screen (Figure 7-33).
display the Destination Address (Figure 5-8).
ii) Tap to go to the Edit Bluetooth Address screen
(Figure 5-9) and enter the Bluetooth Destination Address of the
Leica. This address should be found on the Leica device.
iii) Tap twice to return to the Configure Device screen.
DRAFT 107 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 164 March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual Chapter 5 - Communications PFED User Manual
c. To modify the Ready, Damage and Destroy fields of an existing listed iv) If this device was perviously configured with a Serial connection,
item, tap on the listed entry, modify the Ready, Damage and Destroy you first must remove this configuration before you can save and
activate the Bluetooth setup. Tap the Serial Cable option under
fields then tap .
the Connections list and tap .
d. To remove a listed entry, tap on the listed entry to select it then tap
v) Tap to return to the Device Setup screen (Figure 5-1).
.
e. To exit the screen and return to the Unit Status Report screen, tap
.
Unit Geometry
The unit geometry approximates the physical size, span and density of your unit.
Length (Required)
6. Tap to access the Length screen. Use the available keypad to
enter an approximate value of the length-wise span of your unit. When
finished, tap .
7. Tap and select a measurement for the Length field.
Width (Required)
Figure 5-6 Device Select Screen Figure 5-7 Configure Device
8. Tap to access the Width screen. Use the available keypad to Screen - Serial
enter an approximate value of the width-wise span of your unit. When
finished, tap .
9. Tap and select a measurement for the Width field.
Formation/Heading/Posture
10. Tap and select a Formation option.
11. Tap and select a Heading option.
12. Tap and select a Posture option.
Formation Heading Posture
Column N (north) Dismounted
Line S (south) Mounted
Other E (east)
W (west)
NE (north east)
Figure 5-8 Configure Connection Screen - Bluetooth
SE (south east)
NW (north west) vi) On the Leica device, click the left (Azimuth) key 6 times in rapid
SW (south west) succession. “IF Sett” will display for a short time, followed by the
current interface setting selected for the Leica.
DRAFT 163 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 108 March 16, 2009
Chapter 5 - Communications PFED User Manual Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual
vii) Click the right button until “bt PC CON” is displayed.
viii) Click the left (Azimuth) key 6 times in rapid succession. “Stor”
should be displayed. If it is not, begin again at step v 2 steps
above. After “Stor” is displayed, “bt pair” will be displayed.
ix) On the PFED device, make sure the Leica (4/21A/21B) option is
highlighted then tap .
x) This will initiate the Leica device and turn the indicator “green” ( ).
xi) On the Leica device, click the right button once then “bt end”
should be displayed.
xii) Perform a laze with the Leica by pressing both buttons at once and
releasing. The distance and direction to the target should be
displayed. “bt stdby” should then display and PFED should
receive the data (Figure 5-10). If the Leica displays “bt fail” refer
to section B.5).
xiii) With every laze, there will be a warning prompt (Figure 5-11).
Make sure that no declination is set within the Leica before Figure 7-29 Unit Status Report Screen Figure 7-30 Personnel Status Table
accepting any data. Screen
xiv) Tap to accept the data.
Figure 7-31 Platforms Status Screen
Figure 5-9 Edit Bluetooth Address Figure 5-10 Lazed Data Received a. To enter a new item, tap . Tap on the Platform, Ready,
Screen Damage(d) and Destroy(ed) fields and enter the information using the
available keypad. When finished, tap .
b. If you have many entries to make that are similar, you can tap on the
listed entry that is similar, change the value in the Platform field (make
changes to the other fields as needed), then tap . This will
create a new entry.
DRAFT 109 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 162 March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual Chapter 5 - Communications PFED User Manual
c. To delete all requests, tap .
d. To exit the Open Report/Request screen, tap at the top right.
7.2.6 Unit Status Report
The Unit Status Report is used to convey information on unit composition,
geometry and status. PFED will transmit all Unit Status reports with a priority
of Routine.
1. Tap from the Reports/Requests screen. The Unit Status
Report screen will display (Figure 7-29).
Unit Composition
The Unit Composition section of this report screen has two tables: Personnel Figure 5-11 Warning Declination Prompt
and Platform Types.
9. Add any other sensor devices needed by repeating step 7 or 8.
2. Tap to access the Personnel Status Table screen (Figure 7-30) 10. To delete any Comms or Sensor device:
to adjust the number of personnel that are On Hand, MIA (missing in a. Select the item you wish to remove.
action), WIA (wounded in action), and KIA (killed in action) in your unit.
3. Tap on each of the options listed in the table and use the available keypad b. Tap to remove the device.
to enter the number of personnel for that selected item.
11. Save all settings by tapping until you have returned to the Main
4. When finished, tap . PFED screen.
5. Tap to access the Platforms Status screen (Figure 7-31). 12. Exit PFED by tapping and Exit.
13. If the system prompted you to reboot the handheld to enable the
communications network, perform a Soft Reset and restart PFED (refer to
section 3.3.1 Soft Reset) at this time.
: The light next to each device does NOT indicate success or failure of PFED
connectivity with the device. These icons are used to denote that a device should be
turned on. Check your Communications Status screen to verify connectivity and refer to
Appendix B TROUBLESHOOTING if you encounter problems.
5.1.2 Address/Unit List Setup
The Address/Unit List stores information about other users whom you may
communicate with using your handheld. This feature may be accessed while in
the Message screen or through the Address/Unit List setup.
DRAFT 161 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 110 March 16, 2009
Chapter 5 - Communications PFED User Manual Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual
Rocket Subsurface
: To complete the unit list information accurately, data should be obtained from the ADM
unit TACSOP.
Flash-to-Bang Time – Nuclear Only
5.1.2.1 Units Configuration
17. In the Flash-Bang Time field, tap to increase/decrease the value of time
1. From the Main PFED screen, tap , then Address/Unit List (Figure needed.
5-12).
18. You may also tap to access the Flash to Bang Time screen
2. Tap . (Figure 7-28). Using the available keypad, enter the amount of flash to bang
time needed. When finished, tap .
: You may also modify and delete existing units by selecting one, or selecting all
with the , and tapping , . To unselect all units, tap . You
may also send the Imagery information by tapping .
3. If needed, tap the tab. This will display the Unit – New Unit screen
(Figure 5-13).
Figure 7-28 Flash to Bang Time Screen
Send, Save, Open Buttons
19. Tap after reviewing your report for accuracy. This will queue the
message for transmission.
20. Tap to save the report request to persistent storage for later review
Figure 5-12 Unit List Screen Figure 5-13 Unit – New Unit Screen and transmission.
(without Messages tab)
21. Tap to access a list of previously saved report requests.
4. Tap the Location Unknown button at the top to enter a location for this unit
address (refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on a. To open a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
completing the Location field).
.
5. Using the available keypad, enter a unique call sign name for a new address
in the Call Sign field. This field is stored locally on the PFED device. This b. To delete a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
name may be anything the operator chooses if not given by the TACSOP.
. The selected request will be removed immediately.
6. In the Unit Name field, enter a value for this information.
DRAFT 111 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 160 March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual Chapter 5 - Communications PFED User Manual
11. When finished, tap . 7. In the URN field, enter the URN for this unit. This field has a maximum
length of 8 digits.
: To associate a URN to a Call Sign, simply add a URN and Call Sign without
assigning it to a net.
8. Also enter a value for the ID field.
9. Tap to the right of the Service, Role and Echelon fields to select the
appropriate values (see table of selections in section 4.4.6 step 5).
10. Tap to the right of the System Type field to select the appropriate value.
11. Tap to display the Laser Information screen (Figure 4-35 – refer to
section 4.4.6 step 7).
12. Tap to display the Platform Types screen. Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF
(Screen 1) – Target Description for completing the Platform Type
information.
Figure 7-27 Cloud Data Screen 5.1.2.2 Network Information
Start/End Attack Time (Required) – Biological and Chemical Only When a device is configured as an FO or a FiST unit, the operator may designate
a unit address in his/her list as being their direct report, or primary. This will
The Start of Attack/End of Attack Time fields are generally pre-filled with the ensure that the designated primary unit will be sent all fire support messages,
current system date and time data. However, these may also be changed if including initial calls for fire, subsequent adjustments and end of missions. The
needed. operator may also specify other units as being either the direct or indirect
address on the tactical network. When a unit is specified as direct, PFED will
allow the operator to specify the unit’s network address that will be used for
12. Tap to access the Date/Time Entry screen. Using , enter the sending messages to this unit. When a unit is specified as indirect through
desired start of attack time. When finished, tap . another unit, PFED will compose messages with the remote unit’s URN
included in the recipient list of the message and sent to the routing unit’s
13. Tap to access the Date/Time Entry screen. Using , enter the network address.
desired end of attack time. When finished, tap .
14. Tap the appropriate option for the needed Agent Type. When a device is configured as a FiST unit, the system will allow the operator to
designate units other than the primary to be subordinate units (units that report
Delivery Means (Required) directly to them). Routing and updating modes of Review, Automatic and FR
Approval may also be specified for these subordinate units.
15. Tap and select a Delivery Means.
1. Tap the tab to display the Unit - Nets screen (Figure 5-14).
Burst Type (Required)
2. If you wish to set this unit as the primary recipient, tap I report directly to
16. Tap and select a Burst Type. this Unit (Primary) to check it. You may only set ONE unit as the primary
message recipient. If the device is configured as a Fire Support Team, Fire
Delivery Means Burst Type Support Element or Fire Support Officer, there will be an option to indicate
Aircraft (default) Air (default) This Unit reports directly to me. If checked, this unit will be made
Missile Surface available as a Subordinate Unit.
DRAFT 159 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 112 March 16, 2009
Chapter 5 - Communications PFED User Manual Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual
3. If the network you wish to select for this unit is displayed in red, this
indicates that the network is not yet configured for the unit. Select the
network and tap to setup its configuration for the current
unit.
: To ONLY delete a networks associated data tap .
: In the Unit - Nets screen, note the different colors displayed to the left of the
available networks. When selecting a network for a unit, you may choose any available
connection. However, only one may be active at any one time. A green ( ) icon indicates
the network that is active. The blue ( ) icon indicates the network is not yet activated.
4. This will display the Connection Setup screen. Based on what network type
the selection has been configured, 188-220A/188-220C or TACFIRE, will
depend upon which screen appears (Figure 5-15 or Figure 5-16). Figure 7-25 NBC1 – Biological Screen Figure 7-26 NBC1 – Chemical Screen
5. For the 188-220A/188-220C network type, enter the Station Address and
the IP Address for the unit on this network.
Location (Required)
6. For the TACFIRE network type, enter the Station Address that corresponds
to the unit on this network.
The Location field is generally pre-filled with the operator’s current location
7. For any selected network, select a message format type of R5, SWB2 or data. However, this may be changed if needed.
SWB3.
3. Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on completing the
Location information.
4. Tap the appropriate button option for the needed Location Type.
5. Tap the appropriate button option for the needed Event Type.
Detonation Time (Required) – Nuclear Only
The Detonation Time is automatically pre-filled with the current system date and
time. However, this also may be changed if needed.
6. Tap to access the Date/Time Entry screen. Using , enter
the desired detonation time. When finished, tap .
7. Tap to access the Cloud Data screen (Figure 7-27).
8. Tap the appropriate button to select the Measure Cloud From either from
Figure 5-14 Unit - Nets Screen Figure 5-15 188-220A/188-220C Net Top or Bottom.
Setup Screen 9. Using the available keypad, enter values for the Stabilized Height, Angular
Height and the Width fields.
10. Tap and select the measurement values for the Stabilized Height,
Angular Height and the Width fields (i.e., m = Meters, mil G = mils G, etc).
DRAFT 113 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 158 March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual Chapter 5 - Communications PFED User Manual
c. To delete all requests, tap .
d. To exit the Open Report/Request screen, tap at the top right.
7.2.5 NBC 1 Report
The NBC 1 Report (Observer’s Report) option allows you to report a Nuclear,
Biological or Chemical attack. When a device is set in FiST mode, the NBC
reports may be forwarded to up to 4 other recipients on the tactical network after
being reviewed or not reviewed.
: Some FOS versions do not correctly process the transmission of NBC 1 Reports.
When AFATDS receives this report, it does not correctly parse the Location information and
displays it incorrectly. It is recommended that the operator transmit a Freetext message
following the transmission of an NBC 1 Report identifying the correct grid coordinate
information. Figure 5-16 TACFIRE Net Setup Screen Figure 5-17 Transmit Indirect
8. To specify this unit as a Direct address on the network, the Direct indicator
1. Tap from the Reports/Requests screen. The NBC 1 Report should be displayed (Figure 5-15). This setting is the default for all units, so
screen will display (Figure 7-23). nothing will need to be changed.
9. If you wish to specify this unit as an Indirect address on the network, tap
2. Tapping , or will access the
NBC1 – Nuclear screen (Figure 7-24), NBC1 – Biological screen (Figure to change it to and display a
7-25) or NBC1- Chemical screen (Figure 7-26).
field (Figure 5-17).
10. To select which unit you wish to route this unit through, tap
. This will display the Unit List Selection
screen (Figure 6-2).
11. Place a check mark in the box to the left of the unit you wish to designate as
the routing unit then tap to return to the Connection Setup screen.
12. Tap twice to return to the Unit List screen.
13. To create other units for the same or other networks, repeat the steps in
sections 5.1.2.1 and 5.1.2.2 as many times as needed.
5.1.2.3 Message Configuration
When the operator has configured the handheld with a Role of Fire Support
Officer, Fire Support Element or Fire Support Team, the Unit List screen
will allow (Figure 5-18) the customization of the routing/relaying and Messages
Figure 7-23 NBC1 Report Screen Figure 7-24 NBC1 - Nuclear Screen of Interest (MOI). When in this mode the operator may; 1) specify certain
messages to be sent to another system when received from a specific unit after it
has been reviewed or not reviewed; 2) specify a message to be copied and sent
to another system(s) when it has been received from a specific unit; 3)
view/edit/forward/deny/create messages that have been received from a specific
DRAFT 157 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 114 March 16, 2009
Chapter 5 - Communications PFED User Manual Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual
unit. All, or some, of these procedures may be performed with the following
19. Tap to access the Text Entry screen to enter the National Stock
message types; On Call Fire Commands, Subsequent Adjust, Message to Number (NSN) or description by using the available keypad. When finished,
Observer (MTO), EOM, FSCM, AirCrew Brief, Observer Notifications of Shot,
tap .
Splash and Roudns Complete, Check Firing, CFF, Observer Coordinates
(OBCO), NBC1, MEDEVAC, and Free Text. 20. Tap to access the Text Entry screen to enter the Nomenclature
description by using the available keypad. When finished, tap .
1. Tap the tab to display the Unit - Messages screen (Figure
5-19). 21. Tap to access the Text Entry screen to enter an End Item
2. To route messages to alternate Units, tap and place a description using the available keypad. When finished, tap .
check mark to the left of any and all units. When complete, tap . 22. Tap to access the Quantity screen. Use the available keypad
3. To route a text copy to alternate Units, tap and place a to enter the desired quantity. When finished, tap .
check mark to the left of any and all units. When complete, tap . 23. Tap to access the Priority screen. Use the available keypad to
enter the priority value. When finished, tap .
: The Review Type and Update Type field’s allows the operator to configure the
24. When finished with the Class IX Supplies screen, tap .
system to require that all messages are to be reviewed before routing the message, or
updating any system information (refer to section 6.4 Receiving Messages (Inbox) for
further information). Transportation Helicopter Support Team (HST)
4. Tap to select a Review Type of Auto, FR Approval or Review.
25. Tap to access the Text Entry screen to enter the
5. Tap to select an Update Type of Auto or Review. Transportation/Helicopter Support Team information using the available
6. To specifically customize the routing of all transmissions by message type, keypad. When finished, tap .
tap . This will display a list of all message types (Figure
5-20). Send, Save, Open Buttons
26. Tap after reviewing your report for accuracy. This will queue the
message for transmission.
: If the Resupply Request message is too large for transmission, a pop-up message
will alert you to remove a specific amount of text. It is recommended that you begin
removing the stated amount of characters from the Trans/Hst and/or the Eng Spt text
fields. These fields may be easiest to re-write or narrow down. Try transmitting the
message again once the noted amount of characters have been removed.
27. Tap to save the report request to persistent storage for later review
and transmission.
28. Tap to access a list of previously saved report requests.
a. To open a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
.
Figure 5-18 Unit – New Unit Screen (with Figure 5-19 Unit - Messages Screen
b. To delete a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
Messages tab)
. The selected request will be removed immediately.
DRAFT 115 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 156 March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual Chapter 5 - Communications PFED User Manual
Class IX Supplies
: If both the NSN and Nomen fields are filled for the Supply Identification Type,
the system will will only send out the NSN data.
18. Tap to access the Class IX Supplies screen (Figure 7-22).
Figure 5-20 Custom Setup Screen
7. Tap on each message type to select it, then tap either or
and select the Unit(s) this message type will be transmitted.
8. When complete, tap .
5.2 COMMUNICATIONS STATUS
Figure 7-20 Medical Nomenclature List Figure 7-21 Maintenance Contact Screen
Screen
The Communications Status screen is used to provide quick access in viewing
the status of the sensors and communication devices configured on your PFED
handheld. When the toolbar icon displays the “ ” symbol, this indicates that
the communication network is connected and functional. If the toolbar displays
the “ ” symbol, this informs the operator that there may be a problem with the
active network connection.
1. To open the Communications Status screen (Figure 5-22 and Figure 5-23),
tap or in the command bar at the bottom (Figure 5-21).
Figure 7-22 Class IX Supplies Screen
DRAFT 155 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 116 March 16, 2009
Chapter 5 - Communications PFED User Manual Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual
Medical Supplies
Communication
Status 14. Tap to access the Medical Supply List screen (Figure 7-20).
This nomenclature screen allows the entry of specific medical supplies
needed.
a. To enter a new list item, tap . Tap on the Nomen and Qty fields
Figure 5-21 Communications Status and enter the information using the available keypads. When finished,
Button
tap .
b. If you have many entries to make that are similar, you can tap on the
Figure 5-22 Communications Status listed entry that is similar, change the value in the Nomen field, then tap
Screen
. This will create a new entry.
c. To modify the quantity of an existing item, tap on the listed entry,
modify the Qty information only then tap .
d. To remove a listed entry, tap on the listed entry to select it then tap
.
e. To exit the screen and return to the Rapid Resupply Request screen,
tap .
Maintenance Contact Team
15. Tap to access the Maintenance Contact Team screen (Figure
7-21). Tap any of the available options listed on this screen to select it.
Figure 5-23 Communications Status with Data
: Only one item may be selected. If more items need to be specified, it is
5.2.1 Device Status Information recommended the operator add this information in the Description field.
The device shown in the Communications Status window contains an icon 16. Tap to access a Text Entry screen where you may enter a
indicator denoting whether the device is operable. At any time, you may tap
description of the maintenance required. When finished, tap twice
to view what these icons are indicating for each device. Tapping if needed.
will remove the legend information.
Engineering Support
1. To view detailed status information, tap on the device name in the list. The
textual information shown below the list will change depending on the device 17. Tap to access the Text Entry screen to enter a description of
selected. For example, when you tap on the PLGR option (Figure 5-24),
you will see the Sat Vis, Sat Used, Almanac Age and Key State information the engineering support required. When finished, tap .
for that device.
DRAFT 117 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 154 March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual Chapter 5 - Communications PFED User Manual
Figure 5-24 PLGR Legend/Status Information
Figure 7-18 Fuel Nomenclature List Figure 7-19 Batteries Nomenclature List 2. You can also tap to expand the screen and monitor communications
Screen Screen traffic (Figure 5-23). Certain events are posted to this screen and messages
are displayed during transmission and receipt of data.
a. To enter a new list item, tap . Tap on the Nomen and Qty fields 5.2.2 Resetting a Device
and enter the information using the available keypads. When finished,
tap . 1. Tap on a listed device (Figure 5-25). This will display a (reset) option.
b. If you have many entries to make that are similar, you can tap on the 2. If the device was disconnected for a short time and PFED shows the device
listed entry that is similar, change the value in the Nomen field, then tap
as not operable, the operator may reset the connection by tapping .
. This will create a new entry.
c. To modify the quantity of an existing item, tap on the listed entry,
modify the Qty information only then tap .
d. To remove a listed entry, tap on the listed entry to select it then tap
.
e. To exit the screen and return to the Rapid Resupply Request screen,
tap .
7.2.4.2 Rapid Resupply Request (Screen 2)
Figure 5-25 Communications Status Device Selection
The supply items listed on the second screen may be requested for echelons
above squad level. 5.3 TRANSMISSION STATUS
13. Tap .
Once a message is sent from PFED it is added to a list called the transmission
queue. This queue is a cumulative list of messages sent from your device along
with their transmission status. For example, the message may be waiting in the
transmission queue, in the process of being sent, has already been sent, or the
DRAFT 153 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 118 March 16, 2009
Chapter 5 - Communications PFED User Manual Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual
transmission could have failed. A failed transmission could be due to a number d. To remove a listed entry, tap on the listed entry to select it then tap
of factors such as an overburdened network or loose hardware connections. The .
Transmission Queue screen (Figure 5-27) allows the operator to abort, defer,
retry or transmit data to a new unit. e. To exit the screen and return to the Rapid Resupply Request screen,
tap .
5.3.1 Accessing Transmission Queue
Fuel
1. Tap on the satellite icon ( ) at the bottom as shown in Figure 5-26.
11. Tap to access the Fuel Supply List screen (Figure 7-18). A
2. The Transmission Queue screen will appear (Figure 5-27). From this
nomenclature list will be shown.
screen you can view a list of transmitted messages, or perform a function on
a message. Simply tap on a message shown in the list and tap one of the
a. To enter a new list item, tap . Tap on the Nomen and Qty fields
buttons provided.
and enter the information using the available keypads. When finished,
tap .
Transmission
Queue b. If you have many entries to make that are similar, you can tap on the
listed entry that is similar, change the value in the Nomen field, then
tap . This will create a new entry.
c. To modify the quantity of an existing item, tap on the listed entry,
Figure 5-26 Transmission Queue Button modify the Qty information only then tap .
d. To remove a listed entry, tap on the listed entry to select it then tap
.
e. To exit the screen and return to the Rapid Resupply Request screen,
tap .
Figure 5-27 Transmission Queue Screen
Batteries
The list is divided into three columns, Message, To and Status. The Message
column lists the type of message being transmitted (i.e., Free Text, CFF, NBC1,
etc). To the left of the message type will be an icon depicting the status of the 12. Tap to access the Batteries Supply List screen (Figure 7-19). A
nomenclature list will be shown.
message. The icons can be interpreted as stated in Table 4.
If any of the status text is hidden, use the horizontal scroll at the bottom of the
list to view the rest of the description.
: PFED contains two (2) CFF mission buffers that act as holding areas for “active”
missions that are waiting for transmission, or in the process of transmission. The first
buffer processes Immediate missions only. The second buffer processes all mission types
including Immediate missions. One buffer must complete a transmission before the other
may begin a transmission.
DRAFT 119 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 152 March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual Chapter 5 - Communications PFED User Manual
: Immediate Smoke/Suppression missions are processed before any other
mission type. However, since PFED contains two (2) mission buffers, only two Immediate
missions may be “active” at the same time as long as both buffers are empty. If the second
buffer contains a different type of mission, the new Immediate mission will be placed in a
“wait” state. This is indicated in the Fire Mission Monitor by an hourglass ( ) icon and a
status of “Waiting for free active buffer…”. Once the second buffer has completed
transmission, the new Immediate mission will be activated.
Icon Status Meaning
Queued in the system buffer and awaiting
Queued
transmission.
Deferred Transmission has been deferred.
Being transmitted and is waiting for an
Waiting for ACK Acknowledgement (ACK) from the destination
(yellow) (Attempt #) unit. The number depicts the number of attempts
Figure 7-15 MRE's Entry Screen Figure 7-16 Water Entry Screen
that have been made.
Received The message was received.
(green)
Transmission was attempted 3 times, the
maximum number of retries. An
Failed
(red) acknowledgement was not received from the
destination unit.
The transmission failed immediately possibly due
Failed
(red) to equipment problem.
Recipient unable The message that PFED attempted to send was
(red yield) to process unable to be processed by the recipient.
Table 4 Transmission Status Indicators
: The toolbar icon is replaced with any of the above icons showing the
Transmission Status of the current message being processed.
Figure 7-17 Ammo Nomenclature List Screen
5.3.1.1 Aborting a Transmission
a. To enter a new list item, tap . Tap on the Nomen and Qty fields No matter what state a message is in, it is possible to abort it and remove it from
and enter the information using the available keypads. When finished,
the queue list.
tap .
1. Tap on the message to select it.
b. If you have many entries to make that are similar, you can tap on the
listed entry that is similar, change the value in the Nomen field, then 2. Tap . The message will be aborted and removed from the
tap . This will create a new entry. queue list.
c. To modify the quantity of an existing item, tap on the listed entry,
modify the Qty information only then tap .
DRAFT 151 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 120 March 16, 2009
Chapter 5 - Communications PFED User Manual Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual
5.3.1.2 Retrying a Transmission
3. Tap to access the Date/Time Entry. Using , enter the
It is possible to retransmit a message if it has failed transmission. A failed desired time of resupply. This field is initially set to the current system time.
transmission is indicated with a red dot icon and the status description of Failed. When finished, tap .
1. Tap on the message to select it. Instructions
2. Tap . The message will be resent and its status will be
4. Tap to access the Text Entry screen to enter clarifying
updated in the list.
instructions. Use the available keypad to enter the instructions. When
5.3.1.3 Deferring a Transmission finished, tap .
If transmission of a message fails, it is possible to defer the message. Deferring Number of Meal’s Ready to Eat (MRE’s)
a transmission means halting it indefinitely.
5. In the # MRE’s field, tap to increase/decrease the number of individual
MRE’s needed.
6. You may also tap to access the MRE’s screen (Figure 7-15).
: In certain instances, a message may still be transmitted by the system if it‘s Using the available keypad, enter the number of individual MRE’s needed.
still in the transmit queue, regardless of whether you have chosen to defer it or abort it. When finished, tap .
This can happen when the message has been buffered to the TACLINK card and is still
awaiting transmission because of network traffic or communications problems. Should this
happen, you will see the message disappear from the transmit queue since the end system
Amount of Water
will have received it.
7. In the # Water field, tap to increase/decrease the amount of water
1. Tap on the message to select it. needed.
2. Tap . 8. You may also tap to access the Water screen (Figure 7-16).
3. To continue sending the message after it has been deferred, highlight the Using the available keypad, enter the amount of water needed. When
finished, tap .
deferred message and tap . This will resend the entire
message. 9. To state the measurement of needed Water, tap and select a
measurement (i.e., Gallons, Quarts).
5.3.1.4 Sending to a New Unit
Ammunition
1. Tap on the message to select it.
10. Tap to access the Ammo Supply List screen (Figure 7-17). A
2. Tap . The Unit List screen will appear. nomenclature list will be shown.
3. Follow instructions in section 5.1.2 Address/Unit List Setup to add a new
unit, or select an existing unit. Then tap . The message will be sent
to any units selected in the Unit List screen.
5.3.1.5 Exit
1. Exit the screen by tapping at the top right.
DRAFT 121 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 150 March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual Chapter 5 - Communications PFED User Manual
5.4 ALERTS
Any alerts that appear during operation of the device will appear in the Alerts
screen. These messages may be reviewed at any time and can be removed if no
longer needed. If there are no alerts stored in this screen, the icon will display in
grey ( ). When an alert has been stored, the icon will display in red ( ).
When the alert screen has reached a maximum of 50, the oldest alert will be
removed and replaced with the newest.
5.4.1 Accessing Alerts
1. Tap on the alert icon ( ) at the bottom as shown in Figure 5-28. This will
display the Alerts screen (Figure 5-29).
Figure 7-13 Rapid Resupply Request Alerts
Figure 7-14 Rapid Resupply Request
(Screen 1) (Screen 2)
: Some fields will require the use of the system keypad that appears on the bottom
half of the screen. If this keypad does not disappear automatically for you, you may need Figure 5-28 Alerts Button
to tap the keypad ( ) found at the very bottom right of the screen. This will remove the
keypad from your display and allow access to any fields or buttons that may have been
hidden.
7.2.4.1 Rapid Resupply Request (Screen 1)
The supply items listed on this first screen may be requested for any echelon.
Location (Required) Figure 5-29 Alerts Screen
2. Any alerts that are no longer needed may be removed by selecting the alert
The Location field is pre-filled with the operator’s location information.
However, this data may be changed. and tapping .
2. Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on completing the 3. If you wish to remove all of the displayed alerts, tap .
Location information.
Resupply Time (Required) : A yellow ( ) exclamation point indicates a medium alert. A red ( ) exclamation
point indicates a critical alert.
The Resupply Time field is pre-filled with the current system date and time.
This information may be changed if needed.
DRAFT 149 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 122 March 16, 2009
Chapter 6 - Messaging PFED User Manual Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual
Send, Save, Open Buttons
CHAPTER 6
MESSAGING 35. Tap after reviewing your report for accuracy. This will queue the
message for transmission.
6.1 INTRODUCTION 36. Tap to save the report request to persistent storage for later review
and transmission.
Message functions allow you to view messages sent to and received from your 37. Tap to access a list of previously saved report requests.
handheld. In addition, you can compose a message that is not available as a
preformatted report. This type of message is known as a free text or plain text a. To open a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
message. .
b. To delete a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
6.2 ACCESSING THE MESSAGE SCREEN
. The selected request will be removed immediately.
c. To delete all requests, tap .
1. Tap on the Main PFED screen. Three option tabs are available.
The New PTM will display as the default. The other two, Inbox and Outbox d. To exit the Open Report/Request screen, tap at the top right.
are also available (Figure 6-1).
7.2.4 Rapid Resupply Request
2. To access each tab, simply tap on the appropriate tab at the top of the
screen.
The Rapid Resupply Request can be used for battalion size or larger resupply
requests, or for company size or smaller. For requests pertaining to echelons
below battalion, choose smaller quantitative units (i.e., quarts of water instead of
gallons) and leave any items that do not apply blank. PFED will transmit all
Resupply reports with a priority of Routine.
1. Tap from the Reports/Requests screen. The first Rapid
Resupply Request screen will display (Figure 7-13). By tapping , this will
display the second Rapid Resupply Request screen (Figure 7-14).
Figure 6-1 Message – New PTM Screen
DRAFT 123 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 148 March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual Chapter 6 - Messaging PFED User Manual
Battle Roster (BR) Number 6.3 SENDING A MESSAGE (NEW PTM)
34. Tap to access the Battle Roster screen (Figure 7-12). Using the Sending a message consists of two parts, creating the message and transmitting
available keypad, enter the Battle Roster Number value. When finished, the message. A message may be composed and saved for later transmission, or
tap . composed and immediately transmitted.
6.3.1 Composing a Message
1. Tap the tab at the top of the screen.
2. Tap in the Subject and text area fields to input your message using the
available keypad.
6.3.2 Selecting Recipients
Before transmitting your message, you need to select the recipient of the
message. You can send the message to any unit(s) available.
1. Tap at the top left. The Unit List screen will appear that shows a list
of units stored on the handheld device.
Figure 7-10 Injury Type Screen Figure 7-11 Injury Description Screen
Figure 6-2 Unit List Screen
Figure 7-12 Battle Roster Number Screen : To locate specific Call Signs, enter one or more characters in the Names
containing field and tap .
2. To select one or more recipients, tap on the desired Call Sign(s) to place a
check mark in the box. Then tap . If the call sign you are looking
DRAFT 147 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 124 March 16, 2009
Chapter 6 - Messaging PFED User Manual Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual
for does not appear in this list, you can manually add the call sign to the list Back Image
(refer to section 5.1.2 Address/Unit List Setup). Head (tap Neck (tap Shoulder Back (tap Upper Lower
head) neck area) (tap just upper/lower Extremity Extremity
3. To see all of the recipients of a message, tap to the right of the below back area) (tap (tap
field. shoulder) arms/hands) legs/feet)
4. To send a copy of the message to a specific recipient, tap . Non Battle Non Battle Non Battle Non Battle Non Battle Non Battle
Cut Cut Cut Cut Cut Cut
5. To select a copied recipient, or multiple recipients, tap on the desired Call
Burn Burn Burn Burn Burn Burn
Sign(s) to place a check mark in the box. Then tap . Sick Fracture Sick Fracture Sick Sick
6. To see all of the copied recipients of a message, tap to the right of the Fracture Perforation Fracture Perforation Fracture Fracture
field. Perforation Shock Perforation Nuclear Amputation Amputation
Nuclear Puncture Puncture Biological Perforation Perforation
6.3.3 Selecting Priority Wound Wound
1. To select a Priority option, tap to the right of the Priority field and select Biological Other Other Chemical Nuclear Nuclear
an option from the list. Chemical Wounded in Wounded in Shock Biological Biological
Action Action
6.3.4 Saving Messages Shock Combat Combat Puncture Chemical Chemical
Stress Stress Wound
In some instances you may not want to immediately send a message. For Puncture Other Shock Shock
example, if you know you are in an area where you will not be able to transmit Wound
messages, you can save the message to wait until you are able. Or perhaps you Other Wounded in Puncture Puncture
Action Wound Wound
are not finished composing the message and would like to finish it at a later
Wounded Other Other
time. in Action
Combat Wounded in Wounded in
1. Once your message is composed, tap . Stress Action Action
Combat Combat
6.3.5 Opening a Saved Message Stress Stress
1. Tap . The Open Report/Request screen will display (Figure 6-3) 28. From the pop-up list that displays, tap on the type of injury to select it. The
containing a list of saved messages. selection will appear at the bottom of the screen.
29. To delete a selection, tap on the injury listed at the bottom to highlight it then
tap .
30. To remove all injury types, tap .
31. When done, tap .
32. To enter a full description of the injury, tap to access the Injury
Description screen (Figure 7-11).
33. Using the available keypad, enter a full description of the injuries. When
finished, tap .
DRAFT 125 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 146 March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual Chapter 6 - Messaging PFED User Manual
Front Image (Top)
Face Shoulder Neck Chest Upper Extremity
(tap face) (tap just below (tap neck (tap upper chest (tap lower arms)
shoulder) area) area)
Non Battle Non Battle Non Battle Non Battle Non Battle
Cut Cut Cut Cut Cut
Burn Burn Burn Burn Burn
Sick Sick Fracture Sick Sick
Fracture Fracture Perforation Fracture Fracture
Perforation Perforation Shock Perforation Amputation
Shock Puncture Puncture Nuclear Perforation
Wound Wound
Puncture Other Other Exhaustion Nuclear
Wound
Other Wounded in Wounded in Biological Biological
Action Action
Figure 6-3 Open Report/Request Screen
Wounded in Combat Combat Chemical Chemical
Action Stress Stress
2. Tap on the desired message then tap . The saved message will
Dental Shock Shock
appear for changes and transmission.
Combat Puncture Wound Puncture Wound
Stress
Other Other : Tapping within this screen will return you to the Message screen to create
Wounded in Wounded in a new message for transmission.
Action Action
Combat Stress Combat Stress 6.3.6 Deleting a Saved Message
Front Image (Bottom)
1. Tap . The Open Report/Request screen will display (Figure 6-3)
Abdomen OBGYN Lower Extremity containing a list of saved messages.
(tap waist area) (tap lower hip area) (tap legs/feet area)
Non Battle Non Battle Non Battle 2. Tap on the desired message then tap . The saved message will
Cut Cut Cut
be removed. If you wish to remove all saved messages, tap .
Burn Burn Burn
Sick Sick Sick 6.3.7 Transmitting a Message
Perforation Fracture Fracture
Nuclear Perforation Amputation 1. Tap when the message is complete.
Exhaustion Nuclear Perforation 2. The Main PFED screen is displayed.
Biological Biological Nuclear 3. If the transmitted message fails, a red dot ( ) will display in the toolbar at
Chemical Chemical Biological the bottom of the Main PFED screen. Tap on this red dot to access the
Shock Shock Chemical Transmit Queue screen. Here you have the option to retry, abort, defer or
Puncture Wound Puncture Wound Shock send to a new unit (refer to section 5.3.1 Accessing Transmission Queue).
Other Other Puncture Wound
Wounded in Action Wounded in Action Other
Combat Stress Wounded in Action
Combat Stress
DRAFT 145 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 126 March 16, 2009
Chapter 6 - Messaging PFED User Manual Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual
: If the operator’s device is set as a FiST unit, and a message is received while
working in the New PTM window, the alert will display “behind” the keypad and will not be
visible to the operator. However, the alert icon ( ) will flash indicating a new alert has
been received. To view this new alert, tap the icon ( ) to display the Alerts window, or tap
the Inbox or Outbox tabs to view the new alert display.
6.4 RECEIVING MESSAGES (INBOX)
The Inbox allows the operator to sort, view, route, update, forward, reply, delete
and save received messages. Due to memory constraints of the PFED handheld
devices, the Inbox may only retain up to 50 messages. When the Inbox has
reached this maximum, each new message received will cause the system to
delete the oldest message. However, the operator does have the option of saving
or locking up to ten (10) messages that will not be replaced or deleted unless
Figure 7-7 # of Litter Patients Screen Figure 7-8 # of Ambulatory Patients
they are manually removed. Screen
1. When a message has been received, a popup screen is displayed (Figure
6-4).
Figure 6-4 Message Received Popup
: If you don’t wish to view messages at this time, tap to close the pop-up.
You will then need to access the Inbox to view the message at a later time (Figure 6-5).
: The system will alert the operator when the Inbox has reached a 60% full capacity,
or it contains approximately 27 messages. Figure 7-9 Number of Injuries Screen
Injury Type/Description
2. Tap in this pop-up screen. This will display the most recent
message received (Figure 6-5). If multiple messages have been received 26. Tap to the left of to access the graphical Injury Type screen
since the last time the messages were viewed, an is available to move (Figure 7-10).
through the new unread messages. 27. To indicate what type of injury and where it is located on the body, tap on
the body area in the Front/Back images. The available selections are as
follows:
DRAFT 127 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 144 March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual Chapter 6 - Messaging PFED User Manual
Unknown Open Flame 3. Any received message may also be viewed at any time by accessing the
Pyrotechnics
Signal
Inbox located in the Message screen (Figure 6-6) by tapping from
Panels the Main PFED screen.
Signal Lamp
Smoke: Green
Smoke: Red
Smoke: Violet
Smoke:
Yellow
Vehicle Lights
VS17 Panel:
Orange
VS17 Panel:
Violet
Number of Litter Patients
20. Tap to the right of the # Litters button to enter the total number of Litter
Patients.
21. Or, tap to access the # of Litter Patients screen (Figure 7-7). Figure 6-5 View Message Screen Figure 6-6 Message – Inbox Screen
Using the available keypad, enter the Number of Litter Patients. When
finished, tap .
: At a quick glance of the Inbox, the operator can visually identify several levels of
Number of Ambulatory Patients status for all messages listed. Message’s that are shown in bold text indicate that they
have not yet been viewed. The icons displayed (Figure 6-6) to the left of each message
indicate the following:
22. Tap to the right of the # Ambul button to enter the total number of
Ambulatory Patients.
- high priority message
- message is awaiting update
23. Or, tap to access the # of Ambulatory Patients screen (Figure
- message is awaiting routing
7-9). Using the available keypad, enter the Number of Ambulatory
Patients. When finished, tap . 4. If the user has sent any type of message and the recipient cannot process
the message, the PFED system receives a CANTPRO message and an
Number of Injuries alert dialog is displayed (Figure 6-7). After the user has tapped ,
the transmit queue is displayed with an icon beside it and a status of
24. In the # Injuries field, tap to increase/decrease the number of injured ‘Recipient unable to process’ (Figure 6-8).
personnel.
25. You may also tap to access the Number of Injuries screen
(Figure 7-9). Using the available keypad, enter the number of injured
personnel. When finished, tap .
DRAFT 143 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 128 March 16, 2009
Chapter 6 - Messaging PFED User Manual Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual
13. When done, tap .
Need Medic
14. If a Medic is needed, tap the Need Medic option to check it.
Priority
15. Tap for the Priority field and select an option.
Nationality
16. Tap for the Nationality field to select the nationality of the injured
personnel.
PZ Security
17. Tap for the PZ Security field and select an option.
Figure 6-7 Message – Cannot Process Figure 6-8 Message – Cannot Process
Alert Message in Transmit Queue
PZ Contamination (Required)
5. Once the user taps , the message is deleted from the system. 18. Tap for the PZ Contamination field and select an option that describes
If the message was a fire mission, it is also deleted from the fire mission contamination of the pickup zone.
database.
PZ Markings (Required)
6.4.1 Sorting
19. Tap for the PZ Markings field and select an option that indicates how the
1. Tap the tab. PZ will be marked.
2. Tap on each of the column headers (i.e., , , Priority Nationality PZ PZ PZ Markings
Security Contamination
) to sort by either message summary, date/time received or
locked/unlocked. Each time you tap on a header, it will change the sort in Urgent: save Foreign No Enemy Biological Chemical
ascending or descending order. An arrow will appear in the header life, limb, or Civilian Light: Blue
indicating which column is sorted and by what direction. eyesight;
evacuate
3. To exit the screen tap at the top right. within 1 hour
(default)
6.4.2 Viewing Priority: Foreign Possible Chemical Chemical
evacuate Military Enemy Light: Green
1. Tap the tab and tap on the message you wish to view. within 4 hours
Routine: Prisoner Enemy Nuclear Chemical
2. Tap to read the message. evacuate Light: Orange
within 24
3. To exit the screen tap at the top right.
hours
US Civilian Enemy, None Chemical
6.4.3 Routing Need Light: Red
Armed
1. Tap the tab and tap on the message you wish to route. Escort
US Military Chemical
2. Tap to read the message. (field default) Light: Yellow
DRAFT 129 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 142 March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual Chapter 6 - Messaging PFED User Manual
Figure 7-4 MEDEVAC Request Screen Figure 7-5 Location screen Figure 6-9 Message Awaiting Routing Figure 6-10 Message Awaiting Routing
and Updating
3. To route a message, tap . If the message is awaiting route and
update, the button will appear with both options ( ).
: If is tapped, the message will be routed AND the system will be
updated.
4. To exit the screen tap at the top right.
6.4.4 Updating
1. Tap the tab and tap on the message you wish to update.
2. Tap to read the message.
Figure 7-6 Direction to Enemy Screen 3. If you wish to update only, tap .
9. On the Direction To Enemy compass, tap the location to identify which 4. If you wish to update AND route, tap .
direction the enemy is in relation to the operator. If the operator is
5. To exit the screen tap at the top right.
surrounded by the enemy, tap the Surrounded option.
10. In the Type of Hostile Fire selections, tap the symbol that best describes the 6.4.5 Denying
type of enemy fire.
1. Tap the tab and tap on the message you wish to deny.
11. When done, tap . The selections will display in the top half of the
screen. 2. Tap to read the message.
12. To remove an enemy information item, tap the item you wish to remove to
select it then tap .
DRAFT 141 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 130 March 16, 2009
Chapter 6 - Messaging PFED User Manual Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual
3. If you wish to cancel both the Routing and Updating options, tap .
This will process the message and transmit a free text message indicating : Some fields will require the use of the system keypad that appears on the bottom
that the message was denied. half of the screen. If this keypad does not disappear automatically for you, you may need
4. To exit the screen tap at the top right. to tap the keypad ( ) found at the very bottom right of the screen. This will remove the
keypad from your display and allow access to any fields or buttons that may have been
6.4.6 Forwarding/Replying hidden.
1. Tap the tab then tap on the message you wish to process (you may PZ (Pickup Zone) Location/Name
also forward and reply to messages under the Outbox tab).
2. Tap or and the Plain Text Message screen will open waiting
to be transmitted (Figure 6-11). : When sending to an R5, SWB2 or SWB3 you are not required to enter a PZ
3. Select the recipients and input additional comments using the available Location or a Name.
keypad.
2. Tap to enter the appropriate location
4. When ready, tap . information (Figure 7-5).
3. Enter a name in the Name field using the available keypad.
4. Or tap to enter a location coordinate (refer to
section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for instructions).
5. When finished, tap .
Request # (Required)
6. Tap to access the Request Number screen. Using the
available keypad, enter a value that is five (5) characters long. When
finished, tap .
Type
7. Tap for the Type field and select either Air (default) or Ground.
Figure 6-11 Forwarding/Replying Messages
Enemy Info
6.4.7 Locking/Unlocking Messages 8. Tap to enter the direction to the enemy and type of fire
information (Figure 7-6).
1. Tap the tab.
2. Messages that are unlocked are indicated by the open green ( ) padlock.
To lock a message, tap on the padlock to the right of the message you wish
to save. The padlock will change to red and closed ( ) indicating that this
message will not be automatically removed or replaced.
3. To unlock a locked message, tap on the closed red ( ) padlock to change it
back to an open green ( ) padlock.
DRAFT 131 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 140 March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual Chapter 6 - Messaging PFED User Manual
13. When finished, tap . 4. To exit the screen tap at the top right.
Equipment 6.4.8 Editing
1. Tap the tab and tap on the message you wish to edit.
Use the popup keypad to enter any equipment or other amplifying information
associated with the target. 2. Tap to display the message.
3. Before making any changes, you must be aware that if you make any
14. Tap to display the Text Entry screen. changes to a message, it can result in causing the database to be out of
15. Use the available keypad to enter any equipment information. sync. Be sure you wish to make changes to the message. If so, then make
any necessary changes you wish. When ready tap .
16. When finished, tap .
4. The system will warn you about the database being out of sync. To pass
Send, Save, Open Buttons this message tap . The changes will display in the message screen.
5. To exit the screen tap at the top right.
17. Tap after reviewing your report for accuracy. This will queue the
message for transmission. BE AWARE: If your device has been configured 6.4.9 Deleting
to prompt for either a SALUTE or ATI transmission, you will receive a
message requesting which type of report you wish to send. Tap the 1. Tap the tab and tap on the message(s) you wish to remove.
appropriate selection to transmit.
2. Make very sure the correct message has been checked, the system will not
18. Tap to save the report request to persistent storage for later review ask if you wish to remove the selected message(s). Tap . The
and transmission. selected message will be removed immediately.
19. Tap to access a list of previously saved report requests. 3. To delete all messages, tap .
a. To open a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
. : Only messages that are unlocked may be deleted (refer to section 6.4.7
Locking/Unlocking Messages for information on unlocking a message).
b. To delete a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
. The selected request will be removed immediately. 4. To exit the Message screen, tap at the top right.
c. To delete all requests, tap .
6.4.10 Auto Routing
d. To exit the Open Report/Request screen, tap at the top right. When the PFED device has been configured as a FiST unit, this device will
route any incoming non-fire support messages automatically “if” the devices
7.2.3 MEDEVAC Request Unit List contains specific routing instructions. For example; if a non-fire
support message is received and it is addressed to another unit, and that unit has
PFED will transmit all MEDEVAC reports with a priority of Immediate. been configured for routing to another unit in the Unit List, that message will be
automatically transmitted to the other addressed unit. The only indication that
1. Tap from the Reports/Requests screen. The MEDEVAC this process has occurred will be an alert (Figure 6-12) to the operator.
Request screen will display (Figure 7-4).
Figure 6-12 Auto Message Routing
DRAFT 139 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 132 March 16, 2009
Chapter 6 - Messaging PFED User Manual Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual
1. To open the alert to a full screen view tap . Platform Type (Required)
2. Or if you wish to delete the alert from the system tap .
The platform ( ) icon on the SALUTE/ATI Report screen allows you to
3. To remove the alert from the screen, tap at the top right corner of the
describe the target or entity being observed in terms of its general type.
alert window.
4. Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for information
6.5 SENT MESSAGES (OUTBOX) on completing the Platform/Target Type information.
Any time a message is successfully sent, either from one of the Report formats Activity
or as a PTM, it is saved in the Outbox.
This optional field provides extra information about the activity being observed.
5. Tap to the right of the Activity field and select an option from the list.
: Be aware that the Outbox will only retain a maximum of 50 messages. Once the
maximum has been reached, the oldest transmitted message will be replaced with the Activity
newest transmitted message. Attacking Observing
Defending Recon
Delaying Refueling
1. Tap on the Main PFED screen. Engaging Securing
Fortifying Withdrawing
2. Tap the tab at the top. This screen is very similar to the Inbox
screen, but displays only the messages sent from your handheld device Moving
(Figure 6-13).
Location (Required)
6. Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on completing the
Location information.
Unit or Uniform Description
Use the popup keypad to enter Unit or Uniform identifying information.
7. Tap to display the Text Entry screen.
8. Use the available keypad to enter a short description.
9. When finished, tap .
Time of Observation
When you first enter the SALUTE/ATI Report screen, the Time of Observation is
Figure 6-13 Message – Outbox Screen set to the current system time, however it may be changed.
6.5.1 Viewing 10. Tap to display the Date/Time Entry screen (Figure 4-9).
1. Tap the tab then tap on the message you wish to view. 11. Tap on the day, hour, minute, or year to change.
12. Tap and select another month if needed.
DRAFT 133 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 138 March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual Chapter 6 - Messaging PFED User Manual
2. Tap to read the message.
3. When finished, tap at the top right.
6.5.2 Deleting
1. Tap the tab then tap on the message you wish to remove. Make
very sure the correct message has been checked. The system will not ask
if you wish to remove the selected messages.
2. Tap . The selected message will be removed immediately.
3. To delete all messages, tap .
4. To exit the Message screen, tap at the top right.
Figure 7-3 SALT/SALUTE-ATI Report Screen
: Some fields will require the use of the system keypad that appears on the bottom
half of the screen. If this keypad does not disappear automatically for you, you may need
to tap the keypad ( ) found at the very bottom right of the screen. This will remove the
keypad from your display and allow access to any fields or buttons that may have been
hidden.
Threat (Required)
The Threat type describes the entity being observed as Hostile, Friendly,
Neutral or Unknown.
2. Tap to the right of the Threat field and select an option from the list.
Threat
Hostile Neutral
Friendly Unknown
Size
The Size area on the SALUTE/ATI Report screen allows you to enter information
describing the observed entity’s strength (in numbers), physical dimensions and
orientation (attitude).
3. Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for information
on completing the Size information.
DRAFT 137 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 134 March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual Chapter 7 - Reports PFED User Manual
4. If the coordinates, altitude, or heading are over 5 minutes old, tap
CHAPTER 7 on the Main PFED screen to adjust the data
REPORTS (refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry).
7.2.1 Position Report/Observer Coordinates (OBCO)
7.1 INTRODUCTION
1. Tap from the Reports/Requests screen.
The PFED application has several preformatted reports that allow you to quickly
2. If the laser information is not up-to-date, the system will ask if the operator
and accurately enter and transmit battlefield and status information. All of these
messages are in a "fill in the blank" format. wishes to update it now. Tap and follow the instructions found in
section 4.4.6 Own Unit Information (Own Unit Info) Setup to update the laser
information. Or, tap to pass this process.
3. Once you have either updated or passed the laser information update, the
: When entering data of any kind, verify the values are correct before tapping system will immediately queue a position report for transmission. This
any Ok, Send, Save or any other process button. report will be transmitted to the unit designated as primary in the PFED unit
list.
7.2 ACCESSING REPORTS/REQUESTS OPTION
: If for any reason connectivity to the GPS is lost, warning messages will display
indicating the issue.
1. Tap on the Main PFED screen.
7.2.2 SALUTE/ATI Report
2. If the operator’s position information is still current (within a 5 minute time
frame), the Reports/Requests screen will display listing the available report This screen is organized according to the memory aid SALUTE and is used to
formats (Figure 7-1).
report enemy information and activity. When the device has been configured to
3. However, if the operator’s position information is too old to verify (has not send all messages as ATI type, the title bar will indicate which type is being
been updated for over 5 minutes), the system will display an Attention
processed. PFED will transmit all SALUTE/ATI reports with a priority of
message (Figure 7-2) asking that the information be updated.
Routine.
: If a SALUTE/ATI report will be transmitted through a FOS device before it reaches
its final destination, is it recommended that the report be sent as an ATI to correctly
communicate with all devices on the network.
1. Tap / from the Reports/Requests screen. The
SALUTE or ATI Report screen will display (Figure 7-3).
Figure 7-1 Reports/Requests Screen
Figure 7-2 Position Attention Message
DRAFT 135 March 16, 2009 DRAFT 136 March 16, 2009
